Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology (Programme Code 8C012) comprising

Transcription

1 Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology (Programme Code 8C012) comprising Associate in Engineering 工 程 學 副 學 士 Associate in Information Technology 資 訊 科 技 副 學 士 Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business 商 業 統 計 及 電 子 計 算 副 學 士 Associate of Science 理 科 副 學 士 Definitive Scheme Document September 2007

2 This Definitive Scheme Document applies to students enrolling in programmes under the Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology in the 2007/2008 academic year. The Document is subject to review and HKCC may make appropriate changes at any time. Students will be informed of the changes as and when appropriate. Last updated in August 2007

3 Table of Contents Section One: General Information Page 1. Host Department 1 2. Scheme Operation and Management Programmes under the Scheme Scheme and Programme Leaders Scheme Management Committee 1 3. Aims and Intended Learning Outcomes 1 4. Entry Requirements 4 5. Granting of Award 4 6. Mode and Duration of Study 4 7. Attendance 5 8. Curriculum Structure Subject Level and Subject Code Subject Nature Continuing Education Fund (CEF) Approved Programme/Subject Credit and Level Requirements General Education Requirements Award-specific Requirements Associate in Engineering Associate in Information Technology Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business Associate of Science Programme Curriculum Maps Medium of Instruction Teaching and Learning Methods Assessment and Examinations Principles of Assessment Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel Role of Board of Examiners Assessment Methods Academic Probation Progression and De-registration Grading Retaking of Subjects Plagiarism and Dishonesty Guidelines for Award Classification Student Appeals Exceptional Circumstances Other Regulations 43

4 Section Two: Syllabuses Subject Code Subject Name Page CC1001 English Skills for Business Communication 44 CC1002 Astronomy and Fortune-telling 47 CC1003 Chinese Calligraphy and Painting 50 CC1005 Buddhist Culture and Art 53 CC1006 Foundation of Chinese Medicine 56 CC1007 The Art of Chinese Board Games 59 CC1008 Appreciation of Asian and Western Music 62 CC2001 English Skills for Academic Studies 65 CC2002 Creative and Critical Thinking 68 CC2003 Quantitative Methods 71 CC2005 Applied Computing 73 CC2006 Introduction to Internet Technology 75 CC2007 Environmental Science 77 CC2008 Chinese Civilisation 80 CC2009 Chinese Language 82 CC2010 Elementary French 84 CC2011 Japanese I 86 CC2012 Elementary Putonghua 88 CC2014 Aesthetics and Art Appreciation 90 CC2016 Understanding Society 92 CC2019 Introduction to Psychology 94 CC2026 Numerical Skills 97 CC2028 Grammar in Context 99 CC2030 Mathematics 101 CC2031 Japanese II 103 CC2033 Introduction to Philosophy 105 CC2034 The History and Culture of Hong Kong 108 CC2101 Financial Accounting 111 CC2102 Theory and Practice of Management 113 CC2104 Introduction to Microeconomics 115 CC2110 Food Service Operations 117 CC2113 Chinese for Business Executives 119 CC2126 Introduction to Marketing 122 CC2201 Principles of Programming 124 CC2202 Computer System Architectures 126 CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms 128 CC2204 Discrete Mathematics 131 CC2302 Engineering Mathematics 133 CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics 135 CC2307 Engineering Science 138 CC2404 Applied Physics and Instrumentation in Health Care 141 CC2406 Calculus 143

5 Subject Code Subject Name Page CC2417 Human Biology I 145 CC2418 Human Biology II 147 CC2422 Linear Algebra 149 CC2425 Statistics for Business I 151 CC2439 General Chemistry 153 CC3003 Contemporary Social Problems 155 CC3004 Development of Pearl River Delta 158 CC3006 The Perspectives of Eastern and Western Cultures 161 CC3008 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health 165 CC3011 Gender Issues 168 CC3015 Logic 170 CC3016 Mass Media and Culture 172 CC3017 Social Psychology 174 CC3018 The History of Modern China and the World (From Now) 176 CC3020 Oral Communication in English 178 CC3021 Politics and Government 180 CC3022 History, Culture, Economic and Social Development of East Asia 183 CC3023 History, Culture, Economic and Social Development of Southeast Asia 186 CC3024 Japanese III 189 CC3025 Japanese IV 191 CC3121 Business Environment in China 194 CC3122 China s Economy 196 CC3129 Business Putonghua 199 CC3135 Inventory and Warehousing Management 202 CC3143 Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management 205 CC3144 Practicum in Workplace 208 CC3145 Extensive Practicum in Workplace 210 CC3150 Organisational Behaviour 212 CC3153 Principles of Knowledge Management 214 CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems 217 CC3202 Software Engineering 219 CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design 222 CC3204 Data Communications and Networking 225 CC3205 Operating Systems 227 CC3206 Programming Project 229 CC3207 Object Oriented Programming 231 CC3208 Internet Programming 233 CC3209 Internetworking Protocols and Systems 235 CC3210 Database Design and Implementation 237 CC3301 Communication Systems Principles 239 CC3302 Computer Systems Principles 241 CC3303 Design of Production and Service Systems 243 CC3304 Digital System Design 245 CC3305 Engineering Management 247

6 Subject Code Subject Name Page CC3306 Industrial Engineering Techniques and Methods 249 CC3307 Manufacturing Technology 252 CC3308 Quality Engineering 254 CC3309 Society and the Engineer 256 CC3310 Statistics and Probability 258 CC3311 Engineering Materials 260 CC3312 Thermofluids 262 CC3313 Linear Systems 265 CC3314 Engineering Project 267 CC3315 Applied Mechanics 270 CC3316 Architectural Technology in the Built Environment 272 CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project 275 CC3403 Applied Statistical Methods 277 CC3406 Basic Immunology 280 CC3408 Biology of Ageing 283 CC3409 Business Forecasting Methods 285 CC3411 Chinese Family and Culture 287 CC3423 Economic and Social Statistics 289 CC3430 Financial Mathematics 291 CC3434 General Microbiology 293 CC3450 Introduction to Microbiology 295 CC3456 Management Information Systems 297 CC3458 Operation Research for Business 299 CC3467 Social Development in China 301 CC3471 Social Problems and Social Issues in Contemporary China 303 CC3475 Statistical Data Analysis 305 CC3476 Statistics for Business II 307 CC3477 Survey Design and Analysis 309 CC3487 Introduction to Pathophysiology and Pharmacology 311 CC3492 Chinese Government and Politics 316 CC3728 Analytical Chemistry 318 CC3729 Computer Game Programming 320 CC3730 Dynamics and Control 323 CC3731 Electrical Engineering 325 CC3732 Engineering Graphics and Computing 327 CC3733 Further Calculus 330 CC3734 General Biochemistry 332 CC3735 Intermediate Environmental Science 334 CC3736 Multimedia and User Interface Design 337

7 Section One: General Information

8 1. Host Department The Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology ( The Scheme ) is hosted by Hong Kong Community College ( HKCC ), with the academic support from the Department of Applied Mathematics (AMA). 2. Scheme Operation and Management 2.1 Programmes under the Scheme The Scheme comprises the four programmes below: Programme Title Programme Code Associate in Engineering 8C012-ENG Associate in Information Technology 8C012-IT Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business 8C012-SCB Associate of Science 8C012-AS 2.2 Scheme and Programme Leaders A Scheme Leader (SL) is appointed to provide academic support in the realm of quality assurance in both teaching and learning. The SL, with the assistance of a Deputy Scheme Leader, also provides input in staffing, student admission, assessment and feedback, and programme development. Programme Leaders and Assistant / Deputy Programme Leaders (where appropriate) are appointed to manage the various programmes under the Associate Degree Scheme. 2.3 Scheme Management Committee The Scheme Management Committee (SMC) assumes overall academic responsibility. It comprises the Scheme Leader, Assistant Scheme Leader(s), Programme Leaders, Assistant / Deputy Programme Leaders, Subject Leaders / Lecturers and student representatives who will periodically review the academic content, student feedback, and pedagogical issues. Student-staff Consultative Meetings will be held to provide a channel through which students views can be obtained. During these meetings, teaching staff and student representatives meet for constructive discussion on matters relating to student workload, teaching methods, the relevance of the course content and possible improvements. 3. Aims and Intended Learning Outcomes All the programmes under the Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology (ADSST) aim to help students develop a foundation of generic skills and broad-based knowledge that nurture life-long learning. These programmes are designed primarily to provide students with fundamental domain-specific knowledge as well as generic knowledge for future academic pursuits, and secondarily to facilitate their entry into the job market as associate professionals. 1

9 The curriculum structure of ADSST is intended to provide students with choices of specialisms and elective subjects, and to offer them more flexibility. Such choices and flexibility will enable students to make informed decisions on the best ways to enhance their chances for further studies and career development. The intended learning outcomes of the Scheme centre around generic and professional competencies which encompass the attitude, knowledge, and skills expected of AD graduates. These can be specified in great details in the following outcomes: Scheme Outcomes - Outcomes relating to all-roundedness and generic skills Upon graduation from the Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology, students will be able to: 1. critically assess propositions and arguments commonly encountered in daily life, at work and in tertiary level studies; 2. invoke creativity and other problem solving skills in dealing with problems encountered in daily life, at work and in tertiary level studies; 3. effectively use current information technology to carry out tasks commonly encountered in daily life, at work and in tertiary level studies; 4. demonstrate a professional attitude in terms of sense of responsibility, integrity, self-confidence, service attitude, and teamwork; 5. effectively communicate in spoken and written English at a competence level required of associate professionals; and 6. demonstrate ability for self-reflection and language skills which are prerequisites for lifelong learning and continuous professional development. Professional Outcomes In addition to the shared learning scheme outcomes for the Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology as a whole, graduates of individual ADSST programmes will be able to: Associate in Engineering E1. possess the foundation of specific professional skills and knowledge in engineering for further academic and professional development; E2. understand basic engineering / computing principles and analytical skills; E3. apply engineering principles and analytical skills to solve daily life and engineering problems using mathematical techniques, graphical methods and computer technologies at a competence level required of an associate engineer; 2

10 E4. design engineering components, processes or systems to meet design needs at a competence level required of an associate engineer; E5. understand the trends of various engineering developments; E6. demonstrate an understanding of the responsibility and ethics of an associate engineer; and E7. effectively communicate with engineers and non-engineering professionals in written and spoken English. Associate in Information Technology IT1. IT2. IT3. IT4. identify information technology (IT) problems, analyze requirements and apply systematic approaches in the evaluation, design, implementation, and maintenance of hardware and software solutions; communicate with IT and non-it professionals in both written and spoken English at a level of effectiveness sufficient for the presentation of IT systems or projects; build on the foundation of specific professional IT skills and knowledge acquired in this programme with the potential to continue academic and professional development in IT and IT-related fields; and recognise and appreciate potential opportunities and trends of IT to sustain a competitive advantage in the IT industry. Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business SC1. SC2. acquire a sound knowledge of computing technology and statistical principles and techniques, including data analysis and operations research; use statistical methods to analyse relevant problems in business and industry; and SC3. apply necessary skills to provide solution to problems related to the analysis of financial and business activities with the knowledge and techniques learned in the programme. Associate of Science S1. possess the broad education necessary to understand the major findings and ideas in a variety of disciplines such as science, engineering, information technology and business; S2. demonstrate understanding of methods, skills, tools and systems commonly used in a variety of scientific and technological disciplines; and 3

11 S3. pursue further academic development, clarify career goals and plan ahead for their future - on the basis of better self-understanding of their own interests and aptitudes, as well as better knowledge about different science-related disciplines. 4. Entry Requirements The minimum requirements for entry into the first year of the two-year programmes under the Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology are as follows: (i) Satisfactory completion of Form 6; and Grade E in 5 Hong Kong Certificate of Education Examination (HKCEE) subjects including English Language and Chinese Language; and Grade E in 1 Hong Kong Advanced Level Examination (HKALE) subject; OR, Grade E in 2 HKALE (AS-Level) subjects, which may include Use of English, and Chinese Language and Culture. OR (ii) Satisfactory completion of a one-year Pre-Associate Degree Programme offered by a local University; OR (iii) The equivalents of the above requirements. For those who do not possess the above-mentioned qualifications but have reached the age of 25 by 1 September in the admission year, they may apply as mature students. Mature candidates are expected to demonstrate proficiency in English to study for the programme to the satisfaction of the admissions panel. 5. Granting of Award Students would be eligible for the Associate Degree award if they satisfy all the conditions listed below: (i) successful completion of the compulsory and elective subjects for a total of 60 credits within the permissible maximum duration; (ii) satisfying the level, general education and award-specific requirements of individual awards as stipulated in Section 8 Curriculum Structure; and (iii) having an Award GPA of 2.0 or above at the end of the programme. 6. Mode and Duration of Study The four Associate Degree programmes within the Scheme are offered in full-time mode of study. There are 2 semesters per year, each 14 weeks long. Students are required to complete 15 credits per semester. Prior approval is needed for students to study more or less than 15 credits per semester. The normal duration of the programmes is 2 years, and the maximum duration allowed for completion is 4 years. Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy all the conditions for award (see Section 5 above). 4

12 7. Attendance Students are required to have attained at least 75% of attendance in each of the subjects they study; otherwise students may be disallowed to sit for the subject examination, downgraded or awarded fail grades for unsatisfactory attendance, participation and / or punctuality. Regular and punctual attendance at lectures, seminars and tutorials is important. If students are late by 15 minutes for a tutorial or 30 minutes for a lecture, they will be regarded as absent for that particular tutorial or lecture. Students who are often absent or late for class will be asked to explain to their lecturers or tutors. In case of illness, the original doctor s certificate will be required. Students must only attend the subject groups in which they are registered in. They will have their names listed on the finalised class registers after the add / drop period only if they are officially registered in that particular subject group. Attendance in other nonregistered classes is not allowed. 5

13 8. Curriculum Structure The four Associate Degree programmes offered under the Scheme are in full-time mode based on a credit-based programme of study. To qualify for graduation, students are required to complete a total of 60 credits specified as below: 36 credits of award-specific subjects 21 credits of general education (GE) subjects 3 credits of either a GE or an award-specific subject The general education subjects provide students with fundamental generic skills and chances to broaden their horizon through subject choices in a wide range of disciplines such as arts, humanities, culture, history, China studies, languages, social sciences, business studies as well as science and technology. The award-specific subjects provide students with working knowledge in the selected discipline, and a foundation on which further qualification may be obtained. 8.1 Subject Level and Subject Code All subjects offered under the Scheme are at Level 1, 2, or 3, and most subjects are of 3 credits each. The first digit of the subject code denotes the level of the subject; for example, CC2001 is a Level-2 subject. 8.2 Subject Nature Each subject is classified as a science (S) or non-science (N-S) subject. 8.3 Continuing Education Fund (CEF) Approved Programme/Subject If students enrol in a programme / subject marked with this symbol, they may apply for reimbursement of the programme / subject fee up to 80% or a maximum sum of HK$10,000 per applicant, subject to the satisfaction of the conditions as set out by the Government and the availability of funds. Students are required to register at the CEF office before commencement of the programme / subject to be eligible for reimbursement. 8.4 Credit and Level Requirements Students are required to successfully complete a total of 60 credits of which at least 24 credits are at Level 3; at most 12 credits are below Level 2. 6

14 8.5 General Education Requirements Students pursuing an award under the Scheme are required to successfully complete 5 compulsory plus 2 or 3 elective subjects in general education (GE) studies for a total of 21 or 24 credits. (I) GE Compulsory Subjects (15 credits total) Students are required to complete the following 5 GE compulsory subjects: (1) CC1001 English Skills for Business Communication (2) CC2001 English Skills for Academic Studies (3) CC2002 Creative and Critical Thinking (4) CC2005 Applied Computing (5) For Associate in Engineering and Associate of Science programmes CC2030 Mathematics For Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business programme CC2406 Calculus For Associate in Information Technology programme CC2003 Quantitative Methods; OR CC2030 Mathematics (II) GE Elective Subjects (6 or 9 credits total) Students are given the flexibility to complete 6 or 9 credits in GE elective subjects, of which at least one subject should be selected from Group A of the following subject areas listed in Table 1: Group A Group B Liberal Arts Business Studies China Studies Languages Liberal Arts Science and Technology Should students decide to take 9 credits in GE elective subjects, they will have to complete a total of 24 credits in GE subjects and 36 credits in award-specific subjects for graduation. Should students choose to take 6 credits in GE elective subjects, they will have to take an additional award-specific elective and complete a total of 21 credits in GE subjects and 39 credits in award-specific subjects for graduation. Nonetheless, students are not allowed to take the individual programme s awardspecific subjects (both compulsory and elective) as GE elective subjects, even though those award-specific subjects are listed in Table 1. 7

15 Table 1 - General Education Elective Subjects Group / Area Nature Subject Code & Title GROUP A Liberal Arts GROUP B Business Studies China Studies Languages Liberal Arts Science and Technology N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S N-S S S S S S CC2008 Chinese Civilisation CC2014 Aesthetics and Art Appreciation CC2016 Understanding Society CC2019 Introduction to Psychology CC2033 Introduction to Philosophy CC2034 The History and Culture of Hong Kong CC3003 Contemporary Social Problems CC3004 Development of Pearl River Delta CC3006 The Perspectives of Eastern and Western Cultures CC3011 Gender Issues CC3015 Logic CC3016 Mass Media and Culture CC3017 Social Psychology CC3018 The History of Modern China and the World (From Now) CC3021 Politics and Government CC3022 History, Culture, Economic and Social Development of East Asia CC3023 History, Culture, Economic and Social Development of Southeast Asia CC2101 Financial Accounting CC2102 Theory and Practice of Management CC2104 Introduction to Microeconomics CC2126 Introduction to Marketing CC3144 Practicum in Workplace CC3145 Extensive Practicum in Workplace^ CC3150 Organisational Behaviour CC3153 Principles of Knowledge Management CC3121 Business Environment in China CC3122 China's Economy CC3411 Chinese Family and Culture CC3467 Social Development in China CC3471 Social Problems and Social Issues in Contemporary China CC3492 Chinese Government and Politics CC2009 Chinese Language CC2010 Elementary French CC2011 Japanese I CC2012 Elementary Putonghua CC2028 Grammar in Context CC2031 Japanese II CC2113 Chinese for Business Executives CC3020 Oral Communication in English CC3024 Japanese III CC3025 Japanese IV CC3129 Business Putonghua CC1002 Astronomy and Fortune-telling CC1003 Chinese Calligraphy and Painting CC1005 Buddhist Culture and Art CC1007 The Art of Chinese Board Games CC1008 Appreciation of Asian and Western Music CC1006 Foundation of Chinese Medicine CC2006 Introduction to Internet Technology CC2007 Environmental Science CC3008 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health CC3735 Intermediate Environmental Science S = Science subject N-S = Non-science subject ^ Subject with 6 credits Continuing Education Fund approved subject. Students enrolled in this subject may apply for reimbursement of subject fee, subject to the satisfaction of the conditions as set out by the Government and the availability of funds. Students are required to open a CEF account before commencement of the subject. HKCC reserves the right to cancel and / or not to offer individual subjects. 8

16 8.6 Award-specific Requirements Associate in Engineering Apart from the general education subjects, all students under Associate in Engineering programme are required to complete 7 award-specific compulsory and 5 or 6 awardspecific elective subjects # for a total of 36 or 39 credits in the area of Engineering. (I) Award-specific Compulsory Subjects (21 credits) Students are required to complete the following 7 award-specific compulsory subjects. These subjects provide students with a broad foundation and essential knowledge needed for various disciplines of engineering. The 4 Level-2 subjects below are normally to be taken in Stage 1. Level 2 Level 3 CC2201 Principles of Programming CC3305 Engineering Management CC2302 Engineering Mathematics CC3309 Society and the Engineer CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics CC3732 Engineering Graphics and Computing CC2307 Engineering Science (II) Award-specific Elective Subjects* (15 or 18 credits # ) Students are required to complete 5 or 6 subjects chosen freely from the pool of subjects below. Students who wish to concentrate in one or more areas of engineering studies may choose their award-specific elective subjects accordingly. Electrical and Electronics Engineering CC3202 Software Engineering CC3204 Data Communications and Networking CC3301 Communication Systems Principles CC3302 Computer Systems Principles CC3304 Digital System Design CC3313 Linear Systems CC3731 Electrical Engineering Industrial and Manufacturing Systems Engineering CC3303 Design of Production and Service Systems CC3306 Industrial Engineering Techniques and Methods CC3307 Manufacturing Technology CC3308 Quality Engineering CC3310 Statistics and Probability CC3311 Engineering Materials CC3314 Engineering Project Information Engineering CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms CC3202 Software Engineering CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design 9

17 CC3204 Data Communications and Networking CC3301 Communication Systems Principles CC3302 Computer Systems Principles Mechanical and Building Services Engineering CC3307 Manufacturing Technology CC3310 Statistics and Probability CC3311 Engineering Materials CC3312 Thermofluids CC3314 Engineering Project CC3315 Applied Mechanics CC3316 Architectural Technology in the Built Environment CC3730 Dynamics and Control CC3731 Electrical Engineering # * Please refer to Section 8.5 General Education Requirements The offering of any of these subjects is conditional upon enrolment figures and the availability of resources. Some subjects may require completion of prerequisites before enrolment. For details on prerequisite requirements for individual subjects, please refer to Table 7. Table 2 - Study Pattern for Associate in Engineering* Stage Semester 1 Semester 2 1 CC1001 CC2002 English Skills for Business Communication Creative and Critical Thinking CC2001 CC2201 English Skills for Academic Studies Principles of Programming CC2005 Applied Computing CC2302 Engineering Mathematics CC2030 Mathematics CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics CC2307 Engineering Science CC3732 Engineering Graphics and Computing CC3309 Society and the Engineer CC3305 Engineering Management 2 TWO award-specific elective subjects THREE award-specific elective # subjects # ONE GE elective subject # ONE GE elective subject # ONE GE / award-specific elective subject # * HKCC reserves the right to change the study pattern. # Students should ensure that the general education and / or award-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education / subject domain and award-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 10

18 8.6.2 Associate in Information Technology Apart from the general education subjects, all students under Associate in Information Technology programme are required to complete 8 award-specific compulsory and 4 or 5 award-specific elective subjects # for a total of 36 or 39 credits in the area of IT. (I) Award-specific Compulsory Subjects (24 credits) Students are required to complete the following 8 award-specific compulsory subjects. These subjects provide students with the core knowledge and working skills required by information technology professionals. The 3 Level-2 subjects below are normally to be taken in Stage 1. A Programming Project offered in the semester before graduation provides an opportunity for students to integrate and apply their knowledge and skills. Level 2 Level 3 CC2201 Principles of Programming CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems CC2202 Computer System CC3202 Software Engineering Architectures CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms (II) Award-specific Elective Subjects* (12 or 15 credits # ) CC3204 Data Communications and Networking CC3205 Operating Systems CC3206 Programming Project Students are required to complete 4 or 5 subjects chosen freely from the pool of subjects below. Students who wish to concentrate in one or more areas of studies may choose their award-specific elective subjects accordingly. Computing CC2204 Discrete Mathematics CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design CC3207 Object Oriented Programming CC3210 Database Design and Implementation CC3208 Internet Programming CC3209 Internetworking Protocols and Systems Internet and Multimedia Technology CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics CC3207 Object Oriented Programming CC3304 Digital System Design CC3208 Internet Programming CC3209 Internetworking Protocols and Systems CC3729 Computer Game Programming CC3736 Multimedia and User Interface Design # Please refer to Section 8.5 General Education Requirements * The offering of any of these subjects is conditional upon enrolment figures and the availability of resources. Some subjects may require completion of prerequisites before enrolment. For details on prerequisite requirements for individual subjects, please refer to Table 7. 11

19 Table 3 - Study Pattern for Associate in Information Technology* Stage Semester 1 Semester 2 CC1001 English Skills for Business Communication CC2001 English Skills for Academic Studies CC2002 Creative and Critical Thinking CC2202 Computer System Architectures 1 2 CC2005 Applied Computing CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms CC2003 CC2030 Quantitative Methods OR Mathematics ONE award-specific elective subject # CC2201 Principles of Programming ONE GE elective subject # CC3201 CC3202 CC3204 CC3205 Fundamentals of Database Systems Software Engineering Data Communications and Networking Operating Systems CC3206 Programming Project THREE award-specific elective subjects # ONE GE elective subject # ONE GE / award-specific elective subject # * HKCC reserves the right to change the study pattern. # Students should ensure that the general education and / or award-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education / subject domain and award-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 12

20 Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business Apart from the general education subjects, all students under Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business programme are required to complete 9 award-specific compulsory and 3 or 4 award-specific elective subjects # for a total of 36 or 39 credits. (I) Award-specific Compulsory Subjects (27 credits) Students are required to complete the following 9 award-specific compulsory subjects. The 4 Level-2 subjects below are normally to be taken in Stage 1. Level 2 Level 3 CC2101 Financial Accounting CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems CC2201 Principles of Programming CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project CC2422 Linear Algebra CC3403 Applied Statistical Methods CC2425 Statistics for Business I CC3430 Financial Mathematics CC3476 Statistics for Business II (II) Award-specific Elective Subjects* (9 or 12 credits # ) Students are required to complete 3 or 4 subjects chosen freely from the pool of subjects below. Level 3 CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design CC3208 Internet Programming CC3210 Database Design and Implementation CC3409 Business Forecasting Methods CC3423 Economic and Social Statistics CC3456 Management Information Systems CC3458 Operations Research for Business CC3475 Statistical Data Analysis CC3477 Survey Design and Analysis CC3733 Further Calculus # Please refer to Section 8.5 General Education Requirements * The offering of any of these subjects is conditional upon enrolment figures and the availability of resources. Some subjects may require completion of prerequisites before enrolment. For details on prerequisite requirements for individual subjects, please refer to Table 7. 13

21 Table 4 - Study Pattern for Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business* Stage Semester 1 Semester 2 CC1001 English Skills for Business Communication CC2001 English Skills for Academic Studies CC2002 Creative and Critical Thinking CC2101 Financial Accounting 1 CC2005 Applied Computing CC2201 Principles of Programming CC2406 Calculus CC2422 Linear Algebra 2 CC2425 Statistics for Business I CC3476 Statistics for Business II CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems CC3403 Applied Statistical Methods CC3430 Financial Mathematics CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project TWO award-specific elective subjects # ONE award-specific elective subject # ONE GE elective subject # ONE GE elective subject # ONE GE / award-specific elective subject # * HKCC reserves the right to change the study pattern. # Students should ensure that the general education and / or award-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education / subject domain and award-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation Associate of Science Apart from the 7 or 8 general education subjects, all students under Associate of Science programme are required to complete 3 award-specific compulsory and 9 or 10 awardspecific elective subjects # for a total of 36 or 39 credits. (I) Award-specific Compulsory Subjects (9 credits) Students are required to complete the following 3 award-specific compulsory subjects. The Level-2 subjects below are normally to be taken in Stage 1. Level 2 Level 3 CC2201 Principles of Programming CC3310 Statistics and Probability CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms ^ OR CC2307 Engineering Science ^ OR CC2417 Human Biology I ^ ^ The mutually exclusive compulsory subject enables students to focus in a certain area of study. 14

22 (II) Award-specific Elective Subjects* (27 or 30 credits # ) Students are required to complete 9 or 10 subjects either chosen freely from the pool of subjects below OR concentrate in one of the listed area of concentration. Level 2 CC2007 Environmental Science CC2101 Financial Accounting CC2110 Food Service Operations CC2202 Computer System Architectures 1 CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms CC2204 Discrete Mathematics CC2302 Engineering Mathematics CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics CC2307 Engineering Science CC2404 Applied Physics and Instrumentation in Health Care CC2417 Human Biology I CC2418 Human Biology II CC2439 General Chemistry Level 3 CC3008 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health CC3135 Inventory and Warehousing Management CC3143 Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems CC3202 Software Engineering CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design CC3204 Data Communications and Networking CC3205 Operating Systems 2 CC3206 Programming Project 3 CC3207 Object Oriented Programming CC3208 Internet Programming CC3209 Internetworking Protocols and Systems CC3210 Database Design and Implementation CC3301 Communication Systems Principles CC3302 Computer Systems Principles 1 2 CC3303 Design of Production and Service Systems CC3304 Digital System Design CC3305 Engineering Management CC3306 Industrial Engineering Techniques and Methods CC3307 Manufacturing Technology CC3308 Quality Engineering CC3309 Society and the Engineer CC3311 Engineering Materials CC3312 Thermofluids CC3313 Linear Systems CC3314 Engineering Project 3 CC3315 Applied Mechanics 15

23 CC3316 Architectural Technology in the Built Environment CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project 3 CC3403 Applied Statistical Methods CC3406 Basic Immunology CC3408 Biology of Ageing CC3409 Business Forecasting Methods CC3423 Economic and Social Statistics CC3430 Financial Mathematics CC3434 General Microbiology 4 CC3450 Introduction to Microbiology 4 CC3456 Management Information Systems CC3458 Operations Research for Business CC3475 Statistical Data Analysis CC3476 Statistics for Business II CC3477 Survey Design and Analysis CC3487 Introduction to Pathophysiology and Pharmacology CC3728 Analytical Chemistry CC3729 Computer Game Programming CC3730 Dynamics and Control CC3731 Electrical Engineering CC3732 Engineering Graphics and Computing CC3733 Further Calculus CC3734 General Biochemistry CC3735 Intermediate Environmental Science CC3736 Multimedia and User Interface Design Area of Concentration Students who wish to concentrate in one of the following subject areas should complete at least 6 subjects (18 credits) in that area. The area of concentration will be added in parentheses in the transcript of study for students successfully complete 6 or more subjects from one single area of concentration. Applied Physics CC2302 Engineering Mathematics CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics CC2307 Engineering Science CC2404 Applied Physics and Instrumentation in Health Care CC3311 Engineering Materials CC3312 Thermofluids CC3315 Applied Mechanics Applied Biological and Chemical Sciences CC2110 Food Service Operations CC2417 Human Biology I CC2418 Human Biology II CC2439 General Chemistry CC3008 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health 16

24 CC3406 Basic Immunology CC3408 Biology of Ageing CC3434 General Microbiology 4 CC3450 Introduction to Microbiology 4 CC3728 Analytical Chemistry CC3734 General Biochemistry Environmental Science CC2007 Environmental Science CC2417 Human Biology I CC2418 Human Biology II CC2439 General Chemistry CC3316 Architectural Technology in the Built Environment CC3408 Biology of Ageing CC3434 General Microbiology 4 CC3450 Introduction to Microbiology 4 CC3487 Introduction to Pathophysiology and Pharmacology CC3735 Intermediate Environmental Science Information and Management Science CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms CC2204 Discrete Mathematics CC3135 Inventory and Warehousing Management CC3143 Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems CC3202 Software Engineering CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design CC3409 Business Forecasting Methods CC3458 Operations Research for Business CC3475 Statistical Data Analysis CC3477 Survey Design and Analysis CC3733 Further Calculus # Please refer to Section 8.5 General Education Requirements * The offering of any of these subjects is conditional upon enrolment figures and the availability of resources. Some subjects may require completion of prerequisites before enrolment. For details on prerequisite requirements for individual subjects, please refer to Table 7. 1 CC2202 and CC3302 are mutually exclusive. 2 CC3205 and CC3302 are mutually exclusive. 3 CC3206 and CC3401 are mutually exclusive. 4 CC3434 and CC3450 are mutually exclusive. 17

25 Table 5 - Study Pattern for Associate of Science* (I) Study Pattern A Study Pattern A is more suitable for students who wish to concentrate in the area of Information and Management Science. Stage Semester 1 Semester 2 1 CC1001 English Skills for Business Communication CC2002 Creative and Critical Thinking CC2005 Applied Computing CC2030 Mathematics CC2001 English Skills for Academic Studies CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms TWO award-specific elective subjects # CC2201 Principles of Programming ONE GE elective subject # CC3310 Statistics and Probability 2 THREE award-specific elective subjects # FOUR award-specific elective subjects # ONE GE elective subject # ONE GE / award-specific elective subject # (II) Study Pattern B Study Pattern B is more suitable for other areas of concentration. Stage Semester 1 Semester 2 1 CC1001 English Skills for Business Communication CC2002 Creative and Critical Thinking CC2005 Applied Computing CC2030 Mathematics CC2307 OR CC2417 Engineering Science Human Biology I CC2001 English Skills for Academic Studies CC2201 Principles of Programming TWO award-specific elective subjects # ONE GE elective subject # 18

26 (II) Study Pattern B (Continued) Stage Semester 1 Semester 2 CC3310 Statistics and Probability 2 THREE award-specific elective subjects # FOUR award-specific elective subjects # ONE GE elective subject # ONE GE / award-specific elective subject # * HKCC reserves the right to change the study pattern. # Students should ensure that the general education and / or award-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education / subject domain and award-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 8.7 Programme Curriculum Maps Each of programme curriculum maps in Table presents a mapping of the subjects available to students of that programme in relation to the intended learning outcomes as presented in Section 3. Each programme curriculum map denotes how each of the Scheme and Programme-specific outcomes is introduced, reinforced and assessed. It is worth noting that the Scheme and Programme-specific outcomes are achieved not just through the content of the subjects, but also through the variety of learning and teaching activities through which the contents are delivered. Furthermore, co-curricular student development activities organised by the Student Development Committee, the Student Union or other organisations also contribute to the Scheme and Programme-specific outcomes. Key to Table : I R A The learning leading to the particular outcome is introduced in that subject The learning leading to the particular outcome is reinforced in that subject The learning leading to the particular outcome is assessed in that subject 19

27 Table 6.1 Programme Curriculum Map of Associate in Engineering Subject Code Subject Title Scheme Outcome 1 Critical Thinking** Scheme Outcome 2 Creativity and Problem Solving** Scheme Outcome 3 Information Technology** General Education Compulsory Subjects (15 credits) CC1001 CC2001 English Skills for Business Communication English Skills for Academic Studies Scheme Outcome 4 Professional Attitude** Scheme Outcome 5 Communication Skills (English)** Scheme Outcome 6 Selfreflection, Skills for Life Long Learning, etc.** Prog. Outcome E1 # Prog. Outcome E2 # Prog. Outcome E3 # Prog. Outcome E4 # Prog. Outcome E5 # Prog. Outcome E6 # Prog. Outcome E7 # I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A CC2002 Creative and Critical Thinking I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I.A CC2005 Applied Computing R R,A I,A R I,A I,A I I CC2030 Mathematics I,A R,A I,A I,A I,R,A I General Education Elective Subjects (6-9 credits) Over 50 subjects from 2 groups General Education Electives (6 or 9 credits) Award-specific Compulsory Subjects (21 credits) I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A CC2201 Principles of Programming A A I I I,A I,A I I CC2302 Engineering Mathematics I,R,A I,A I I I,R,A I,R I CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics I I I I I,R,A I,R I I CC2307 Engineering Science I I I I,R I I I CC3305 Engineering Management I,A I,R I,R,A R R I,R I I I,R,A I,R,A R,A CC3309 Society and the Engineer R I,R,A R I,R I,R I,R,A I,R,A R,A CC3732 Engineering Graphics and Computing Award-specific Elective Subjects (15-18 credits) CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms I I,R,A I I I I I,R,A I R,A R,A I,A I,A I,A I I,R I I CC3202 Software Engineering R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A I,A I,A I I,A I 20

28 Subject Code Subject Title Scheme Outcome 1 Critical Thinking** Scheme Outcome 2 Creativity and Problem Solving** Award-specific Elective Subjects (cont d) CC3203 CC3204 CC3301 Information Systems Analysis and Design Data Communications and Networking Communication Systems Principles Scheme Outcome 3 Information Technology** Scheme Outcome 4 Professional Attitude** Scheme Outcome 5 Communication Skills (English)** Scheme Outcome 6 Selfreflection, Skills for Life Long Learning, etc.** Prog. Outcome E1 # Prog. Outcome E2 # Prog. Outcome E3 # Prog. Outcome E4 # R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A I I I,R I,A I Prog. Outcome E5 # R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R R,A I I,R I,R I,R I,R I,R,A I,A I CC3302 Computer Systems Principles I I,R,A I,R R,A I,R I,R,A I,R,A I CC3303 Design of Production and Service Systems R I,R I,R I,R I,R,A I,R,A I,R CC3304 Digital System Design I I,R I,R I,R R,A I,R I,R,A I,R CC3306 Industrial Engineering Techniques and Methods R I I,R I,R I,R,A I,R I,R,A CC3307 Manufacturing Technology I,R I I,R I,R I,R I,R I,R,A I CC3308 Quality Engineering I,R I,R I,R I,R R,A I,R I I CC3310 Statistics and Probability R I,R I,R I,R,A I,R,A CC3311 Engineering Materials R I I,R I,R I,R,A I,R I I CC3312 Thermofluids I,R I,R I,R,A I,R I I CC3313 Linear Systems I,R I,R I,R I,R I,R,A I Prog. Outcome E6 # Prog. Outcome E7 # CC3314 Engineering Project R,A R,A I,R,A R R I,R I,R R R,A R,A R CC3315 Applied Mechanics I I,R I,R I,R,A I,R I CC3316 Architectural Technology in the Built Environment ** For the full outcome statements of the AD Scheme, please refer to Section 3. # For the full outcome statements of the Associate in Engineering programme, please refer to Section 3. I I I,R I,R I I I,R CC3730 Dynamics and Control R I,R I,R I,R I,R,A I,R CC3731 Electrical Engineering R R I,R R,A R,A R,A R,A I 21

29 Table Programme Curriculum Map of Associate in Information Technology Subject Code Subject Title Scheme Outcome 1 Critical Thinking** Scheme Outcome 2 Creativity and Problem Solving** General Education Compulsory Subjects (15 credits) Scheme Outcome 3 Information Technology** Scheme Outcome 4 Professional Attitude** Scheme Outcome 5 Communication Skills (English)** Scheme Outcome 6 Selfreflection, Skills for Life Long Learning, etc.** Prog. Outcome IT1 # CC1001 English Skills for Business Communication I,A I,A I,A CC2001 English Skills for Academic Studies I,A I,A R,A CC2002 Creative and Critical Thinking I,A I,A I,A I,A R,A CC2003 Quantitative Methods I,A R,A I,A Prog. Outcome IT2 # Prog. Outcome IT3 # Prog. Outcome IT4 # CC2005 Applied Computing R R,A I,A R I,A I,A I,A I,A CC2030 Mathematics I,A R,A I,A General Education Elective Subjects (6-9 credits) Over 50 subjects from 2 groups General Education Electives I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A Award-specific Compulsory Subjects (24 credits) CC2201 Principles of Programming A A I I I,A I,A I,A CC2202 Computer System Architectures R,A R,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms R,A R,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems R,A R,A R,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A CC3202 Software Engineering R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A I,A R,A I,A I,A CC3204 Data Communications and Networking R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3205 Operating Systems R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3206 Programming Project R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A 22

30 Subject Code Subject Title Scheme Outcome 1 Critical Thinking** Award-specific Elective Subjects (12-15 credits) Scheme Outcome 2 Creativity and Problem Solving** Scheme Outcome 3 Information Technology** Scheme Outcome 4 Professional Attitude** Scheme Outcome 5 Communication Skills (English)** Scheme Outcome 6 Selfreflection, Skills for Life Long Learning, etc.** Prog. Outcome IT1 # Prog. Outcome IT2 # CC2204 Discrete Mathematics R,A R,A I,A I,A I,A I,A Prog. Outcome IT3 # Prog. Outcome IT4 # CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics I I I R,A R CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3207 Object Oriented Programming R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3208 Internet Programming R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3209 Internetworking Protocols and Systems R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3210 Database Design and Implementation R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3304 Digital System Design I I,R I,R R,A R,A R I CC3729 Computer Game Programming R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A I R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3736 Multimedia and User Interface Design R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A ** For the full outcome statements of the AD Scheme, please refer to Section 3. # For the full outcome statements of the Associate in Information Technology programme, please refer to Section 3. 23

31 Table Programme Curriculum Map of Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business Subject Code Subject Title Scheme Outcome 1 Critical Thinking** Scheme Outcome 2 Creativity and Problem Solving** General Education Compulsory Subjects (15 credits) CC1001 English Skills for Business Communication Scheme Outcome 3 Information Technology** Scheme Outcome 4 Professional Attitude** Scheme Outcome 5 Communication Skills (English)** Scheme Outcome 6 Self-reflection, Skills for Life Long Learning, etc.** I,A I,A Prog. Outcome SC1 # Prog. Outcome SC2 # Prog. Outcome SC3 # CC2001 English Skills for Academic Studies I,A I,A CC2002 Creative and Critical Thinking I,A I,A I,A I,A CC2005 Applied Computing R R,A I,A R I,A CC2406 Calculus I,A I,A I,A I,A General Education Elective Subjects (6-9 credits) Over 50 subjects from 2 groups General Education Electives (6 credits) Award-specific Compulsory Subjects (27 credits) I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A CC2101 Financial Accounting I,A I,A I,A CC2201 Principles of Programming A A I I I,A CC2422 Linear Algebra I,A I,A CC2425 Statistics for Business I I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems R,A R,A R,A I,A I,A I,A I,A CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3403 Applied Statistical Methods R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3430 Financial Mathematics R,A R,A R,A CC3476 Statistics for Business II R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A Award-specific Elective Subjects (9-12 credits) CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A 24

32 Subject Code Subject Title Scheme Outcome 1 Critical Thinking** Award-specific Elective Subjects (cont d) Scheme Outcome 2 Creativity and Problem Solving** Scheme Outcome 3 Information Technology** Scheme Outcome 4 Professional Attitude** Scheme Outcome 5 Communication Skills (English)** Scheme Outcome 6 Self-reflection, Skills for Life Long Learning, etc.** Prog. Outcome SC1 # Prog. Outcome SC2 # CC3208 Internet Programming R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3210 Database Design and Implementation R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3409 Business Forecasting Methods R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3423 Economic and Social Statistics R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3456 Management Information Systems R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3458 Operations Research for Business R,A R,A R,A CC3475 Statistical Data Analysis R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3477 Survey Design and Analysis R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3733 Further Calculus I R,A R,A I,R R,A ** For the full outcome statements of the AD Scheme, please refer to Section 3. # For the full outcome statements of the Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business programme, please refer to Section 3. Prog. Outcome SC3 # 25

33 Table Programme Curriculum Map of Associate of Science Subject Subject Title Scheme Outcome 1 Critical Thinking** Scheme Outcome 2 Creativity and Problem Solving** General Education Compulsory Subjects (15 credits) Scheme Outcome 3 Information Technology** Scheme Outcome 4 Professional Attitude** Scheme Outcome 5 Communication Skills (English)** Scheme Outcome 6 Self-reflection, Skills for Life Long Learning, etc.** CC1001 English Skills for Business Communication I,A I,A I CC2001 English Skills for Academic Studies I,A I,A I CC2002 Creative and Critical Thinking I,A I,A I,A I,A I Prog. Outcome AS1 # Prog. Outcome AS2 # Prog. Outcome AS3 # CC2005 Applied Computing R R,A I,A R I,A I,A I,R R CC2030 Mathematics I,A R,A I,A I I,R General Education Elective Subjects (6-9 credits) Over 50 subjects from 2 groups General Education Electives (6 or 9 credits) I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A I/R/A Award-specific Compulsory Subjects (9 credits) CC2201 Principles of Programming A A I I I,A I,A R CC3310 Statistics and Probability R I,R I,R I,R,A One of the following three subjects: CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms R,A R,A I,A I,A I,A I,R I,R,A I,R,A CC2307 Engineering Science I I I,A I CC2417 Human Biology I I,R I,R,A I,R I,R I,R,A I,R Award-specific Elective Subjects (27-30 credits) CC2007 Environmental Science I,R R,A R,A R R,A I,R I,R I,R,A I,R CC2101 Financial Accounting I,A I,A I,A I CC2110 Food Service Operations I,A I,A CC2202 Computer System Architectures R,A R,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A 26

34 Subject Subject Title Award-specific Elective Subjects (cont d) Scheme Outcome 1 Critical Thinking** Scheme Outcome 2 Creativity and Problem Solving** Scheme Outcome 3 Information Technology** 27 Scheme Outcome 4 Professional Attitude** Scheme Outcome 5 Communication Skills (English)** Scheme Outcome 6 Self-reflection, Skills for Life Long Learning, etc.** Prog. Outcome AS1 # Prog. Outcome AS2 # CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms R,A R,A I,A I,A I,A I,R I,R,A I,R,A CC2204 Discrete Mathematics R,A R,A I,A I,A I I,A I,A CC2302 Engineering Mathematics I,R,A I,A I I,R I,R,A I,R CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics I I I I I,A CC2307 Engineering Science I I I,A I CC2404 Applied Physics and Instrumentation in Health Care Prog. Outcome AS3 # I,R I,R,A I,R I,R I,R,A I,R,A I,R,A CC2417 Human Biology I I,R I,R,A I,R I,R I,R,A I,R CC2418 Human Biology II I,R I,R,A I,R I,R I,R,A I,R CC2439 General Chemistry I,R I,R,A R I,R I,R I,R I,R,A I,R CC3008 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health I,R I,R,A R I,R R,A I,R I,R,A I,R,A R CC3135 Inventory and Warehousing Management I I,R I,R I,R I,R I I,R I,R,A I,R CC3143 Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management I,R I,R I,R,A I,R I,R I I,R I,R,A I,R CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems R,A R,A R,A I,A I,A I,A I,A I,A CC3202 Software Engineering R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A I,A I,A I CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A I,A I,R,A R CC3204 Data Communications and Networking R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R CC3205 Operating Systems R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R CC3206 Programming Project R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R CC3207 Object Oriented Programming R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R CC3208 Internet Programming R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R CC3209 Internetworking Protocols and Systems R,A R,A R,A R,A R

35 Subject Subject Title Award-specific Elective Subjects (cont d) Scheme Outcome 1 Critical Thinking** Scheme Outcome 2 Creativity and Problem Solving** Scheme Outcome 3 Information Technology** Scheme Outcome 4 Professional Attitude** Scheme Outcome 5 Communication Skills (English)** Scheme Outcome 6 Self-reflection, Skills for Life Long Learning, etc.** Prog. Outcome AS1 # Prog. Outcome AS2 # CC3210 Database Design and Implementation R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R CC3301 Communication Systems Principles I I,R I,R I,R,A I,R,A R CC3302 Computer Systems Principles I I,R,A I,R I,R,A I,R,A R CC3303 Design of Production and Service Systems R I,R I,R I,A I,R,A I CC3304 Digital System Design I I,R I,R R,A R,A R CC3305 Engineering Management I,A I,R I,R,A R R I,R I I CC3306 Industrial Engineering Techniques and Methods R I I,R I,A I,R,A I,A CC3307 Manufacturing Technology I,R I I,R I,R,A I,R,A I,A CC3308 Quality Engineering I,R I,R I,R I,R,A I,R,A R,A CC3309 Society and the Engineer R I,R,A R I,R R,A R CC3311 Engineering Materials R I I,R I,R I,R,A I,R CC3312 Thermofluids I,R I,R I,R,A I,R CC3313 Linear Systems I,R I,R R R,A R CC3314 Engineering Project R,A R,A I,R,A R R I,R R,A R,A R CC3315 Applied Mechanics I I,R I R,A R CC3316 Architectural Technology in the Built Environment I I I,R I I CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R CC3403 Applied Statistical Methods R,A R,A R,A R CC3406 Basic Immunology I,R I,R,A R R I,R I,R I,R,A R CC3408 Biology of Ageing I,R I,R,A I,R I,R I,R,A I,R Prog. Outcome AS3 # 28

36 Subject Subject Title Award-specific Elective Subjects (cont d) Scheme Outcome 1 Critical Thinking** Scheme Outcome 2 Creativity and Problem Solving** Scheme Outcome 3 Information Technology** 29 Scheme Outcome 4 Professional Attitude** Scheme Outcome 5 Communication Skills (English)** Scheme Outcome 6 Self-reflection, Skills for Life Long Learning, etc.** Prog. Outcome AS1 # Prog. Outcome AS2 # CC3409 Business Forecasting Methods R,A R,A R,A R CC3423 Economic and Social Statistics R,A R,A R,A R CC3430 Financial Mathematics R,A R,A R CC3434 General Microbiology I,R I,R,A R I,R,A I,R I,R I,R,A I,R CC3450 Introduction to Microbiology I,R I,R,A R I,R,A I,R I,R I,R,A I,R CC3456 Management Information Systems R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3458 Operations Research for Business R,A R,A R,A CC3475 Statistical Data Analysis R,A R,A I,R,A I,R,A CC3476 Statistics for Business II R,A R,A R,A R,A CC3477 Survey Design and Analysis R,A R,A I,R,A I,R,A CC3487 Introduction to Pathophysiology and Pharmacology Prog. Outcome AS3 # I,R,A I,R I,R,A I,R,A I,R I,R,A I,R,A I,R CC3728 Analytical Chemistry I,R I,R,A R I,R I,R I,R I,R,A I,R CC3729 Computer Game Programming R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A I R R,A R CC3730 Dynamics and Control R I,R R R,A R CC3731 Electrical Engineering R R I,R R R,A R CC3732 Engineering Graphics and Computing I I,R,A I I I I,R,A I CC3733 Further Calculus I R,A R,A R,A I,R,A I,R CC3734 General Biochemistry I,R I,R,A I,R I,R I,R,A R CC3735 Intermediate Environmental Science I,R I,R,A R I,R I,R I,R I,R,A I,R CC3736 Multimedia and User Interface Design R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R,A R **For the full outcome statements of the AD Scheme, please refer to Section 3. # For the full outcome statements of the Associate of Science programme, please refer to Section 3.

37 9. Medium of Instruction The medium of instruction is English, unless otherwise specified in the subject syllabuses. 10. Teaching and Learning Methods The teaching and learning philosophy underlying the Scheme is based on a holistic, diversified, and flexible approach one which enables students to achieve the intended learning outcomes. Different teaching and learning methods are used. Some are more effective in building up students subject knowledge while others contribute more to developing students generic skills and professional competence. Teaching and learning methods may vary from subject to subject and may include interactive lectures, tutorials, case-based learning, problem-based learning, simulation, role plays, group work, practicum, experiential learning, fieldwork, guest talks, company visits, study tours, etc. The diversity of teaching and learning methods addresses the need to use the most appropriate ways to achieve the intended learning outcomes of each subject. Teaching is conducted through lectures as well as tutorials and/or seminars. To maximise students learning, subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new concepts and imparting knowledge, but they also act as facilitators to encourage students to share their ideas and experience through class discussions, case studies, oral presentations, and group activities. Laboratory sessions and/or practicum will be included for practical subjects to provide hands-on practice. For award-specific subjects, more emphasis will be given to the competence-based and practical orientation of the curriculum. 11. Assessment and Examinations 11.1 Principles of Assessment Assessments used in the Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology can be developmental, summative or both. For summative assessment, the prime purpose is to enable students to demonstrate that they have met the aims and intended learning outcomes of the award and, in particular, that they have fulfilled the requirements of each subject and have achieved the standard commensurate with the award at the end of their studies. Methods of assessment will be selected on the basis of their suitability to assess the extent to which students have achieved the intended learning outcomes. Assessment will also provide constant feedback to students, thus serving a developmental function as well. Students will be informed of their performance in the assessment so that they are aware of the extent to which they have attained the intended learning outcomes, and of the areas that they need improvements. 30

38 11.2 Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel The Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results. SARP reviews the distribution of grades within a subject and finalises the grades at the end of each semester / term before submitting them to the Board of Examiners (BoE). The BoE will not attempt to change the grades. SARP is also responsible for granting late assessments to students and deciding the form of late assessments. The SARP is to be chaired by the Director of HKCC or delegate. Members of the SARP include the relevant subject examiners, and where appropriate, the Scheme Leader, Assistant Scheme Leader(s), Programme Leader(s), Assistant Programme Leader(s), Deputy Programme Leader, and other co-opted members Role of Board of Examiners The Board of Examiners (BoE) meets at the end of each semester to review students progress and is responsible to the Academic Board of College of Professional and Continuing Education for making decisions on: 1. the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the programme; 2. de-registration cases; and 3. cases with extenuating circumstances. The BoE is chaired by the Director HKCC or delegate. Members of the BoE include the Scheme Leader, the Deputy Scheme Leader, Programme Leader(s), Assistant / Deputy Programme Leaderes (where appropriate) and other co-opted members Assessment Methods Students performance in a subject shall be assessed by coursework and/or examinations, as deemed appropriate. Where both methods are used, the weighting of each in the overall subject grade has been clearly stated in this definitive scheme document. To pass a subject, students must obtain a pass grade in both coursework AND examination, if any. Satisfying (or otherwise) the attendance requirement as stipulated in Section 7 will also affect the pass and failure of a student in a subject. All assessment methods will be designed on the basis that they can assess the extent to which students have attained the intended learning outcomes. The methods may include objective questions, open-ended essays, group projects, field study, laboratory work, presentations, reflective journals, learning portfolios, case study, and various forms of classroom participation. At the beginning of each semester, the subject lecturer will inform students of the details of the assessment methods to be used within the assessment framework as specified in the definitive scheme document. 31

39 Table 7 - Assessment Weighting General Education Subjects Subject Area Business Studies China Studies Languages Liberal Arts Subject Coursework Exam Subject Title Code (%) (%) Nature Prerequisite CC2101 Financial Accounting N-S Nil CC2102 Theory and Practice of Management N-S Nil CC2104 Introduction to Microeconomics N-S Nil CC2126 Introduction to Marketing N-S Nil CC3144 Practicum in Workplace N-S Nil CC3145 Extensive Practicum in Workplace N-S Nil CC3150 Organisational Behaviour N-S Nil CC3153 Principles of Knowledge Management N-S Nil CC3121 Business Environment in China N-S Nil CC3122 China s Economy N-S Nil CC3411 Chinese Family and Culture N-S Nil CC3467 Social Development in China N-S Nil CC3471 Social Problems and Social Issues in Contemporary China N-S Nil CC3492 Chinese Government and Politics N-S Nil CC1001 English Skills for Business Communication N-S Nil CC2001 English Skills for Academic Studies N-S Nil CC2009 Chinese Language N-S Nil CC2010 Elementary French N-S Nil CC2011 Japanese I N-S Nil CC2012 Elementary Putonghua N-S Nil CC2028 Grammar in Context N-S Nil CC2031 Japanese II N-S CC2011* CC2113 Chinese for Business Executives N-S Nil CC3020 Oral Communication in English N-S Nil CC3024 Japanese III N-S CC2031 # CC3025 Japanese IV N-S CC3129 Business Putonghua N-S CC2012 CC1002 Astronomy and Fortune-telling N-S Nil CC1003 Chinese Calligraphy and Painting N-S Nil CC1005 Buddhist Culture and Art N-S Nil CC1007 The Art of Chinese Board Games N-S Nil CC1008 Appreciation of Asian and Western Music N-S Nil CC2002 Creative and Critical Thinking N-S Nil CC2008 Chinese Civilisation N-S Nil CC2014 Aesthetics and Art Appreciation N-S Nil CC2016 Understanding Society N-S Nil CC2019 Introduction to Psychology N-S Nil CC2033 Introduction to Philosophy N-S Nil CC2034 The History and Culture of Hong Kong N-S Nil S = Science subject N-S = Non-science subject 1 CC3144 and CC3145 are mutually exclusive. 2 CC2108 Organisational Behaviour and CC3150 are mutually exclusive. * Or a minimum of 42 hours training on Japanese and/or equivalent proficiency of Japanese, which must be supported by an official document. # Or a minimum of 84 hours training on Japanese and/or equivalent proficiency of Japanese, which must be supported by an official Or a minimum of 126 hours training on Japanese and/or equivalent proficiency of Japanese, which must be supported by an official document. Continuing Education Fund approved subject. Students enrolled in this subject may apply for reimbursement of subject fee, subject to the satisfaction of the conditions as set out by the Government and the availability of funds. Students are required to open a CEF account before commencement of the subject. Subject syllabuses can be obtained via MY HKCC accessible through HKCC website at 32

40 Table 7 - Assessment Weighting (Continued) General Education Subjects Subject Domain Liberal Arts Science and Technology Subject Coursework Exam Subject Title Code (%) (%) Nature Prerequisite CC3003 Contemporary Social Problems N-S Nil CC3004 Development of Pearl River Delta N-S Nil CC3006 The Perspectives of Eastern and Western Cultures N-S Nil CC3011 Gender Issues N-S Nil CC3015 Logic N-S CC2002 or CC2427 CC3016 Mass Media and Culture N-S Nil CC3017 Social Psychology N-S CC2019 CC3018 The History of Modern China and the World (From Now) N-S Nil CC3021 Politics and Government N-S Nil CC3022 History, Culture, Economic and Social Development of East Asia N-S Nil History, Culture, Economic and CC3023 Social Development of Southeast N-S Nil Asia CC1006 Foundation of Chinese Medicine S Nil CC2003 Quantitative Methods S Nil CC2004 Introduction to Information Technology S Nil Basic computer CC2005 Applied Computing S knowledge and window operations CC2006 Introduction to Internet Technology S Nil CC2007 Environmental Science S Nil CC2026 Numerical Skills S Nil CC2030 Mathematics S Nil CC3008 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health S Nil CC3735 Intermediate Environmental Science S Nil S = Science subject N-S = Non-science subject 3 CC2003, CC2026 and CC2030 are exclusive to each other. 4 CC2004 and CC2005 are mutually exclusive. Continuing Education Fund approved subject. Students enrolled in this subject may apply for reimbursement of subject fee, subject to the satisfaction of the conditions as set out by the Government and the availability of funds. Students are required to open a CEF account before commencement of the subject. Subject syllabuses can be obtained via MY HKCC accessible through HKCC website at 33

41 Table 7 - Assessment Weighting (Continued) Awardspecific Subjects Subject Domain Engineering Subject Coursework Exam Subject Title Code (%) (%) Nature Prerequisite CC2201 Principles of Programming S Nil CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms S CC2201 CC2302 Engineering Mathematics S CC2003 OR CC2030 CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics S Nil CC2307 Engineering Science S Nil CC3202 Software Engineering S CC2201 CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design S CC2201 CC3204 Data Communications and Networking S Nil CC3301 Communication Systems Principles S CC2302 CC3302 Computer Systems Principles S Nil CC3303 Design of Production and Service Systems S Nil CC3304 Digital System Design S CC2305 CC3305 Engineering Management S Nil CC3306 Industrial Engineering Techniques and Methods S Nil CC3307 Manufacturing Technology S Nil CC3308 Quality Engineering S CC2003 OR CC2030 CC3309 Society and the Engineer S Nil CC3310 Statistics and Probability S CC2003 OR CC2030 CC3311 Engineering Materials S Nil CC3312 Thermofluids S CC2302 CC3313 Linear Systems S CC2302 CC3314 Engineering Project S CC3732 CC3315 Applied Mechanics S CC2003 OR CC2030 CC3316 Architectural Technology in the Built 7 Environment S Nil CC3732 Engineering Graphics and Computing S Nil CC3730 Dynamics and Control S CC2302 CC3731 Electrical Engineering S CC2305 S = Science subject N-S = Non-science subject 1 CC2127 Principles of Business Programming and CC2201 are mutually exclusive. 4 CC3206 Programming Project, CC3314 and CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project are exclusive to each other. 6 CC2304 Engineering Mechanics and CC3315 are mutually exclusive. 7 CC2306 Built Environment and CC3316 are mutually exclusive. Continuing Education Fund approved subject. Students enrolled in this subject may apply for reimbursement of subject fee, subject to the satisfaction of the conditions as set out by the Government and the availability of funds. Students are required to open a CEF account before commencement of the subject. Subject syllabuses can be obtained via MY HKCC accessible through HKCC website at 34

42 Table 7 - Assessment Weighting (Continued) Awardspecific Subjects Awardspecific Subjects Subject Domain Information Technology Statistics and Computing for Business Subject Coursework Exam Subject Title Code (%) (%) Nature Prerequisite CC2201 Principles of Programming S Nil CC2202 Computer System Architectures S Nil CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms S CC2201 CC2204 Discrete Mathematics S Nil CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics S Nil CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems S CC2201 CC3202 Software Engineering S CC2201 CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design S CC2201 CC3204 Data Communications and Networking S Nil CC3205 Operating Systems S CC2202 & CC2203 CC3206 Programming Project S ^ CC3207 Object Oriented Programming S CC2201 CC3208 Internet Programming S CC2201 CC3209 Internetworking Protocols and Systems S CC3204 CC3210 Database Design and Implementation S CC3201 CC3304 Digital System Design S CC2305 CC3729 Computer Game Programming S CC2005 & CC2201 CC3736 Multimedia and User Interface Design S Nil CC2101 Financial Accounting N-S Nil CC2201 Principles of Programming S Nil CC2422 Linear Algebra S Nil CC2425 Statistics for Business I S Nil CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems S CC2201 CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design S CC2201 CC3208 Internet Programming S CC2201 CC3210 Database Design and Implementation S CC3201 CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project S # CC3403 Applied Statistical Methods S Nil CC3409 Business Forecasting Methods S CC3403 CC3423 Economic and Social Statistics S Nil CC3430 Financial Mathematics S Nil CC3456 Management Information Systems S Nil CC3458 Operations Research for Business S Nil CC3475 Statistical Data Analysis S Nil CC3476 Statistics for Business II S CC2425 OR CC3310 CC3477 Survey Design and Analysis S Nil CC3733 Further Calculus S CC2406 S = Science subject N-S = Non-science subject 1 CC2127 and CC2201 are mutually exclusive. 2 CC2202 and CC3302 Computer Systems Principles are mutually exclusive. 3 CC3205 and CC3302 Computer Systems Principles are mutually exclusive. 4 CC3206, CC3314 Engineering Project and CC3401 are exclusive to each other. 5 CC3211Human Factors and User Interfaces and CC3736 are mutually exclusive. # Satisfactory completion of 6 or more Award-specific subjects offered under the Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business award including CC2201 and CC3403. ^ Satisfactory completion of 6 or more IT-major subjects offered under the Associate in Information Technology programme including CC2201 and CC3202. Subject syllabuses can be obtained via MY HKCC accessible through HKCC website at 35

43 Table 7 - Assessment Weighting (Continued) Awardspecific Subjects Subject Domain Science Subject Coursework Exam Natu Subject Title Code (%) (%) re Prerequisite CC2007 Environmental Science S Nil CC2101 Financial Accounting N-S Nil CC2110 Food Service Operations N-S Nil CC2201 Principles of Programming S Nil CC2202 Computer System Architectures S Nil CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms ^ S CC2201 CC2204 Discrete Mathematics S Nil CC2302 Engineering Mathematics S CC2003 OR CC2030 CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics S Nil CC2307 Engineering Science ^ S Nil CC2404 Applied Physics and Instrumentation in Health Care S Nil CC2417 Human Biology I ^ S Nil CC2418 Human Biology II S Nil CC2439 General Chemistry S Nil CC3008 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health S Nil CC3135 Inventory and Warehousing Management N-S Nil CC3143 Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management N-S Nil CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems S CC2201 CC3202 Software Engineering S CC2201 CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design S CC2201 CC3204 Data Communications and Networking S Nil CC3205 Operating Systems S CC2202 & CC2203 CC3302 CC3206 Programming Project CC3207 Object Oriented Programming S CC2201 CC3208 Internet Programming S CC2201 CC3209 Internetworking Protocols and Systems S CC3204 CC3210 Database Design and Implementation S CC3201 CC3301 Communication Systems Principles S CC2302 CC3302 Computer Systems Principles S Nil CC3303 Design of Production and Service Systems S Nil CC3304 Digital System Design S CC2305 CC3305 Engineering Management S Nil CC3306 Industrial Engineering Techniques and Methods S Nil CC3307 Manufacturing Technology S Nil S = Science subject N-S = Non-science subject 1 CC2127 Principles of Business Programming and CC2201 are mutually exclusive. 2 CC2202 and CC3302 are mutually exclusive. 3 CC3205 and CC3302 are mutually exclusive. 4 CC3206, CC3314 Engineering Project and CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project are exclusive to each other. ^ The compulsory subject enables students to focus in a certain area of Satisfactory completion of 6 or more IT-major subjects offered under the Associate in Information Technology programme including CC2201 & CC3202 Continuing Education Fund approved subject. Students enrolled in this subject may apply for reimbursement of subject fee, subject to the satisfaction of the conditions as set out by the Government and the availability of funds. Students are required to open a CEF account before commencement of the subject. Subject syllabuses can be obtained via MY HKCC accessible through HKCC website at 36

44 Table 7 - Assessment Weighting (Continued) Awardspecific Subjects Subject Domain Science Subject Code Subject Title Coursework (%) Exam (%) CC3308 Quality Engineering S Nature Prerequisite CC2003 OR CC2030 CC3309 Society and the Engineer S Nil CC3310 Statistics and Probability S CC2003 OR CC2030 CC3311 Engineering Materials S Nil CC3312 Thermofluids S CC2302 CC3313 Linear Systems S CC2302 CC3314 Engineering Project S CC3732 CC3315 Applied Mechanics S CC2003 OR CC2030 CC3316 Architectural Technology in the Built Environment S Nil CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project S # CC3403 Applied Statistical Methods S Nil CC3406 Basic Immunology S Nil CC3408 Biology of Ageing S Nil CC3409 Business Forecasting Methods S CC3403 CC3423 Economic and Social Statistics S Nil CC3430 Financial Mathematics S Nil CC3434 General Microbiology S Nil CC3450 Introduction to Microbiology S Nil CC3456 Management Information Systems S Nil CC3458 Operation Research for Business S Nil CC3475 Statistical Data Analysis S Nil CC3476 Statistics for Business II S CC2425 OR CC3310 CC3477 Survey Design and Analysis S Nil CC3487 Introduction to Pathophysiology and Pharmacology N-S Nil CC3728 Analytical Chemistry S CC2439 CC3729 Computer Game Programmimg S CC2005 & CC2201 CC3730 Dynamics and Control S CC2302 CC3731 Electrical Engineering S CC2305 CC3732 Engineering Graphics and Computing S Nil CC3733 Further Calculus S CC2406 CC3734 General Biochemistry S Nil CC3735 Intermediate Environmental Science S Nil CC3736 Multimedia and User Interface Design S Nil S = Science subject N-S = Non-science subject 4 CC3206 Programming Project, CC3314 and CC3401 are mutually exclusive to each other. 5 CC2304 Engineering Mechanics and CC3315 are mutually exclusive. 6 CC2306 Built Environment and CC3316 are mutually exclusive. 7 CC3434 and CC3450 are mutually exclusive. 8 CC3211 Human Factors and User Interfaces and CC3736 are mutually exclusive. # Satisfactory completion of 6 or more Award-specific subjects offered under the Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business award including CC2201 & CC3403. Continuing Education Fund approved subject. Students enrolled in this subject may apply for reimbursement of subject fee, subject to the satisfaction of the conditions as set out by the Government and the availability of funds. Students are required to open a CEF account before commencement of the subject. Subject syllabuses can be obtained via MY HKCC accessible through HKCC website at 37

45 11.5 Academic Probation If a student s overall GPA is below 2.0, he/she will be put on academic probation in the following semester. Once the student is able to pull his/her overall GPA up to 2.0 or above at the end of the probation semester, the status of academic probation will be lifted. The status of academic probation will be reflected in the examination result notification but not in the transcript of studies Progression and De-registration Students will normally have progressing status unless they fall within the following categories, any one of which may be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the programme: (1) they have exceeded the maximum duration of registration for that programme as specified in this document; or (2) their overall GPA is lower than 2.0 for two consecutive semesters and their Semester GPA in the second semester is below 2.0; or (3) their overall GPA is lower than 2.0 for three consecutive semesters. Notwithstanding the above, the BoE has the flexibility to de-register students with extremely poor academic performance before the time specified in the categories (2) or (3) above, or allow students who fall into categories (2) or (3) to stay in their programme, if there are good reasons. 38

46 11.7 Grading All subjects will be graded on the basis of Criterion-Referenced Assessment (CRA) rather than Norm-Referenced Assessment (NRA). Grades will reflect the extent to which a student has attained the Intended Learning Outcomes. Grades are to be interpreted as follows: Subject grade Grade Point A+ 4.5 A 4.0 B+ 3.5 B 3.0 C+ 2.5 C 2.0 D+ 1.5 D 1.0 Short description Excellent Good Satisfactory Marginal F 0 Failure Revised elaboration on subject grading description The student s work is outstanding. It demonstrates the attainment of all intended learning outcomes and far exceeds the threshold standard required by the subject in all regards. The student s work is excellent. It demonstrates the attainment of all intended learning outcomes and far exceeds the threshold standard required by the subject in nearly all regards. The student s work is very good. It demonstrates the attainment of all intended learning outcomes and is well above the threshold standard required by the subject in most regards. The student s work is good. It demonstrates the attainment of all intended learning outcomes and is well above the threshold standard required by the subject in some regards. The student s work is wholly satisfactory. It meets the threshold standard required by the subject in all of the intended learning outcomes. The student s work is satisfactory. It largely meets the threshold standard required by the subject in essentially all of the intended learning outcomes. The student s work is barely adequate. It fails marginally to meet the threshold standard required by the subject in a few key intended learning outcomes. The student s work is weak. It fails marginally to meet the threshold standard required by the subject in several of the key intended learning outcomes. The student s work is inadequate. It fails to meet the threshold standard required by the subject in many of the intended learning outcomes OR fails badly to meet some crucial intended learning outcomes (i.e., those that students cannot fail in order to obtain an overall pass grade.) F is a subject failure grade, whilst all others ( D to A+ ) are subject passing grades. No credit will be earned if a subject is failed. At the end of each semester, a Grade Point Average (GPA) will be computed as follows, and based on the grade point of all the subjects: 39

47 GPA = n Subject Grade Point x Subject Credit Value n Subject Credit Value where n = number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to and including the latest semester, but for subjects which have been retaken, only the grade obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA calculation In addition, the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation: (i) Exempted subjects (ii) Ungraded subjects (iii) Incomplete subjects (iv) Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved without any grade assigned (v) Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (i.e. those with the grade W ) A student who is absent from examination will be given a fail grade. The respective subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as zero grade point. The GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for all relevant subjects, including failed subjects (if a failed subject is retaken, only the grade obtained in the final attempt will be included) taken by a student from the start of the programme to a particular reference point in time. The GPA is an indicator of overall performance and is capped at 4.0. Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken on top of the prescribed credit requirements for an award shall not be taken into account in the grade point calculation for award classification. However, if a student attempts more elective subjects than the requirement for graduation in or before the semester within which he/she becomes eligible for an award, the elective subjects with a higher contribution (with the exception of the additional subjects taken out of interest and not for satisfying the award requirements) shall be counted in the grade point calculation for award classification (i.e. the subjects attempted with lower contribution will be excluded from the grade point calculation for award classification), irrespective of when the excessive elective subjects are enrolled. The same principle applies to mutually exclusive compulsory subjects. The Grade Point Average (GPA) and grade point calculation for award classification (Award GPA) will both be shown in the transcript of studies Retaking of Subjects If the failed subject is a compulsory subject, a student needs to retake that subject again. If the failed subject is a mutually exclusive compulsory subject, a student may either retake that same subject or another mutually exclusive compulsory subject. If the failed subject is an elective subject, a student may retake that same subject or another elective subject from the same elective subject set. 40

48 The number of retakes of a failed subject is not restricted. While only the grade obtained in the final attempt of retaking will be included in the calculation of the Grade Point Average (GPA) and the Grade Point Average for award classification (AGPA), the grades obtained in previous attempts will also be reflected in the transcript of studies. This applies to the retake of the same subject only, and in cases where students take another subject to replace a failed subject, the fail grade will be retained and taken into account in the calculation of the GPA, despite the passing of the other subject. Normally, students may retake only those subjects which they have failed, i.e. obtained an F grade. Students are not allowed to retake subjects for which they have passed with grade C or above. The retaking of a subject in which a student has passed at grade D or D+ will require the approval of HKCC Plagiarism and Dishonesty Students should be honest in completing academic assignments. The College takes a very serious view against dishonesty in examinations / assessment and plagiarism in coursework. In particular, all students should read the sections on Conduct of Examinations and Plagiarism and Bibliographic Referencing in the HKCC Student Handbook. Penalties ranging from disqualification to expulsion will be imposed in cases of proven dishonesty in examination / assessment and / or plagiarism Guidelines for Award Classification In using these guidelines for award classification, the BoE shall exercise its judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student, and where appropriate, may use other relevant information. The following are guidelines only for the BoE s reference in determining award classifications: Classification Distinction Credit Pass Guidelines The student s performance / attainment is outstanding which identifies him or her as exceptionally able in the field covered by the programme in question. The student has reached a standard of performance / attainment which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding. The student has reached a standard of performance / attainment ranging from just adequate to satisfactory. 41

49 11.11 Student Appeals A student may appeal on academic grounds. However, a student s disagreement with the decision of a SARP / BoE is not in itself an adequate ground for appeal. Any appeal should be directed to the Director of HKCC. Details are set out in the HKCC Student Handbook Exceptional Circumstances Absence from an Assessment Component If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject due to illness or other circumstances beyond his/her control, and considered by the SARP as legitimate, the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete the assessment and, if so, by what means. Late Assessment If a student has been absent from an examination (or other assessments) because of illness, injury or other unforeseeable reasons, he/she may apply for a late assessment. Where appropriate, applications for late assessment will be referred to the Subject Assessment Review Panels (SARP) for approval. Late assessment is not an automatic entitlement. Should a late assessment be granted, the examination will be regarded as a first assessment and the actual grade obtained will be awarded. Details of applications for late assessment can be found in the Student Handbook. Aegrotat Award If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question due to very serious illness or other very special circumstances which are beyond his/her control, and considered by the BoE as legitimate, the College of Professional and Continuing Education (CPCE) will determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award. Aegrotat award will be granted under very exceptional circumstances. A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either to accept such an award, or request to be assessed on another occasion to be stipulated by the BoE; the student s exercise of this option shall be irrevocable. The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him or her from any subsequent assessment for the same award. An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified, and the award parchment shall not state that it is an aegrotat award. However, the BoE may determine whether the award should be classified provided that they have adequate information on other students academic performance. Other Particular Circumstances A student s particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment but not the standard of performance expected in assessment. 42

50 11.13 Other Regulations Students of the Associate Degree Scheme in Science and Technology are bound by all other regulations of HKCC, the CPCE, and/or the University. 43

51 Section Two: Syllabuses

52 CC1001 English Skills for Business Communication Level 1 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 42 hours of Seminar Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject aims to equip students with effective English language and communication skills required in different business and administration contexts. The main focus is to develop in students the ability to select the appropriate language and strategies for effective communication in various scenarios relevant to their potential career fields. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognise the basic principles of business communication and apply appropriate strategies for different types of business messages, including those of a positive, negative and persuasive nature write effectively with appropriate content, organisation, format, tone, style and sentence skills for different business documents such as letters, memos and communicate accurately and professionally in business presentations and other oral communication contexts reflect critically on the learning process of collaborating with other students on group projects Indicative Contents Principles of Business Communication Communication process; Analysis of purpose, audience, information and context. Communication Strategies Verbal and nonverbal communications; Writing process; Direct and indirect patterns. Writing Skills Reader-oriented (e.g. you view and impersonal statements); Tone (e.g. informal, conversational and professional tones); Style (e.g. positive, inclusive, plain, familiar and concise styles); Sentence skills; Persuasive techniques. Business Documents Formats of business letters, memos and ; Business messages that inform, request, respond, persuade and build goodwill for routine and specific purposes. 44

53 Oral Communication Skills Business presentations; Making and receiving telephone calls; Job interviews. Business Teamwork Teamwork communication skills; Reflection on working in teams. Teaching/Learning Approach Seminars focus on the study of different communication strategies and language skills with practical examples relevant to students potential career fields. Different learning activities such as writing practices, role-play, case studies and group discussions are used. In language laboratory sessions, audio-visual and on-line materials are used to reinforce students learning. Assessment Approach (a) Coursework (50%) Students are required to complete the following assessment tasks which combine to address all the learning outcomes of the subject: 1. One individual written task 2. One mid-term test 3. Quizzes 4. One group oral presentation 5. One individual reflection task 6. Participation Students will demonstrate achievement of course learning outcomes by completing a combination of the following tasks relevant to their potential career fields: i) Business Writing: This task aims at assessing students ability in writing a business letter, memo or with the appropriate writing skills and communication strategies. ii) Mid-term Test: This task assesses students knowledge of business communication principles, communication strategies, writing skills and business documents. iii) Quiz: Several quizzes will be conducted throughout the semester to assess students knowledge of business communication principles, communication strategies, writing skills and business documents. iv) Group Oral Presentation: This task assesses students business presentation skills. They have to form a small group of 3-4 students and apply the skills for presenting a business topic. A written presentation outline is also required to assess their ability in organising the contents and applying the presentation strategies. v) Reflection: This task gives each student the opportunity to reflect on the communication skills required of a team member when working with a group on business presentations. In addition, to encourage a spirit of enquiry and sharing and to help students master the principles of business communication, 5% of the students grades will be based on their punctuality, attendance, and class participation throughout the semester. To get full marks for this, students are required to engage actively in the language learning activities and to complete all the assignments in addition to their attendance and punctuality. 45

54 (b) Examination (50%) Students are required to attend an examination at the end of the semester. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Guffey, Mary Ellen and Brendan Nagle. Essentials of Business Communication. Nelson. (latest ed.). References Bovée, Courtland L. and John V. Thill. Excellence in Business Communication. Pearson. (latest ed.). Krizan, A.C. Buddy, Patricia Merrier and Carol Larson Jones. Business Communication. Thomson Learning. (latest ed.). Locker, Kitty O and Stephen K. Kaczmarek. Business Communication Building Critical Skills. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). 46

55 CC1002 天 文 與 占 卜 Astronomy and Fortune-telling 程 度 1 學 分 3 學 科 性 質 非 科 學 教 學 語 言 中 文 粵 語 講 授 ; 中 文 書 寫 輔 以 英 文 教 學 模 式 28 小 時 課 堂 講 授 14 小 時 導 修 課 修 讀 的 必 備 條 件 無 評 估 方 法 60% 課 堂 習 作 40% 期 終 考 試 科 目 目 標 認 識 和 掌 握 天 文 與 占 卜 的 一 些 基 本 知 識 和 二 者 互 相 之 間 的 聯 繫, 並 能 引 發 其 跨 學 科 的 思 考 和 學 習 興 趣 認 識 中 國 星 座 和 中 國 星 名 的 含 義, 以 及 隱 藏 在 星 名 後 面 的 故 事, 進 一 步 認 識 天 文 與 中 國 曆 法 ( 農 曆 ) 之 間 緊 密 的 關 係 通 過 學 習 和 實 際 觀 測, 學 生 能 認 識 和 分 辨 常 見 的 星 座 ; 認 識 中 外 傳 統 的 觀 星 方 法 和 其 他 常 用 的 觀 測 天 象 運 行 的 儀 器 課 程 內 容 將 同 時 兼 顧 理 論 及 實 踐 兩 方 面, 務 求 同 學 不 獨 獲 得 天 文 學 上 的 知 識 及 訓 練, 還 可 加 強 同 學 了 解 大 自 然 現 象 及 天 體 運 行 的 知 識 學 習 成 果 在 完 成 此 科 目 後, 學 生 有 足 夠 能 力 : 瞭 解 中 外 占 卜 術 的 歷 史 發 展 獲 取 中 外 占 卜 術 背 後 的 文 化 意 義 獲 取 中 外 占 卜 術 與 古 代 天 文 學 知 識 的 關 係 比 較 中 外 占 卜 術 的 異 同 運 用 天 文 的 器 材 觀 天 象, 瞭 解 天 文 星 系 的 發 展 結 合 天 文 學 知 識, 結 合 中 外 占 卜 術, 可 以 探 討 天 體 運 行 的 知 識 指 示 性 教 學 內 容 中 外 天 文 學 與 占 卜 術 的 關 係 天 文 學 的 定 義, 簡 述 中 外 天 文 學 的 發 展, 占 卜 術 與 天 文 的 關 係 中 國 天 文 學 發 展 史 中 國 天 文 學 自 先 秦 至 當 代 的 發 展, 紫 金 山 天 文 臺 的 意 義 西 方 天 文 學 的 歷 程 加 里 略 的 發 展, 哥 白 尼 定 律, 近 代 西 方 天 文 臺 星 空 的 初 步 認 識 瞭 解 星 雲 的 分 佈, 中 國 漢 代 的 觀 測 儀 器, 西 方 的 天 文 望 遠 鏡 47

56 中 國 占 星 術 八 卦, 混 天 儀, 星 圖 西 方 占 卜 術 塔 羅 牌 與 占 卜 術 天 文 與 中 國 傳 統 風 水 學 中 國 傳 統 風 水 學 的 定 義, 風 水 與 四 時 星 際 的 互 動 關 係 天 文 與 地 理 學 觀 天 術 的 發 展 與 地 理 環 境 的 關 係, 火 山 爆 發 與 星 系 的 發 展 天 文 知 識 與 農 業 社 會 傳 統 農 業 社 會 與 天 文, 天 文 與 四 時 農 業 盛 衰 教 學 方 法 課 堂 一 般 以 講 課 小 組 討 論 及 小 組 報 告 等 形 式 進 行, 課 後 進 行 各 種 有 關 占 卜 與 天 文 的 參 觀 與 實 踐 ; 學 生 需 要 在 整 個 學 習 過 程 中 主 動 參 與 課 堂 的 討 論 及 實 習, 務 求 理 論 與 實 踐 並 重 評 估 方 法 本 課 程 評 核 將 以 個 人 習 作 小 組 書 面 報 告 和 課 堂 匯 報, 測 驗 及 考 試 等 形 式 進 行 1. 個 人 習 作 主 要 以 撰 寫 論 文 的 方 式, 考 核 同 學 研 究 天 文 與 占 卜 關 係 的 基 礎 知 識 2. 小 組 書 面 報 告 主 要 從 小 組 同 學 合 作 撰 寫 的 報 告 中, 考 核 同 學 合 作 能 力 及 報 告 所 獲 的 知 識 3. 課 堂 匯 報 主 要 考 核 同 學 報 告 能 力, 能 否 在 有 限 時 間 內, 發 揮 報 告 的 重 點 指 示 性 參 考 書 目 推 介 教 科 書 陳 九 金 : 形 象 解 碼 - 引 領 進 入 神 秘 的 星 座 世 界 北 京 : 群 言 出 版 社,2004 年 香 港 天 文 學 會 編 : 觀 星 小 手 冊 香 港 : 世 界 出 版 社,2004 年 參 考 書 Prahalad, C.K., The Fortune at the Bottom of the Pyramid. N.J.: Wharton School Publishing (2005). Serviss, Garrett, Astronomy in a Nutshell. N.J.: Wharton School Publishing (1989). Smith, Richard, Fortune-Tellers and Philosophers: Divination in Traditional Chinese Society. Boulder: Westview Press (1991). 中 國 天 文 學 史 整 理 研 究 小 組 : 天 文 史 話 上 海 : 上 海 科 學 技 術 出 版 社,1981 年 南 京 大 學 外 文 系 編 : 天 文 專 業 英 語 文 選 北 京 : 商 務 印 書 館,1982 年 談 錫 永 : 紫 微 鬥 數 星 曜 總 談 香 港 : 博 益 出 版 集 團,1988 年 48

57 陳 江 風 : 天 文 與 人 文 北 京 : 國 際 文 化 出 版 公 司,1988 年 傅 隸 樸 : 周 易 理 解 四 川 : 巴 蜀 書 社,1991 年 李 心 龍 : 占 星 術 海 口 : 海 南 出 版 社,1993 年 邵 偉 華 : 卜 易 預 測 學 西 安 : 太 白 文 藝 出 版 社,1994 年 袁 俊 慧 : 天 文 地 理 知 識 博 采 北 京 : 電 子 工 業 出 版 社,1994 年 慧 心 齋 主 編 : 紫 微 鬥 數 全 集 香 港 : 星 星 出 版 社,1994 年 吳 鑫 基 溫 學 詩 主 編 : 現 代 天 文 學 十 五 講 北 京 : 北 京 大 學 出 版 社,2005 年 49

58 CC1003 中 國 書 法 與 繪 畫 Chinese Calligraphy and Painting 程 度 1 學 分 3 學 科 性 質 非 科 學 教 學 語 言 中 文 粵 語 講 授 ; 中 文 書 寫 教 學 模 式 28 小 時 課 堂 講 授 14 小 時 導 修 課 修 讀 的 必 備 條 件 無 評 估 方 法 80% 課 堂 習 作 20% 期 終 考 試 科 目 目 標 中 國 書 法 及 繪 畫 素 為 中 國 文 化 遺 產 的 重 要 部 份, 二 者 有 著 悠 久 的 歷 史 及 豐 富 的 內 涵, 它 們 融 合 科 學 藝 術 文 化 精 神 趣 味 美 學 和 欣 賞 為 一 體, 也 是 中 國 文 化 精 義 內 天 人 合 一 的 呈 現 方 式 之 一, 吸 引 著 眾 多 愛 好 者 神 游 傳 統 書 法 及 繪 畫 學 習 書 畫 的 人, 往 往 能 藉 書 寫 及 繪 畫, 融 合 個 人 的 性 格 於 大 自 然 奇 趣, 書 法 的 剛 勁 與 陰 柔 人 物 造 型 花 鳥 畫 像 臨 摹 白 描 也 呈 現 中 國 士 人 道 德 與 學 問 的 特 色, 學 習 中 國 書 法 及 繪 畫 均 有 無 窮 的 樂 趣, 故 本 科 尤 重 教 導 中 國 傳 統 書 法 的 字 體 種 類 及 基 礎 知 識 教 導 中 國 傳 統 書 法 及 繪 畫 的 全 局 設 色 層 次 摹 形 法 貌 的 特 色, 教 員 除 了 理 論, 歷 史 流 變 外, 亦 會 運 用 趣 味 的 教 學 方 法 介 紹 書 法 的 規 則, 基 本 畫 工 設 置 及 圖 畫 背 後 的 文 化 知 識, 並 從 實 習 中 提 煉 許 多 具 有 代 表 性 的 前 賢 書 法 及 畫 繪 圖 譜 學 習 成 果 在 完 成 此 科 目 後, 學 生 有 足 夠 能 力 : 明 白 中 國 書 法 繪 畫 背 後 的 文 化 原 理 與 綜 合 書 畫 的 知 識 獲 取 漢 語 結 構 及 漢 字 流 變 的 知 識 提 高 學 員 創 作 及 欣 賞 中 國 書 畫 的 能 力 多 認 識 中 國 文 化 及 藝 術 根 基 結 合 藝 術 文 化 美 學 美 學 和 欣 賞 為 一 體 融 通 能 力 指 示 性 教 學 內 容 中 國 書 法 及 繪 畫 的 重 要 正 像 在 西 方 美 術 中 建 築 和 雕 塑 統 領 著 其 他 門 類 造 型 藝 術 一 樣, 書 法 和 繪 畫 則 統 領 著 中 國 美 術 的 其 他 門 類, 而 列 爲 中 國 美 術 之 首 書 畫 是 無 須 讀 出 它 的 文 字 內 容 的, 它 是 看 的 藝 術, 正 如 我 們 生 活 中 所 常 見 的, 有 些 不 識 漢 字 的 外 國 人 和 工 農 群 眾, 他 們 也 能 欣 賞 書 畫 中 國 字 體 及 繪 畫 藝 術 的 種 類 及 歷 史 書 法 : 殷 甲 骨 文, 秦 代 書 法, 漢 代 書 法, 魏 晉 書 法, 南 北 朝 書 法, 唐 代 書 法, 五 代 書 法, 宋 代 書 法, 元 代 書 法, 明 清 書 法 ; 泛 論 甲 骨 鐘 鼎 篆 隸 楷 行 草 各 書 體 50

59 中 國 書 畫 藝 術 的 美 學 及 文 化 特 色 中 國 書 畫 與 美 學, 道 學, 修 德 之 關 係, 由 視 覺 藝 術 到 性 靈 之 教 中 國 書 畫 藝 術 的 畫 訣 書 法 的 術 語 及 畫 訣, 漢 字 的 起 源 流 變 及 書 法 基 本 技 巧, 基 本 點 畫 的 形 態, 字 體 的 結 構 及 章 法 佈 局 要 訣 書 畫 分 門 細 論 篆 書 行 書 草 書 楷 書 ; 文 人 畫 山 水 畫 ; 人 物 繪 畫 的 基 本 法 則 ; 宗 教 畫 的 奇 趣, 年 畫 的 精 妙 書 畫 與 人 生 教 學 方 法 鼓 勵 積 極 參 與 課 堂 及 導 修 課 的 教 學 活 動 透 過 講 授 介 紹 各 種 字 體 畫 法 歷 代 字 體 及 繪 畫 圖 像 的 演 變, 亦 運 用 有 關 書 法 及 繪 畫 知 識 的 電 子 光 碟 及 視 覺 器 材, 生 動 地 教 導 學 員 了 解 中 國 書 法 及 繪 畫 文 化 的 特 色 及 規 則 理 論 與 實 際 並 施. 透 過 大 量 個 案 分 析 ( 歷 代 及 同 學 作 品 ) 深 化 課 堂 所 教. 講 師 也 藉 導 修 課 進 行 書 寫 練 習 及 描 畫 山 水, 實 習 字 書 的 體 例 及 評 品 高 低, 模 帖 歷 代 著 名 書 法 家, 藉 畫 竹 及 梅 等 自 然 草 木, 以 體 會 中 國 先 賢 書 法 及 摹 繪 的 運 意 與 規 則, 達 到 理 論 與 實 踐 並 重 的 教 學 理 想 評 估 方 法 廣 泛 利 用 各 種 評 核 機 制 : 小 組 書 面 報 告 字 書 實 習 及 考 試 的 評 鑑 模 式, 準 確 衡 量 學 生 所 學, 亦 特 別 重 視 學 生 的 參 與, 更 公 平 全 面 有 效 地 評 核 學 生 的 能 力 本 課 程 評 核 將 以 個 人 習 作 小 組 書 面 報 告 和 課 堂 匯 報, 測 驗 及 考 試 等 形 式 進 行 1. 小 組 書 面 報 告 主 要 從 小 組 同 學 合 作 撰 寫 的 報 告 中, 考 核 同 學 合 作 能 力 及 報 告 所 獲 的 知 識 2. 字 書 實 習 主 要 考 核 同 學 能 運 用 各 種 書 法 體 例, 進 行 研 習 3. 考 試 考 寫 同 學 了 解 中 國 書 法 的 基 礎 知 識 指 示 性 參 考 書 目 推 介 教 科 書 朱 光 潛 : 談 美 台 北 : 聖 天 堂 出 版 社,2001 年 參 考 書 Lai, T.C., Chinese Characters. Hong Kong: Swindon Book Co. (1980). Mote, Frederick, Calligraphy and the East Asian Book. Boston: Random House (1989). Yen, Yuehping, Calligraphy and Power in Contemporary Chinese Society. London: Routledg Curzon (2005). 楊 再 春 編 : 中 國 書 法 工 具 手 冊 北 京 : 北 京 體 育 學 院 出 版 社,1985 年 徐 復 觀 : 中 國 藝 術 精 神 台 灣 : 學 生 書 局,1986 年 51

60 蔣 彝 : 中 國 書 法 上 海 : 上 海 書 畫 出 版 社,1986 年 蔣 彝 : 中 國 繒 畫 文 化 上 海 : 上 海 書 畫 出 版 社,1987 年 楊 榮 福 編 : 書 法 知 識 手 冊 北 京 : 國 際 文 化 出 版 社,1988 年 徐 建 融 編 : 中 國 書 法 上 海 : 上 海 外 語 教 育 出 版 社,1988 年 王 嘉 良 : 中 國 古 代 美 術 教 育 史 綱 黑 龍 江 : 黑 龍 江 人 民 出 版,1997 年 52

61 CC1005 佛 教 文 化 與 藝 術 Buddhist Culture and Art 程 度 1 學 分 3 學 科 性 質 非 科 學 教 學 語 言 中 文 粵 語 講 授 ; 中 文 書 寫 教 學 模 式 28 小 時 課 堂 講 授 14 小 時 導 修 課 修 讀 的 必 備 條 件 無 評 估 方 法 50% 課 堂 習 作 50% 期 終 考 試 科 目 目 標 本 課 程 旨 在 探 討 佛 教 的 基 本 義 理 及 其 所 衍 生 的 文 化 與 藝 術, 特 別 是 佛 教 在 中 國 的 發 展 與 中 國 文 化 和 藝 術 所 構 成 的 互 動 關 係 學 員 修 讀 本 科, 可 以 初 步 認 識 佛 教 的 基 本 義 理, 明 白 佛 教 與 日 常 生 活 的 關 係, 及 明 白 佛 教 義 理 與 造 像 佛 教 繪 畫 圖 像 梵 樂 美 術 建 築 及 茶 道 的 關 係 學 員 可 以 明 白 自 印 度 傳 入 佛 教 與 中 國 本 土 文 化 融 合 創 造 與 轉 化 的 過 程 學 員 可 以 了 解 佛 教 如 何 透 過 各 種 藝 術 形 態, 表 現 其 博 大 精 深 的 義 理 學 員 可 以 學 習 觀 賞 佛 教 各 種 造 像 及 寺 廟 建 築 藝 術, 佛 教 繪 畫 圖 像, 並 可 以 享 受 梵 樂 及 茶 道 學 習 成 果 在 完 成 此 科 目 後, 學 生 有 足 夠 能 力 : 學 習 印 度 及 中 土 佛 學 的 大 意 明 白 佛 教 義 理 與 佛 教 藝 術 的 關 係 比 較 中 土 與 印 度 的 佛 教 造 像 的 異 同 及 其 背 後 的 文 化 意 義 能 掌 握 中 土 佛 學, 與 道 教 及 儒 家 思 想 的 異 同 從 實 習 考 察 中 可 以 欣 賞 佛 教 造 像 及 繪 畫 的 特 色 在 日 常 生 活 中 引 證 講 師 教 導 的 佛 教 教 義 指 示 性 教 學 內 容 佛 教 的 基 本 義 理 歷 史 及 其 特 質 佛 的 定 義, 印 度 佛 學 的 發 展 歷 史 及 特 色 佛 學 傳 入 中 國 的 歷 程 自 漢 代 至 當 代 中 土 佛 學 的 發 展, 唐 代 佛 學 發 展 的 大 義 小 乘 大 乘 佛 教 與 文 化 藝 術 小 乘 大 乘 佛 教 教 義, 印 度 佛 教 與 中 國 文 化 藝 術 的 關 係 53

62 印 度 佛 教 與 中 國 佛 教 的 異 同 印 度 佛 教 教 義 與 中 土 佛 教 教 義 的 異 同, 印 度 佛 教 造 像 的 特 色, 中 土 的 觀 音 像 佛 教 文 化 的 要 義 中 土 佛 教 繪 畫, 佛 教 音 樂, 佛 教 詩 詞, 佛 教 與 小 說 佛 教 造 像 藝 術 唐 代 敦 煌 佛 教 造 像 與 南 方 佛 教 小 型 佛 像 的 異 同, 佛 教 的 文 化 意 義, 佛 教 造 像 的 演 變 佛 教 寺 廟 建 築 藝 術 香 港 志 蓮 淨 苑 建 築 藝 術 的 特 色 佛 教 繪 畫 藝 術 佛 教 繪 畫 與 禪 意, 藝 術 創 意 與 佛 學 佛 學 與 梵 樂 佛 教 音 樂 與 韻 律 佛 學 與 茶 道 中 日 茶 道 的 發 展 與 佛 學 方 法, 日 本 茶 藝 與 日 本 神 道 及 中 土 佛 教 的 關 係 與 書 法 禪 與 人 生 三 藏 菩 薩 與 人 生 觀, 佛 字 的 要 義, 持 守 與 悟 教 教 學 方 法 學 員 需 要 積 極 參 與 課 堂 及 導 修 課 的 教 學 活 動 在 課 堂 上, 主 要 由 講 師 運 用 各 種 文 獻 資 料 佛 像 佛 教 圖 畫 梵 樂 及 有 關 佛 教 寺 廟 的 建 築 藝 術 及 書 法, 尤 其 是 電 子 光 碟 及 視 覺 器 材, 教 導 學 員 了 解 印 度 佛 教 與 中 國 佛 教 的 異 同, 觀 賞 佛 教 藝 術 文 化 的 特 色 及 要 點, 從 而 令 課 程 更 富 趣 味 及 科 學 邏 輯 講 師 也 會 藉 導 修 課, 帶 領 學 員 出 外 參 觀 寺 廟 及 觀 察 書 畫 圖 像, 引 導 他 們 運 用 課 堂 上 學 習 的 知 識, 領 悟 佛 教 藝 術 的 要 義, 達 到 理 論 與 實 踐 並 重 的 教 學 理 想 評 估 方 法 本 課 程 評 核 將 以 個 人 習 作 小 組 書 面 報 告 課 堂 匯 報 測 驗 及 考 試 的 形 式 進 行 1. 個 人 習 作 主 要 以 撰 寫 論 文 的 方 式, 考 核 同 學 了 解 佛 教 文 化 及 藝 術 的 基 礎 知 識 2. 小 組 書 面 報 告 主 要 從 小 組 同 學 合 作 撰 寫 的 報 告 中, 考 核 同 學 合 作 能 力 及 從 報 告 考 察 同 學 所 獲 的 佛 教 知 識 3. 課 堂 匯 報 主 要 考 核 同 學 報 告 能 力, 能 否 在 有 限 時 間 內, 發 揮 報 告 內 容 的 重 點 指 示 性 參 考 書 目 推 介 教 科 書 賴 永 海 : 中 國 佛 性 論 上 海 : 上 海 人 民 大 學 出 版 社,1988 年 54

63 參 考 書 Kalupahana, David, A History of Buddhist Philosophy: Continuities and Discontinuities. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press (1992). Takeuchi, Yoshinori, ed. Buddhist Spirituality: Indian, Southern Asian, Tibetan, Early Chinese. New York: SCM Press Ltd. (1993). Takeuchi, Yoshinori, ed. Buddhist Spirituality: Later China, Korea, Japan and the Modern World. New York: SCM Press Ltd. (1999). Tang, Yi-jie, Confucianism, Buddhism, Daoism, Christianity and Chinese Culture. Peking: University of Peking (1991). Yamamoto, Chikyo, Introduction to Buddhist Art. New Delhi: International Academy of Indian Culture and Aditya Prakashan, (1990). 賴 永 海 : 佛 道 詩 禪 : 佛 教 文 化 論 北 京 : 中 國 青 年 出 版 社,1970 年 賴 永 海 : 佛 學 與 儒 學 杭 州 : 浙 江 人 民 出 版 社,1992 年 高 楠 順 次 郎 著, 世 界 佛 學 名 著 譯 叢 編 譯 佛 教 藝 術 : 音 樂 戲 劇 美 術 台 北 : 華 宇 出 版 社,1988 年 楊 曾 文 編 : 佛 教 文 化 面 面 觀 濟 南 : 齊 魯 書 社,1989 年 李 濤 : 佛 教 與 佛 教 藝 術 西 安 : 西 安 交 通 大 學 出 版 社,1989 年 55

64 CC1006 中 國 醫 學 基 礎 知 識 Foundation of Chinese Medicine 程 度 1 學 分 3 學 科 性 質 理 科 教 學 語 言 中 文 [ 粵 語 講 授 ; 中 文 書 寫 ] 教 學 模 式 28 小 時 講 課 10 小 時 導 修 4 小 時 實 驗 修 讀 的 必 備 條 件 不 適 用 評 估 方 法 80% 指 定 功 課 20% 考 試 科 目 目 標 中 國 醫 學 素 為 中 國 文 化 遺 產 的 重 要 部 份, 其 有 著 悠 久 的 歷 史 及 豐 富 的 內 涵, 它 們 融 合 醫 學 科 學 倫 理 文 化 精 神 和 趣 味 為 一 體, 也 是 中 國 文 化 精 義 內 天 人 合 一 的 呈 現 方 式 之 一, 吸 引 著 眾 多 愛 好 者 神 游 傳 統 中 醫 文 化, 學 習 中 醫 學 的 人, 往 往 能 藉 醫 學 原 理 及 劑 方, 融 合 個 人 於 大 自 然 奇 趣 之 中, 糅 合 道 學 剛 勁 與 陰 柔, 陰 陽 調 和 相 濟, 學 習 中 醫 藥 學 均 有 無 窮 的 趣 意, 故 本 科 尤 教 導 中 國 傳 統 醫 學 的 基 礎 知 識 及 文 化 要 義, 使 學 員 明 白 中 國 醫 學 的 真 義 同 時, 本 科 更 旨 在 增 加 學 員 學 習 中 國 醫 學 的 興 趣, 提 高 學 員 了 解 中 國 醫 學 知 識 的 能 力 學 習 成 果 在 完 成 此 科 目 後, 學 生 有 足 夠 能 力 : 明 白 中 國 醫 學 的 基 礎 知 識 及 特 點 運 用 所 掌 握 的 基 礎 知 識 與 各 學 員 交 流 中 醫 學 文 化 從 實 習 中 分 辨 及 了 解 人 類 經 脈 的 分 佈 及 五 臟 六 府 構 成 的 原 理 藉 了 解 中 國 醫 學 的 特 色, 欣 賞 中 國 文 化 精 義 內 天 人 合 一 養 生 之 道 指 示 性 教 學 內 容 中 醫 學 歷 史 及 重 要 中 國 醫 學 的 地 位, 自 先 秦 至 近 代 中 國 醫 學 的 歷 史 發 展 中 醫 學 的 特 色 針 灸, 骨 骼 的 原 理, 中 醫 聞 診 問 診 及 切 診 中 醫 經 脈 及 診 斷 原 理 以 李 時 珍 本 草 綱 目 為 中 心 的 引 介 中 醫 學 與 道 學 文 化 氣 功 原 理 與 中 醫 的 發 展 56

65 中 醫 兒 科 及 方 劑 學 痲 疹 及 傷 寒 的 治 療 方 法 中 醫 骨 傷 及 婦 科 跌 打 損 傷 與 治 療 應 用 五 臟 病 理 五 臟 腸 胃 與 道 家 治 療 方 法 中 醫 膏 方 及 調 養 引 介 基 本 中 藥 及 飲 料 營 養 方 法 中 醫 療 傷 以 華 陀 論 醫 為 中 心 的 討 論 氣 功 與 養 生 道 家 氣 功 治 療 方 法 中 醫 倫 理 學 中 醫 的 醫 德 及 操 守 教 學 方 法 學 生 需 要 積 極 參 與 課 堂 及 導 修 課 的 教 學 活 動 在 課 堂 上, 主 要 由 講 師 介 紹 中 國 醫 學 的 基 礎 知 識 治 療 方 法, 中 國 醫 學 的 內 容, 尤 多 運 用 電 子 光 碟 內 有 關 中 國 醫 學 知 識 人 體 經 絡 的 光 盤 及 視 覺 器 材, 教 導 學 生 了 解 中 國 醫 學 的 要 義 及 其 蘊 含 的 歷 史 文 化, 使 科 目 更 富 趣 味 及 科 學 邏 輯 講 師 也 會 藉 導 修 課, 使 學 生 掌 握 中 醫 學 上 經 脈 的 基 礎 知 識, 以 體 會 中 國 傳 統 醫 師 斷 診 的 方 法 與 規 則 評 估 方 法 廣 泛 利 用 各 種 評 核 機 制 : 例 如 討 論 報 告 實 習 及 考 試 等 評 鑑 模 式, 準 確 衡 量 學 生 所 學, 亦 特 別 重 視 學 生 課 堂 的 參 與, 務 求 透 過 各 長 期 評 核 方 模 式, 公 平 全 面 有 效 地 評 核 學 生 的 明 白 丶 運 用 及 實 習 所 掌 握 的 中 國 醫 學 基 礎 知 識 能 力 考 試 以 答 題 方 式 測 驗 學 生 認 識 中 國 醫 學 中 的 主 要 原 則 指 示 性 參 考 書 目 推 介 教 科 書 周 萍 : 中 醫 學 基 本 常 識 及 針 炙 學 合 肥 : 安 徽 科 學 技 術 出 版 社,1985 年 參 考 書 劉 燕 池 : 中 醫 學 基 礎 概 論 北 京 : 中 醫 古 籍 出 版 社,1986 年 向 敬 協 : 中 醫 辨 脈 症 治 北 京 : 中 國 中 醫 藥 出 版 社,1998 年 史 方 奇 : 中 醫 優 生 長 壽 法 重 慶 : 科 學 技 術 文 獻 社,1988 年 57

66 黨 毅 : 中 醫 營 養 食 療 學 北 京 : 科 學 出 版 社,1988 年 申 卻 驕 : 中 醫 營 養 學 北 京 : 中 醫 古 籍 出 版 社,1988 年 張 發 榮 : 中 醫 學 基 礎 成 都 : 四 川 科 學 技 術 出 版 社,1991 年 楊 力 : 中 國 運 氣 學 北 京 : 北 京 科 學 技 術 出 版 社,1995 年 門 九 章 : 中 醫 學 導 論 北 京 : 科 學 出 版 社,2001 年 李 以 義 : 中 醫 痰 病 的 現 代 研 究 與 治 療 北 京 : 學 苑 出 版 社,2002 年 58

67 CC1007 中 國 棋 藝 The Art of Chinese Board Games 程 度 1 學 分 3 學 科 性 質 非 科 學 教 學 語 言 中 文 粵 語 講 授 ; 中 文 書 寫 輔 以 英 文 教 學 模 式 28 小 時 課 堂 講 授 14 小 時 導 修 課 修 讀 的 必 備 條 件 無 評 估 方 法 80% 課 堂 習 作 20% 期 終 考 試 科 目 目 標 棋 藝 素 為 中 國 優 秀 文 化 遺 產 的 一 部 份, 它 有 著 悠 久 的 歷 史 及 豐 富 的 內 涵 它 融 合 科 學 藝 術 文 化 趣 味 和 競 技 為 一 體, 吸 引 著 億 萬 愛 好 者 神 游 棋 局 內, 其 引 人 入 勝 的 對 局, 構 思 精 妙 的 殘 局 和 排 局, 尤 其 是 臨 局 交 兵 時 的 競 爭, 更 是 其 他 競 技 項 目 所 不 能 比 擬 的, 有 著 無 窮 的 樂 趣 和 魅 力, 故 本 課 程 教 導 學 員 注 意 中 國 傳 統 及 當 代 棋 藝 的 種 類 及 基 礎 知 識 教 員 除 了 運 用 趣 味 的 教 學 方 法 外, 更 多 介 紹 棋 藝 的 規 則 和 棋 藝 背 後 的 文 化 知 識, 並 從 實 戰 中 提 煉 了 甚 具 特 色 的 棋 例 及 棋 譜, 學 員 從 中 悟 化, 必 可 在 棋 藝 上 有 所 提 高 尤 其 使 學 員 在 學 習 甚 受 國 人 注 意 的 象 棋, 明 白 象 棋 中 不 同 的 殘 局 及 破 解 方 法, 增 加 玩 藝 的 樂 趣 學 習 成 果 在 完 成 此 科 目 後, 學 生 有 足 夠 能 力 : 從 下 棋 的 佈 陣 及 棋 藝 中, 掌 握 中 國 棋 藝 的 特 色 及 其 背 後 的 文 化 理 念 分 析 中 國 象 棋 中 的 殘 局 及 破 解 的 道 理 分 辨 中 國 棋 藝 的 種 類 及 佈 局 學 習 及 實 踐 不 同 棋 藝 的 下 棋 方 法 及 規 則 指 示 性 教 學 內 容 中 國 棋 藝 及 遊 藝 活 動 的 關 係 棋 藝 的 定 義, 棋 藝 與 遊 藝 活 動 的 關 係 中 國 傳 統 棋 藝 的 種 類 及 歷 史 介 紹 中 國 主 要 棋 藝 的 種 類 及 特 色, 了 解 中 國 棋 藝 的 歷 史 演 變 中 國 傳 統 棋 藝 的 文 化 特 色 了 解 中 國 棋 藝 背 後 的 文 化 理 念, 下 棋 的 規 則 東 西 文 化 交 融 下 的 中 國 棋 藝 發 展 中 國 象 棋 及 國 際 象 棋 59

68 棋 盤 和 棋 子 的 種 類 棋 子 的 走 法 吃 子 及 記 錄 方 法 棋 藝 的 術 語 棋 藝 的 規 則 童 玩 棋 藝 文 化 研 習 之 一 : 飛 行 棋 波 子 棋 童 玩 棋 藝 文 化 研 習 之 二 : 戰 鬥 棋 鬥 獸 棋 棋 藝 佈 局 研 習 之 一 : 中 國 象 棋 文 化 棋 藝 佈 局 研 習 之 二 : 圍 棋 文 化 棋 藝 佈 局 研 習 之 三 : 當 代 各 種 戰 棋 教 學 方 法 學 員 需 要 積 極 參 課 堂 及 導 修 課 的 教 學 活 動 在 課 堂 上, 主 要 由 講 師 運 用 各 種 棋 盤 棋 子, 尤 其 是 電 子 光 碟 棋 盤 及 視 覺 器 材, 教 導 學 員 了 解 中 國 棋 藝 文 化 的 特 色 及 規 則, 從 而 增 加 課 程 的 趣 味 及 科 學 邏 輯 講 師 也 會 藉 導 修 課, 使 學 員 運 用 課 堂 上 學 習 知 識, 進 行 不 同 棋 藝 的 下 棋 遊 戲, 實 習 棋 子 的 走 法 吃 子 記 錄 方 法 及 不 同 棋 藝 的 佈 局 與 規 則, 達 到 理 論 與 實 踐 並 重 的 教 學 理 想 評 估 方 法 本 課 程 評 核 將 以 平 日 個 人 習 作 小 組 報 告 和 課 堂 匯 報, 測 驗 及 考 試 的 形 式 進 行 本 課 程 以 80% 為 平 日 個 人 習 作, 因 為 本 科 注 意 同 學 是 否 可 以 運 用 所 學 的 棋 藝 知 識, 本 科 以 教 導 同 學 在 參 與 不 同 種 類 的 棋 藝 中, 學 習 及 運 用 變 陣 和 佈 局 方 法, 故 注 意 同 學 在 持 續 的 評 估 方 法 上, 所 獲 的 成 績 ; 而 以 20%, 以 傳 統 考 試 的 方 法, 評 核 同 學 所 獲 的 基 礎 知 識 1. 持 續 個 人 評 估 方 法 上, 多 注 意 各 位 同 學 下 棋 的 佈 局 及 應 變 方 法, 由 講 師 在 每 次 習 作 中, 設 定 相 關 佈 局 給 不 同 的 同 學, 以 便 考 核 各 學 的 應 對 方 法 2. 小 組 書 面 報 告 主 要 從 小 組 同 學 合 作 撰 寫 的 報 告 中, 考 核 同 學 合 作 能 力 及 報 告 所 獲 棋 藝 的 知 識 3. 課 堂 匯 報 主 要 考 核 同 學 報 告 能 力, 能 否 在 有 限 時 間 內, 發 揮 報 告 不 同 類 類 棋 藝 的 特 色 及 重 點 指 示 性 參 考 書 目 推 介 教 科 書 王 國 楝 : 中 國 棋 藝 文 化 教 程 北 京 : 北 京 大 學 出 版 社,2000 年 參 考 書 Frey, Peter, Chess Skill in Man and Machine. New York: Spring-Veriage (1983). Levy, David, The Chess Scen. London: Faber (1974). 60

69 何 明 遠 : 棋 藝 技 術 北 京 : 清 華 大 學 出 版 社,1980 年 王 嘉 良 : 象 棋 高 級 教 程 黑 龍 江 : 黑 龍 江 人 民 出 版,1997 年 沈 世 明 : 中 國 棋 藝 的 歷 史 北 京 : 北 京 人 民 大 學 出 版 社,2000 年 陳 文 良 : 中 國 棋 藝 思 想 北 京 : 北 京 大 學 出 版 社,2000 年 王 國 楝 : 象 棋 教 程 北 京 : 北 京 大 學 出 版 社,2002 年 古 盛 名 : 棋 藝 與 文 化 上 海 : 旭 日 出 版 社,2003 年 大 恒 電 子 出 版 社 出 版 編 : 中 國 象 棋 ( 光 盤 + 手 冊 ) 北 京 : 北 京 光 碟 科 技 發 展 有 限 公 司,2004 年 61

70 CC1008 中 西 音 樂 欣 賞 Appreciation of Asian and Western Music 程 度 1 學 分 3 學 科 性 質 非 科 學 教 學 語 言 中 文 粵 語 講 授 ; 中 文 書 寫 輔 以 英 文 教 學 模 式 28 小 時 課 堂 講 授 14 小 時 導 修 課 修 讀 的 必 備 條 件 無 評 估 方 法 80% 課 堂 習 作 20% 期 終 考 試 科 目 目 標 本 課 程 旨 在 介 紹 中 西 音 樂 由 古 代 至 二 十 世 紀 的 主 要 樂 曲, 不 同 時 期 的 音 樂 家 或 演 奏 者, 使 學 員 明 白 每 一 時 代 音 樂 發 展 與 歷 史 文 化 的 互 動 關 係 學 員 修 讀 本 科, 可 以 初 步 認 識 中 西 音 樂 藝 術 的 基 本 原 理, 中 西 音 樂 的 異 同 學 員 可 以 明 白 欣 賞 中 西 音 樂 的 方 法 學 員 也 可 以 了 解 中 西 音 樂 的 發 展 歷 程, 中 外 古 典 音 樂 與 近 代 音 樂 藝 術 發 展 的 關 係 學 員 可 以 藉 課 堂 上 聆 聽 中 外 音 樂, 了 解 中 國 音 樂 的 種 類 及 門 派, 也 可 以 明 白 西 方 演 奏 家 的 藝 術 造 藝, 從 而 提 升 學 員 欣 賞 中 西 音 樂 的 能 力 及 興 趣, 擴 闊 學 員 文 化 視 野 學 習 成 果 在 完 成 此 科 目 後, 學 生 有 足 夠 能 力 : 明 白 中 西 音 樂 演 變 的 歷 史 比 較 中 西 音 樂 基 礎 樂 理 的 異 同 分 析 中 西 音 樂 文 化 的 異 同 運 用 簡 單 的 樂 器 演 奏 中 西 音 樂 基 礎 樂 章 運 用 課 堂 教 導 欣 賞 音 樂 的 方 法, 分 析 中 西 樂 理 指 示 性 教 學 內 容 中 西 音 樂 的 基 本 義 理 歷 史 及 其 特 質 教 導 中 西 樂 譜 及 自 公 元 前 至 今 樂 理 的 演 變 中 西 樂 器 的 介 紹 介 紹 中 西 方 常 用 的 樂 器 及 特 點 中 西 著 名 樂 譜 及 演 奏 家 介 紹 西 方 貝 多 芬 蕭 伯 納, 中 方 聶 耳 了 解 中 音 樂 的 背 後 文 化 樂 器 背 後 的 文 化 理 念 及 創 意 62

71 學 習 西 方 音 樂 與 西 方 文 化 的 關 係 戰 爭 與 音 樂, 社 會 經 濟 發 展 與 音 樂 欣 賞 中 西 音 樂 的 方 法 觀 賞 樂 章 及 樂 譜, 聽 樂 器 音 調 中 西 音 樂 的 流 派 西 方 的 近 代 與 古 典 樂 派, 中 方 的 和 諧 與 激 昂 的 樂 派 了 解 中 西 音 樂 的 風 格 作 者 創 作 旋 律 與 樂 理, 樂 理 與 個 人 風 格 的 互 動 中 西 音 樂 文 化 比 教 中 西 音 樂 的 異 同 欣 賞 中 國 及 西 方 音 樂 舉 隅 中 國 國 歌 二 泉 映 月 馬 塞 進 行 軍 曲 及 藍 色 多 腦 河 中 西 古 典 音 樂 的 風 格 介 紹 蕭 伯 納 及 貝 多 芬 的 名 作 音 樂 藝 術 與 人 生 總 結 音 樂 與 人 生 的 發 展, 音 樂 的 變 換 與 人 們 心 情 的 關 係 教 學 方 法 學 員 需 要 積 極 參 與 課 堂 及 導 修 課 的 教 學 活 動 在 課 堂 上, 主 要 由 講 師 運 用 各 種 文 獻 資 料 音 樂 樂 譜 及 各 種 中 外 樂 器, 尤 其 是 音 樂 光 碟 及 視 覺 器 材, 教 導 學 員 了 解 中 西 音 樂 藝 術 的 異 同, 聆 聽 欣 賞 中 外 音 樂 藝 術 文 化 的 特 色, 從 而 令 課 程 更 富 趣 味 及 觀 賞 價 值 講 師 也 會 藉 導 修 課, 播 放 中 外 著 名 樂 曲, 使 學 員 運 用 課 堂 上 學 習 知 識, 明 白 音 樂 發 展 與 時 代 文 化 是 相 互 影 響 的, 達 到 理 論 與 實 踐 並 重 的 教 學 理 想 評 估 方 法 本 課 程 評 核 將 以 個 人 習 作 小 組 報 告 和 課 堂 匯 報, 測 驗 及 考 試 的 形 式 進 行 本 課 程 評 核 以 平 日 個 人 習 作 小 組 報 告 和 課 堂 匯 報, 測 驗 及 考 試 的 形 式 進 行 本 課 程 以 80% 為 平 日 個 人 習 作, 因 為 本 科 注 意 同 學 是 否 可 以 運 用 所 學 的 中 西 音 樂 的 知 識, 本 科 以 教 導 同 學 在 運 用 不 同 種 類 的 樂 器 中, 學 習 及 運 用 樂 器 演 奏 簡 單 及 基 礎 的 樂 章, 故 注 意 同 學 在 持 續 的 評 估 方 法 上, 所 獲 的 成 績 ; 並 以 20%, 以 考 試 的 方 法, 評 核 同 學 所 獲 的 基 礎 知 識 1. 持 續 個 人 評 估 方 法 上, 多 注 意 各 位 同 學 了 解 及 運 用 不 同 樂 器, 演 奏 有 關 樂 章, 由 講 師 在 每 次 習 作 中, 設 定 運 用 相 關 樂 器 的 基 礎 知 識, 以 便 考 核 各 學 的 所 學 習 的 知 識 2. 小 組 書 面 報 告 主 要 從 小 組 同 學 合 作 撰 寫 的 報 告 中, 考 核 同 學 合 作 能 力 及 報 告 所 獲 樂 藝 的 知 識 3. 課 堂 匯 報 主 要 考 核 同 學 報 告 能 力, 能 否 在 有 限 時 間 內, 發 揮 報 告 不 同 種 型 樂 器 的 特 色 及 重 點 63

72 指 示 性 參 考 書 目 推 介 教 科 書 Balimore, Md., Music and Technology in the Twentieth, NK: Jonh Hopkins University Press (2002). 伍 國 楝 : 中 國 音 樂 上 海 : 上 海 外 語 丈 育 出 版 社,1999 年 參 考 書 Beranek, Leo, Music, Acoustics And Architecture, NY: Rodert E.Keieger Pub. Co. (1979). Guilford, Conn., Performing Arts of China : Instrument and Music, London: Norton Publishers (1992). Health, Edward, Music: A Joy for Life, London: Sidgwick & Jackson (1976). Kivy, Peter, Music alone: Philosophy Reflections on the Purely Musical Experience, (1990). Leichtentritt, Hugo, Music, History and Ideas, Cambridge: Cambridge Mass.,Harvard University Press (1973). 許 之 衝 : 中 國 音 樂 小 史 上 海 : 商 務 印 書 館,1939 年 沈 知 白 : 中 國 音 樂 史 綱 要 上 海 : 上 海 文 藝 出 版 社,1982 年 朱 世 瑞 : 中 國 音 樂 中 復 調 思 維 的 形 成 與 發 展 北 京 : 人 民 音 樂 出 版 社,1992 年 黃 翔 鵬 : 中 國 音 樂 文 物 大 系 鄭 州 : 大 象 出 版 社,1996 年 林 紫 渝 : 音 樂 與 美 術 香 港 : 時 代 生 活 叢 書 出 版 社,1997 年 劉 承 華 : 中 國 音 樂 的 人 文 闡 釋 上 海 : 上 海 音 樂 出 版 社,2002 年 64

73 CC2001 English Skills for Academic Studies Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 42 hours of Seminar Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims The subject prepares students for successful academic study in an English medium post-secondary learning environment. The main focus of this subject is to develop students confidence and competence in using English within academic contexts relevant to their area of study. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: Listening Skills take effective notes on key points and ideas in spoken academic contexts Reading Skills apply learned strategies to improve reading for different purposes (e.g. reading for general understanding, reading for details, etc.) Writing Skills write a well-structured paragraph that includes a topic sentence and supporting details paraphrase, summarize, and quote from a source write an academic essay using the process approach which enables students to o generate and select writing topics o plan, organise, and structure an academic essay o edit and revise their work for unity, coherence, support, and sentence skills demonstrate improved control of vocabulary and grammar through appropriate and accurate usage in writing Speaking Skills contribute and justify their comments and respond critically to others ideas in a small group discussion demonstrate improved control of pronunciation through an increased awareness of common pronunciation errors in Hong Kong Research Skills conduct library and other research and integrate ideas from other sources to support their positions document information from multiple sources using an established documentation style (e.g. MLA, APA, etc.) 65

74 Study Skills reflect on learning processes and critically evaluate performance in academic English tasks contribute positively to class learning and group activities Indicative Contents Note-taking and listening skills Reading strategies Process writing Academic essays Referencing Documenting Discussion/ presentation skills Study skills Teaching/Learning Approach Students will be required to participate actively in the learning process. During seminars, students will take part in a wide range of interesting and challenging language learning activities such as role-plays, discussions, individual and group activities, which reflect students needs in their field of studies. In particular, students will be required to plan and collaborate with peers in a major team project/assignment which will give them an opportunity to experience learning from peers as well. In language laboratory sessions, audio-visual materials will be used to improve students listening and speaking skills, and WebCT will be used as a tool to promote extended learning after class. Students are also encouraged to engage in constant reflection on learning processes and to evaluate their own as well as their peers performance in the learning tasks. Through extensive interactive practices, the course helps students gain mastery of the academic language skills needed for effective academic communication. Assessment Approach Students are required to complete the following four assessment tasks which are combined to address all the learning outcomes of the course: 1. Two individual written tasks 2. One individual/ group oral task 3. One group project/ assignment They will demonstrate achievement of course learning outcomes by completing a combination of the following tasks relevant to their discipline of study: i) Paragraph Writing: This task aims at assessing students ability in developing a topic through paragraphing. They need to write a paragraph that includes a topic sentence and supporting details. ii) Summary Writing: This task requires students to synthesize information/ideas from an academic article. iii) Group Project/Assignment: The group project/assignment gives students an opportunity to plan and collaborate with their fellow classmates in small groups and apply the learned strategies and skills in researching, writing, reading, speaking, and/or listening. 66

75 iv) Seminar Discussion: This task assesses students listening and speaking skills. They have to apply the learned strategies to note down key points and opinions of their peers, state their position, and respond critically to peers ideas in a group discussion. v) Academic Essay: This writing task assesses students research, referencing, documenting, and process writing skills. Reflection: This task gives students opportunities to reflect on their learning processes and critically evaluate their group communication skills. In addition, to encourage a spirit of enquiry and sharing and to help students explore the creativity and enjoyment of the process of learning and researching knowledge, part of students grade will be based on their class participation throughout the course of the semester. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Langan, John. English Skills for Academic Studies. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). An abridged edition of: Langan, John. College Writing Skills with Readings. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.) Reading and Study Skills. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). References Langan, John. English Brushup. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Madden, Carolyn G. and Rohlck, Theresa N. Discussion and Interaction in the Academic Community. University of Michigan Press. (latest ed.). Oshima, Alice. and Hogue, Ann. Writing Academic English. Addison Wesley Longman. (latest ed.). Spencer, Carolyn M. and Arbon, Beverly. Foundations of Writing: Developing Research and Academic Writing Skills. NTC. (latest ed.). Steer, Jocelyn. M. and Schmid, Dawn. The Advanced Grammar Book (Workbook), Heinle & Heinle. (latest ed.). Wallace, Michael J. Study Skills in English. Cambridge University Press. (latest ed.). 67

76 CC2002 Creative and Critical Thinking Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial/Workshop Prerequisite Nil Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject equips students with critical and creative thinking skills. It provides the conceptual framework to identify problems in both everyday life and specific domains and to make the right and appropriate decisions. By widening their horizon and stimulating their multi-dimensional thinking style, it cultivates a proper attitude which promotes students critical and creative power. Studying the subject will also help develop students critical thinking and creative thinking for their life-long learning and facilitate their future work prospect. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the importance of thinking skills in their everyday life appreciate their existing thinking habits, mental blocks and attitudes that hinder them from being creative and/or critical be aware of the different types of thinking, how they are different, how they can complement each other and how they can be applied to everyday situations become more attuned to fallacious reasoning in everyday life and know how to correct the fallacies found apply the techniques for critical thinking in evaluating solutions and arguments develop the attitude and techniques for creative problem solving apply the basic skills for working in innovative problem solving teams Indicative Contents Thinking as a Skill Concept of Thinking; Importance of thinking; Habitual thinking vs thinking as a deliberate skill that can be controlled; Vertical (critical) vs lateral (creative) thinking; Attitude and psychological preparations for thinking. Critical Thinking: Introduction Critical thinking; Role of critical thinking and how it can complement creative thinking in problem solving; Logic and critical thinking. 68

77 Refining Solutions to Problems Steps in refining: working out details, finding imperfections and complications, and making improvements and decisions. Evaluating Arguments Common errors affecting truth including either/or thinking, issue avoidance, overgeneralization, double standards, shifting burden of proof, and irrational appeal; Common errors affecting validity. Creative Thinking: Introduction Creativity as the ability to modify self-imposed constraints; Characteristics of creative people; Basic elements affecting creativity in practice: person, process, product and climate; Introduction to stages in the creative process. Generating Ideas Avoiding blocks to creativity; Stimulating ideas using various techniques and tools: forced uncommon responses, free association, analogy, unusual combinations, visualization, brain storming, and Edward de Bono s various techniques such as the six thinking hats, Tony Buzan s mindmapping technique, etc. Creative and Critical Thinking in Teams Characteristics of effective teams; Stimulating creativity and problem solving in teams; Communication, trust building and conflict-reduction for teams. Teaching/Learning Approach The emphasis of the subject is on enabling students to acquire the attitudes and skills in practical thinking. Lectures will be used to explain and demonstrate the topics and techniques introduced. Games, cases and exercises will be used during tutorials to let students experience thinking in action. To motivate students to actively change their own attitudes and participate in experiential workshop-style tutorials, a lot of interesting and daily examples and cases will be used as illustration/demonstration during lectures, for exercises during tutorials and for assignments. To achieve the best learning outcomes, the lecturer/instructor will try to create a climate that is challenging, dynamic and yet idea-supporting, trusting, and playful. Debates and risk-taking will be encouraged, which facilitates students making their own judgments in a rational as well as fluent way. Both English and Chinese will be used as the medium of instruction and in assessments. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess creative and critical thinking as well as communication skills. 69

78 Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks Greg Bassham., Critical Thinking: A student s introduction. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). 方 子 華 等 著 批 判 思 考,McGraw Hill (2005) References De Bono, Edward. Creativity. HarperCollins Publisher. (latest ed.). 李 天 命 著 語 理 分 析 的 思 考 方 法 香 港 : 青 文 書 屋 (1982) 勞 思 光 著 思 想 方 法 五 講 新 編 香 港 : 香 港 中 文 大 學 (2000) 李 天 命 著 從 思 考 到 思 考 之 上 香 港 : 明 報 出 版 社 (2002) 70

79 CC2003 Quantitative Methods Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Exclusions CC2026 Numerical Skills & CC2030 Mathematics Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with fundamental understanding of a variety of quantitative concepts and techniques, and the ability to take a numerate approach to solve problems in real-life situations. Studying this subject will also help develop students ability to think analytically, critically and creatively, which prepares them for further studies and life-long learning. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand a variety of quantitative methods and use them to solve problems in real world situations identify and apply appropriate techniques for the solution of common mathematical problems attain the mathematical knowledge and reasoning skills needed in their future studies Indicative Contents Basic Algebra Compound interest; Discounting and present value; Linear functions and quadratic functions; Simple inequalities; System of linear equations in two and three variables; Elimination method; Matrix and matrix operations; Inverse of a square matrix; Logarithmic functions; Exponential functions. Differentiation Basic concepts of limits, continuity and derivatives; Gradient of tangent and rate of change; Techniques of differentiation; Higher-order derivatives; Maximum and minimum; Curve sketching; Marginal analysis; Optimization problems. Integration Antiderivatives and rules of integration; Definite and indefinite integrals; Fundamental theorem of calculus; Areas between curves; Applications of the definite integral to business problems. 71

80 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures introduce and explain the key mathematical concepts and illustrate their uses. Tutorials are conducted for students to check their solutions to exercises, and to resolve problems with their understanding of the topics. Assessment Approach Effective assessment tools will be adopted, including end-of-chapter problems, quizzes, assignments, tests, and an examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and problem solving skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook College Algebra and Calculus for Business, Economics, Life and Social Sciences. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). An abridged edition of: Laurence D. Hoffmann and Gerald L. Bradley. Calculus for Business, Economics and the Social and Life Sciences. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Barnett Raymond A., Ziegler, Michael R. and Byleen, Karl E. College Algebra Graphs and Models. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). References Barnett Raymond A., Ziegler, Michael R. and Byleen Karl E. Applied Mathematics for Business, Economics, Life Sciences, and Social Sciences. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Tan S.T. College Mathematics for the Managerial, Life, and Social Sciences. Brooks/Cole. (latest ed.). 72

81 CC2005 Applied Computing Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Laboratory Exclusion CC2004 Introduction to Information Technology Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims The objective of this subject is to equip students with analytical skills in using and operating computers. This subject provides training in the technical basics of the World Wide Web and ways to make use of the Web particulars. It introduces the architecture of a computer system so that the students can understand how a computer works from both the hardware and software perspectives. It also covers the use of application software as well as basic programming in the operating system level and application level. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: outline Information Technology and its applications develop end-user computing skills for use in business environments integrate end-user computing techniques into business applications appraise and analyse issues relating to Information technology and the computer system apply Information Technology to business activities Indicative Contents Fundamentals of World Wide Web Internet basics; Client/server model; Basic HTML; Browsers; Searching the web; Downloading programs and files; Web graphics; Multimedia; Web programming tools. Fundamentals of Information Technology I/O devices; Number systems; Basic logic operations; Simple computer architecture; Simple computer organisations. Application Software and End User Computing Privacy and ethics with software; Copyright and patent law; Word processing; Spreadsheet analysis; Graphical presentation; Database; Computer drafting; Programming tools. 73

82 Operating System Basics UNIX commands; Shells; Process; File systems; Handling files in UNIX; Running programs; Compiling programs. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on delivering and explaining key concepts of applied computing, with specific reference to the latest issues of information technology where appropriate. Relevant daily-life cases and examples will be introduced for in-class discussion. Laboratory sessions are organised for students to apply the concepts learnt in the lectures to real-life computer applications. Students are provided with the opportunity to gain hands-on experience of using different types of computer software and packages, as well as to work with the World Wide Web for specific mandates. Assessment Approach The assessment consists of group or individual assignments covering the main topics taught. These assignments are strategically designed to develop the problem solving and analytical techniques of students to relate the learnt theories into application level. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Burd, S.D. Systems Architecture. Thomson Learning. (latest ed.). References Deitel, H.M. and Deitel, P.J. C. How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Englander, I. The Architecture of Computer Hardware and Systems Software, An Information Technology Approach. Wiley. (latest ed.). Lopo, E.D.C., Aitken, P. and Jones, B.L. Teach yourself C for Linux Programming in 21 Days. SAMS. (latest ed.). Shelly, G.B., Cashman, T.J. and Vermaat, M.E. Discovering Computers Thomson Learning. (latest ed.). Shelly, G.B., Cashman, T.J. and Vermaat, M.E. Microsoft Office XP: Advanced Concepts and Techniques. Thomson Learning. (latest ed.). 74

83 CC2006 Introduction to Internet Technology Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject aims to introduce the basic concepts and essential knowledge of the applications and technology on Internet and World Wide Web. It provides a conceptual framework to understand the operation of Internet and to understand how computers are connected and talk to each other. Studying this subject will also help develop students analytical ability on network technology. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the basic concepts and applications of Internet and World Wide Web. design and develop simple Internet applications with HTML. apply relevant Internet knowledge to enhance their understanding of other situations of networking. Indicative Contents Fundamentals of World Wide Web Internet basics; Client/server model; Basic HTML; Browsers; Searching the Web; Downloading programs and files; Web graphics; Multimedia; Web programming tools. Internetworking Technology Concepts on internetworking; Internetworking architecture; Protocols and standards; IP, UDP, TCP, SMTP, SNMP, and IP addresses; Domain name system; Agents; Intranets; Extranets. Internet Applications Client-server interactions; Electronic mail; Telnet and FTP; Electronic publishing, Electronic fund transfer; Electronic data interchange; Internet service providers; Application service providers; Internet applications and services in Hong Kong. Internet Security Security and firewall; Privacy and security issues; Introduction to Virtual Private Network (VPN). 75

84 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key Internet concepts, with specific reference to the latest Internet technology wherever appropriate. The techniques of designing and developing small-scale web-based programs will also be taught. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of different network configuration. The activities in tutorials normally include hands-on exercises and program writing with various web programming techniques. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, assignments, tests and examination designed to develop and assess analytical skills of the students. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Jean Andrews, i-net+ Guide to Internet, Course Technology (latest ed.). References Comer, D.E., Computer Networks and Internets, Prentice Hall (latest ed.). Greenlaw, R., Fundamentals of the Internet and the World Wide Web, McGraw-Hill (latest ed.). H. Albert Napier, Philip J. Judd, Discovering the Internet: Brief Concepts and Techniques, Course Technology (latest ed.). Karl Barksdale, Michael Rutter, Ryan Teeter, Internet BASICS, Course Technology (latest ed.). Perry, Schneider. New Perspectives on the Internet, Thomson Learning (latest ed.). 76

85 CC2007 Environmental Science Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 21 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial 7 hours of Seminar Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject describes a list of environmental factors: heat, light, sound, electricity and magnetism, for consideration in the design of buildings. Students will be introduced to the analysis and assessment of the thermal, lighting, acoustic, irradiation and moisture performance characteristics of buildings. The concept of maintaining the built environment of buildings and integrating the buildings with the macro-environment will be emphasized. Environmental assessment methods will be introduced as a tool to assess the impact of the built structure on the environment. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing of the subject, students will be able to: appreciate the fundamental factors of environmental science: heat, light, sound, electricity and magnetism, in building design design and construct the built environment in accordance to the environmental science criteria use the performance requirements to maintain a stable built environment for human comfort analyse and assess the thermal, lighting, acoustic, irradiation and moisture performance characteristics of buildings integrate buildings into the macro-environment: geographical factor and the consequent social, economic and ecological impact of the buildings use environmental assessment methods such as environmental impact assessment and environmental audit in some large-scale projects like reclamation and land filling Indicative Contents Meteorology and Climatology Effects and impacts of meteorology and climatology on the micro-climate and human comfort of buildings. Application in the design of buildings with consideration of weather and climate. Heat Nature of heat and heat transfer with heat gains or losses in buildings. Use of insulating materials, thermal insulation and comfort with design of buildings. Moisture in buildings: gases and vapours, humidity and condensation. 77

86 Light and Sound Basic physics of light and electromagnetic radiation; lighting for vision. Nature of sound and its levels; attenuation, control of noise with building acoustics. Electricity and Magnetism Induction of electricity by magnetism, and vice versa. Power supplies and distribution in buildings. Water Water supplies and fluid flow. Treatment of water before discharge. Environmental Issues Limits of Earth s resources such as land, water, energy, mineral and food. Environmental pollution such as in air, water or land, with chemical, radiation and noise. Problems of ecosystems and conservation. Assessment methods: environmental audit and environmental impact assessment. Teaching/Leaning Approach A wide range of methods will be adopted, which include lectures, small group discussions, student presentations, project based and problem-solving tasks and case study work. Lectures are for the introduction of the basic environmental concepts in building. Discussions and presentations during tutorial and seminars are used to stimulate students to appreciate and solve problems in environmental issues in large-scale construction projects. Where appropriate, the use of computer assisted learning techniques will be employed. It is intended to create an environment that encourages active learning. Students will be encouraged to reflect on their learning activities to review what they have learned and to plan further action and activity. Assessment Assessment such as individual assignments, tests and examination will be used to assess the application of the knowledge assimilated in lectures and reinforced in tutorials. Students are trained to search for information, comprehend, criticise and summarise in own words in the project reports and problem-solving tasks. Students are required to present findings from project and case study in the seminars. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Burberry, P., Environment and Services. Longman, (latest ed.). 78

87 References BRE (various), Digests and Current Papers. Building Research Establishment, Garston, Watford, U.K., (recent issues). BSIRIA., Building Services Materials Handbook. CIBS, U.K., (latest ed.). Hall, F., Building Services and Equipment. Longman, (latest ed.). Markus, T.A. and Morris, E.B., Building Climate and Energy. Pitman Publishing Ltd., (latest ed.). McMullan, R., Environmental Services in Building. The Macmillan Press Ltd., (latest ed.). Redcuft, M., Sustainable Development Exploring the Contradictions. Routledge, (latest ed.). Wathern, P., Environmental Impact Assessment, Theory and Practice. Routledge, (latest ed.). 79

88 CC2008 中 國 文 化 Chinese Civilisation 程 度 2 學 分 3 學 科 性 質 非 科 學 教 學 語 言 中 文 粵 語 講 授 ; 中 文 書 寫 學 習 模 式 28 小 時 課 堂 講 授 14 小 時 導 修 課 修 讀 的 必 備 條 件 無 評 估 方 法 50% 課 堂 習 作 50% 期 終 考 試 科 目 目 標 本 科 主 要 介 紹 中 國 文 化 的 基 本 精 神 及 特 質, 簡 論 中 西 文 化 在 價 值 系 統 及 哲 學 觀 念 的 差 異 在 傳 統 社 會 結 構 中, 中 國 文 化 價 值 極 容 易 從 日 常 生 活 中 得 到 體 現, 故 本 課 程 既 從 政 治 社 會 倫 理 傳 統 建 築 藝 術 繪 畫 經 濟 宗 教 飲 食 法 律 等 各 方 面 教 導 有 關 中 國 文 化 知 識, 本 科 尤 注 意 同 學 運 用 所 學 的 中 國 文 化 知 識, 了 解 當 代 中 國 人 所 思 所 想, 故 為 同 學 舉 辦 多 次 戶 外 考 察, 同 學 就 考 察 的 景 物, 擬 定 研 究 課 題, 撰 寫 報 告 及 書 面 習 作, 引 證 課 堂 教 導 的 知 識, 在 香 港 的 現 實 生 活 中, 體 會 中 國 文 化 的 特 質, 中 國 文 化 與 現 代 社 會 的 命 運 學 習 成 果 在 完 成 此 科 目 後, 學 生 有 足 夠 能 力 : 從 觀 察 現 時 香 港 景 物 中, 學 習 中 西 方 文 化 的 特 色 體 會 中 國 文 化 的 意 義 學 習 從 上 層 及 下 層 的 不 ` 同 角 度 欣 賞 中 國 文 化 從 多 元 的 視 野 中, 分 析 中 國 文 化 的 要 義 及 特 點 培 養 從 宏 觀 及 微 觀 的 角 度, 探 討 中 國 文 化 從 日 常 生 活 中, 應 用 中 國 哲 學 及 文 化 的 知 識 指 示 性 教 學 內 容 中 國 文 化 的 要 義 何 謂 中 國 文 化? 研 究 文 化 的 方 法, 介 紹 當 代 中 外 學 者 對 中 國 文 化 的 看 法 中 國 古 代 建 築 藝 術 寺 廟, 祠 堂, 道 觀 建 築 藝 術 的 特 色 中 國 飲 食 文 化 中 國 南 北 飲 食 文 化 的 異 同, 飲 食 文 化 的 器 具 中 國 家 族 倫 理 長 幼 有 序, 不 同 的 稱 謂, 人 倫 物 理 便 是 道 80

89 中 國 人 的 愛 情 觀 中 國 人 對 親 人, 鄉 鄰, 兄 弟 之 情, 男 女 相 愛 的 情 中 國 人 的 諸 神 祟 拜 道 教 諸 神, 中 國 佛 教, 行 業 神 中 國 人 的 死 後 世 界 死 葬 禮 儀, 死 後 的 世 界 與 人 間 的 互 動 中 國 法 律 文 化 刑 具, 禮 法 之 爭 中 國 軍 事 思 想 墨 子, 宋 代 軍 事 思 想, 鄭 和 下 西 洋 評 估 方 法 本 課 程 評 核 將 以 個 人 習 作 小 組 報 告 和 課 堂 匯 報, 測 驗 及 考 試 的 形 式 進 行 平 時 分 佔 50%, 考 試 50% 1. 個 人 習 作 主 要 以 撰 寫 論 文 的 方 式, 考 核 同 學 研 究 天 文 與 占 卜 關 係 的 基 礎 知 識 2. 小 組 書 面 報 告 同 學 要 從 戶 外 考 察 中, 撰 寫 有 關 報 告, 考 核 同 學 合 作 能 力 及 報 告 所 獲 的 知 識 3. 課 堂 匯 報 主 要 考 核 同 學 報 告 能 力, 能 否 在 有 限 時 間 內, 發 揮 報 告 的 重 點 指 示 性 參 考 書 目 推 介 教 科 書 香 港 城 市 大 學 中 國 文 化 科 目 中 心 編 : 中 國 文 化 導 讀 香 港 : 香 港 城 市 大 學 出 版 社,1999 年 參 考 書 Fairbank, John K., Late Ching China, , Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, Fairbank, John K. and Merle Goldman, ed. China: A New History, Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 王 力 編 : 中 國 古 代 文 化 史 講 座 北 京 : 北 京 大 學 出 版 社,1989 年 余 英 時 : 歷 史 人 物 與 文 化 危 機 上 海 : 上 海 人 民 出 版 社,1987 年 李 治 安 : 中 國 古 代 官 僚 政 治 北 京 : 書 目 文 獻 出 版 社,1993 年 81

90 CC2009 中 國 語 文 Chinese Language 程 度 2 學 分 3 學 科 性 質 非 科 學 教 學 語 言 中 文 粵 語 講 授 ; 中 文 書 寫 教 學 模 式 42 小 時 課 堂 講 授 修 讀 的 必 備 條 件 無 評 估 方 法 60% 課 堂 習 作 40% 期 終 考 試 科 目 目 標 本 課 程 主 要 培 養 同 學 運 用 中 文 傳 播 訊 息 的 能 力, 注 意 培 養 同 學 員 口 語 表 達 的 技 巧 提 升 閱 讀 及 中 文 寫 作 的 能 力, 尤 注 意 同 學 撰 寫 各 類 文 章 的 基 礎 知 識, 如 應 用 文 等, 同 時, 也 教 導 同 學 掌 握 及 提 升 運 用 中 國 語 文 字 辭 及 用 語 的 能 力 學 習 成 果 在 完 成 此 科 目 後, 學 生 有 足 夠 能 力 : 從 個 人 演 說 中, 提 升 同 學 演 說 的 技 巧 及 能 力 明 白 漢 語 結 構 及 漢 字 流 變 的 知 識 從 閱 讀 書 籍 及 文 章 中, 以 提 升 閱 讀 中 文 著 作 的 能 力, 及 理 解 不 同 文 章 的 技 巧 運 用 不 同 種 類 的 應 用 文 體, 以 應 付 日 常 事 務 的 要 求 吸 收 前 人 的 成 果, 以 提 升 運 用 語 文, 評 估 作 品 及 鑑 賞 名 著 能 力 指 示 性 教 學 內 容 基 礎 中 文 課 程 詞 性 句 子 篇 章 結 構 漢 語 語 法 通 論 文 字 流 變 及 簡 化 字 通 論 閱 讀 技 巧 實 用 文 寫 作 訓 練 課 程 書 信 ( 各 公 私 函 件 ) 求 職 面 試 及 履 歷 計 劃 書 新 聞 稿 直 銷 書 報 告 書 計 劃 書 建 議 書 專 題 介 紹 評 論 82

91 說 話 及 聆 聽 訓 練 課 程 粵 語 正 音 聆 聽 溝 通 技 巧 演 講 討 論 與 辯 論 教 學 方 法 理 論 與 實 際 並 施. 透 過 大 量 個 案 分 析 ( 佳 作 及 病 例 ) 深 化 課 堂 所 教. 並 鼓 勵 學 生 參 與 相 互 討 論 及 導 修 報 告 進 一 步 活 用 中 文 強 化 自 信, 並 鼓 勵 學 生 提 交 作 業 以 及 參 與 模 擬 演 講 辯 論, 具 體 地 驗 正 理 論 之 教 評 估 方 法 廣 泛 利 用 各 種 評 核 機 制 : 例 如 討 論 報 告 演 說 面 試 測 驗 及 考 試 等 評 鑑 模 式, 準 確 衡 量 學 生 所 學, 亦 特 別 重 視 學 生 的 參 與, 務 求 透 過 各 文 類 的 寫 作 及 各 模 擬 演 辯, 更 公 平 全 面 有 效 地 評 核 學 生 的 能 力 1. 個 人 習 作 主 要 以 持 續 評 估 的 方 法, 要 求 同 學 撰 寫 應 用 文 及 記 敘 文 等 文 體, 從 各 篇 文 章 中, 考 核 同 學 運 用 語 文 能 力 2. 小 組 書 面 報 告 同 學 要 從 閱 讀 有 關 著 名 的 篇 章 中, 作 小 組 報 告, 以 考 檢 同 學 的 溝 通 組 織 及 運 用 語 文 的 能 力 3. 面 試 技 巧 主 要 考 核 同 學 運 用 中 文, 進 行 演 說 的 能 力 參 考 書 目 推 介 教 科 書 胡 裕 樹 : 現 代 漢 語 香 港 : 三 聯 書 店,1992 年 參 考 書 黃 錫 淩 : 粵 音 韻 彙 香 港 : 中 華 書 局,1989 年 董 兆 傑 : 口 語 訓 練 香 港 : 語 文 出 版 社,1992 年 胡 大 奎 金 綿 英 : 社 交 口 語 學 練 指 導 北 京 : 高 等 教 育 出 版 社,1985 年 陳 建 民 : 說 話 的 藝 術 香 港 : 語 文 出 版 社,1994 年 鄭 愛 蓮 : 口 才 之 道 香 港 : 中 華 書 局,1992 年 呂 叔 湘 : 現 代 漢 語 八 百 詞 香 港 : 商 務 印 書 館,1981 年 王 國 璋 安 汝 磐 : 常 用 詞 用 法 例 釋 北 京 : 中 國 人 民 大 學 出 版 社,1985 年 83

92 CC2010 Elementary French Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction French, supplemented by English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisite Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject serves to introduce to students basic and fundamental French. The most practical aspects of using French will be illustrated in daily life to enhance students proficiency. By means of understanding French culture, students can learn the French language in easier ways. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this course, students will be able to: use the basic phonetics of French. use the common phrases in French to cope with their travel needs. express themselves in French to survive in French speaking countries. appreciate some aspects of French culture. Indicative Contents French Pronunciation The consonants and vowels of French; Words in company; Intonation. Everyday Communication Addressing others and introduction of oneself; Affirmative, negative and skeptical responses; Talking about time, date, and weather; Expressing gratitude and apology. Basic survival Traveling by air, train and bus; Staying in a hotel, restaurant etc; Applying for a visa and at customs. Social Life Starting, changing and closing a conversation; Making telephone calls and appointments; Expressing congratulations and good wishes; Meeting and seeing people off. 84

93 Teaching/Learning Approach This foundation course, designed for students with no previous knowledge of the language, focuses on the development of the students linguistic skills through practical use of the language. Both oral and written forms are given equal emphasis. Heavy interaction between the lecturer and the students is expected. Assessment Approach Assessment such as individual and group assignments, presentation, tests and examination will be used to assess the application of the learnt knowledge. Written assignments and presentations are, respectively, for training written and oral communication skills. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Beacco di Giura, M., Kaneman-Pougatch, M., Jennepin, D. and Trevisi, S. Café Crème 1: Méthode de français, Livre de l élève and Cahier d exercices. Paris: Hachette, References Charliac, L. and Motron, A.C. Phonétique progressive du français (and 2 cassettes). Clé International, Grégoire, M. Grammaire progressive du français (Niveau débutant) and Corrigés. Clé International, Kendris, C. French Vocabulary. Barron s, Oudot, S. French Verbs and Essentials of Grammar. Passport Books, The Collins-Robert French/English English/French Dictionary. Collins-Robert, Une journée de Français (Niveau débutant) (video). Clé International, Audio-visual materials L espace des Français (Niveau débutant) (video). Clé International, (Materials developed by the French section, ENGL) 85

94 CC2011 Japanese I Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction Japanese (supplemented by English and/or Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisite Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Preferred Background Knowledge An ability to understand and write Chinese characters Aims This course aims to introduce students to the basics of Japanese pronunciation, writing systems, sentence structure and grammar, while stimulating their interests in both the Japanese language and its culture. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: know how to pronounce the Japanese sounds correctly. recognize and know how to read and write Japanese characters (Hiragana, Katakana, Kanji and Rōmaji). develop a vocabulary repertoire of about 650 words (including Kanji, commonly used expressions and phrases). acquire a basic knowledge of the characteristics and grammar of Japanese language. understand and engage in simple conversations on everyday matters. create a preliminary interest in Japanese culture. Indicative Contents Phonetic Systems All vowels and consonants, syllables, pitch accent, intonation Writing Systems Various writing systems (Rōmaji, Hiragana, Katakana, Kanji) Vocabulary / Reading /Writing Simple vocabulary (e.g. daily greetings, simple counting, numbers, currency, times and dates); read simple dialogues and short passages; write simple sentences Grammar Simple verbs (present/past tense; affirmative/negative form), basic particles 86

95 Speaking / Listening Simple daily conversation (e.g. introduce oneself and others, give a gift to someone, and simple requests) Culture / Society Selected topics on Japanese culture and society Teaching/Learning Approach This foundation course, designed for students with no previous knowledge of the language, focuses on enabling students to master the Japanese sounds and writing systems. Through direct drills, practices and activities in classes, students will participate actively in the learning process. A multimedia approach will be adopted whereby students will be exposed to audio and visual materials to enhance their understanding of the Japanese language and culture. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including written assignments, oral presentations, case studies, tests and examination designed to develop and assess students communication skills in the Japanese language. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I ( みんなの 日 本 語 ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局, 2002 年 (First half of the textbook will be used.) 向 日 葵 出 版 社 編 日 語 假 名 習 字 簿 香 港 : 向 日 葵 出 版 社,2004 年 References 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 ( 讀 本 篇 ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,2004 年 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I, II ( 句 型 練 習 冊 ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,2003 年 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I, II ( 練 習 C 会 話 イラストシート ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,2002 年 向 日 葵 出 版 社 編 日 本 語 90 日 1 (90 Days of Japanese Language 1) 香 港 : 向 日 葵 出 版 社, 2002 年 大 新 出 版 社 編 輯 部 新 日 本 語 の 基 礎 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,1998 年 87

96 CC2012 初 級 普 通 話 Elementary Putonghua 程 度 2 學 分 3 學 科 性 質 非 科 學 教 學 語 言 普 通 話 學 習 模 式 28 小 時 課 堂 講 授 14 小 時 導 修 課 修 讀 的 必 備 條 件 無 評 估 方 法 60% 課 堂 習 作 40% 期 終 考 試 科 目 目 標 本 課 程 旨 在 教 授 學 生 漢 語 拼 音 體 系 的 基 礎 知 識, 鞏 固 其 對 普 通 話 語 音 的 認 識, 在 此 基 礎 上 增 進 學 生 對 普 通 話 和 粵 語 詞 彙 語 法 之 區 別 的 比 較 認 識, 從 而 使 他 們 可 恰 當 準 確 流 利 地 在 日 常 生 活 中 運 用 普 通 話 進 行 交 流 學 習 成 果 在 完 成 此 科 目 後, 學 生 有 足 夠 能 力 : 1) 掌 握 漢 語 拼 音 的 基 礎 知 識 如 認 讀 聲 母 韻 母 聲 調 等, 同 時 加 強 其 對 普 通 話 語 音 特 點 如 輕 聲 兒 化 變 調 的 認 識, 使 其 可 恰 當 準 確 有 效 地 運 用 普 通 話 2) 看 拼 音 讀 寫 漢 語 辭 彙 和 句 子 3) 瞭 解 及 分 辨 普 通 話 和 粵 語 在 語 音 詞 彙 和 語 法 上 的 基 本 差 別, 並 有 能 力 把 日 常 粵 語 常 用 辭 彙 和 句 子 翻 譯 成 普 通 話 書 面 語 和 口 語 4) 掌 握 用 普 通 話 表 達 和 基 本 溝 通 技 巧 通 過 小 組 合 作 和 互 相 觀 摩 來 培 養 自 我 學 習 的 能 力 和 團 隊 合 作 的 精 神, 同 時 增 強 個 人 自 信 心 指 示 性 教 學 內 容 漢 語 拼 音 介 紹 漢 語 拼 音 聲 母 韻 母 聲 調 輕 聲 兒 化 變 調 漢 語 拼 音 拼 寫 基 本 規 則 普 通 話 聆 聽 及 辨 音 訓 練 日 常 用 語 和 對 話 普 通 話 說 話 會 話 及 朗 讀 訓 練 普 粵 詞 彙 比 較 和 對 譯 普 通 話 量 詞 搭 配 88

97 教 學 方 法 主 講 課 主 要 由 教 師 為 學 生 講 解 課 文 中 的 語 音 辭 彙 和 語 法 現 象, 學 生 依 次 進 行 朗 讀 及 做 書 面 練 習, 每 堂 課 並 使 用 有 聲 光 碟 作 領 讀 及 聆 聽 訓 練 導 修 課 由 教 師 準 備 課 外 練 習, 包 括 書 面 練 習 和 口 語 訓 練, 學 生 可 分 小 組 或 個 人 進 行 ; 口 語 訓 練 的 模 式 可 為 角 色 扮 演 專 題 討 論 及 小 組 報 告 等 評 估 方 法 以 連 續 評 估 和 期 末 考 試 兩 種 方 式 進 行, 二 者 均 有 筆 試 與 口 試 兩 種 形 式 其 中 連 續 評 估 包 括 個 人 短 講, 期 中 測 驗 和 會 話 評 估 連 續 評 估 方 式 包 括 : (i) 個 人 口 語 評 估 : 將 以 個 人 短 講 的 方 式 進 行 評 估 (ii) 期 中 測 驗 : 內 容 包 括 漢 語 拼 音 辨 音 ; 看 漢 語 拼 音 拼 寫 漢 語 詞 語 及 句 子 ; 粵 語 方 言 詞 語 及 短 句 與 普 通 話 的 對 譯 ; 普 通 話 破 音 字 ; 聽 力 測 (iii) 會 話 評 估 : 學 員 將 分 為 三 至 四 人 一 組, 自 選 題 目, 編 寫 並 表 演 一 段 情 景 會 話 期 末 考 試 評 估 方 式 包 括 : 口 試 和 筆 試 教 科 書 及 參 考 書 目 指 定 教 科 書 : 普 通 話 研 習 社 編 : 普 通 話 課 本 ( 第 一 冊 ) 香 港 : 普 通 話 研 習 社,2001 年 參 考 書 目 : 1) 中 國 社 會 科 學 院 語 言 研 究 所 詞 典 編 輯 室 編 : 現 代 漢 語 詞 典 香 港 : 商 務 印 書 館,2001 年 2) 曾 子 凡 編 著 : 廣 州 話 普 通 話 口 語 詞 對 譯 手 冊 香 港 : 三 聯 書 店,2002 年 3) 李 明 石 佩 文 編 著 : 漢 語 普 通 話 語 音 辨 正 北 京 : 北 京 語 言 文 化 大 學 出 版 社,1998 年 4) 王 國 安 主 編, 張 少 雲 彭 增 安 著 : 普 通 話 發 音 基 本 功 香 港 : 商 務 印 書 館,1999 年 附 加 資 料 ( 學 習 普 通 話 網 上 資 源 ): 1) 理 工 大 學 中 國 語 文 中 心 ( 網 上 語 文 學 習 資 源 庫 -- 普 通 話 音 節 表 語 音 和 聆 聽 練 習 ) 2) 香 港 教 育 城 漢 語 拼 音 自 學 網 頁 ( 普 通 話 聲 韻 表 漢 語 拼 音 板 和 拼 讀 練 習 等 ) 3) 香 港 電 台 普 通 話 台 ( 收 聽 普 通 話 節 目 ) 89

98 CC2014 Aesthetics and Art Appreciation Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours Lecture 14 hours Seminar Prerequisite Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims The subject aims at giving students a brief historical survey on aesthetics of both the West and the East. This includes the introduction to the basic concept and definition of aesthetics and art appreciation, analysis and critique of various artworks/ performances. Students should be able to apply relevant concepts and principles to artworks/ performances appreciation and understand the relationship between aesthetics, art and culture. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the basic concept and definition of aesthetics and art appreciation. appreciate, analyse and criticise artworks/ performances. apply relevant concepts and principles to artworks/ performances appreciation through the watching the artwork and performances. recognise the relationship between aesthetics, art and culture. Indicative Contents The Concept and Definition of Aesthetics What is aesthetics? Introduction to Western aesthetics and Chinese aesthetics The Concept and Definition of Art Appreciation What is art? Introduction to art appreciation Appreciating Paintings Appreciate, analyse and criticise western/ Chinese paintings Apply relevant concepts and principles to western/ Chinese paintings appreciation Understand the relationship between aesthetics, paintings and western/ Chinese culture Appreciating Sculptures Appreciate, analyse and criticise western/ Chinese sculptures Apply relevant concepts and principles to western Chinese sculptures appreciation Understand the relationship between aesthetics, sculptures and western/ Chinese culture 90

99 Appreciating Theatre Appreciate, analyse and criticise western/ Chinese theatre Apply relevant concepts and principles to western Chinese theatre appreciation Understand the relationship between aesthetics, theatre and western/ Chinese culture Appreciating Dance Appreciate, analyse and critique various western/ Chinese dance Apply relevant concepts and principles to western Chinese dance appreciation Understand the relationship between aesthetics, dance and western/ Chinese culture Teaching/Learning Approach An active learning approach and peer learning approach will be adopted in the subject. Students will be required to actively participate in the learning process. And students will take part in a wide range of interesting and challenging activities. Audio visual materials will be used for learning purposes. Indicative Reading Aristotle (Translated by S. H. Butcher), Poetics, New York : Hill and Wang (1961). Eldridge, Richard, An Introduction to the Philosophy of Art, London: Cambridge University Press (2003). Hegel, Georg Wilhelm Friedrich (Translated by T. M. Knox), Aesthetics, Oxford: Clarendon Press (1975). Kant, Immanuel (Translated by J. H. Bernard), Critique of Judgement, New York: Hafner (1951). Williams, Robert, Art Theory- An Historical Introduction, London: Blackwell Publishing (2004). 朱 光 潛 : 西 方 美 學 史 北 京 : 人 民 文 學 出 版 社,2003 年 李 澤 厚 : 美 學 論 集 台 北 : 三 民 書 局,1996 年 周 憲 : 美 學 是 甚 麼 台 北 : 揚 智 文 化,2002 年 宗 白 華 : 宗 白 华 全 集 安 徽 : 安 徽 教 育 出 版 社,2000 年 楊 辛 甘 霖 : 美 學 原 理 北 京 : 北 京 大 學 出 版 社,2003 年 葉 朗 : 中 國 美 學 史 大 綱 上 海 : 上 海 人 民 出 版 社,2004 年 91

100 CC2016 Understanding Society Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours Lecture 14 hours Seminar Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject aims to develop students sociological understanding of human society. It equips them with a understanding of concepts and theories in sociology, and facilitates their analysis of social phenomena in contemporary society. Most important of all, it enables them to realize and appreciate the importance of cultural diversity in the changing human world. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: grasp the basic concepts and theories in sociology. apply sociological concepts and theories to analyzing social phenomena in both local and global contexts. demonstrate a humanistic attitude to understanding social issues in human societies. Indicative Contents Developing a Sociological Consciousness The sociological perspective; The history and development of sociology. Culture, Socialization and Social Relations Inter-cultural and intra-cultural variations; Agents of socialization; Gender socialization and inequality; Crime, sub-culture and deviance. Social Stratification and Capitalism Class structure and mobility; Class inequality and poverty; Interaction among class, gender and race; Education and social stratification; Professionalization. Power and Politics State and nationalism; Distribution of political power; State, economy and welfare. Social Change and Economic Development From agricultural to industrial and post-industrial societies; Theories of social change and economic development; Globalization and the information society. 92

101 Mass Media and Communication Media technologies and human communications; Mass media and social change; Mass media and social consent; Images, advertising and popular culture. Teaching/Learning Approach Theories and concepts are explicated during lectures, which emphasize active interaction between students and lecturers. Lectures are delivered with the aid of audio-visual materials to strengthen students sensitivity to current social issues. In seminars, students are divided into small groups to conduct presentations of assigned topics. They are expected to apply relevant sociological theories and concepts to examining social issues, during group discussion. Assessment Approach In addition to tests and examination that assess students understanding of sociological concepts and theories, presentations as well as written reports are used to examine students competence in conducting sociological analysis of current social issues. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks Henslin, James M., Essentials of Sociology: A Down-To-Earth Approach, Pearson/Allyn and Bacon (latest ed.). Tepperman, Lorne, and Blain, Jenny, Think Twice: Sociology Looks at Current Social Issues, Prentice Hall (latest ed.). References Abbott, Pamela, and Wallace, Claire, Introduction to Sociology: Feminist Perspectives, Routledge (latest ed.). Macionis, John J., and Plummer, Ken, Sociology: A Global Introduction, Prentice Hall (latest ed.). Newman, David M., and O Brien, Jodi, Sociology: Exploring the Architecture of Everyday Life, Pine Forge Press (latest ed.). 93

102 CC2019 Introduction to Psychology Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject develops students understanding of the psychology of human behaviour. The subject provides students with a unified theme of what constitute academic psychology, the different conceptual psychological frameworks available and the relevance of these theories to one s daily life. Through the understanding of human behaviour, it is hoped that students will become more able in communicating and handling social relationship, problem solving and critical thinking. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: distinguish the differences between popular psychology and academic psychology understand the fundamentals of psychological theories understand the use of scientific reasoning in the study of psychology explain phenomena in daily lives with the use of psychological concepts and theories see phenomena and issues as a result of complex interplay among individuals, groups and society Indicative Contents History and Development of Psychology as a Science Scope of psychology; History of psychology; Value and contributions of psychology to human life; Concept of scientific reasoning; Steps in conducting research in psychology. Biological Foundations of Psychology Neurons and action potential; Organization of Nervous System; Evolution, genes and behaviour. Consciousness, Emotion and Motivation States of consciousness: sleep and dreams; Consciousness, hypnosis and drugs, Components of emotions; Psychological and physiological aspects of emotions; Universality of emotions; Theories of motivation: homeostasis and drives. Sensation and Perception Sensory modalities and processes; Function of perception; Principles of perceptual organization; Perceptual constancy and development. 94

103 Learning Classical conditioning; Operant conditioning; Social and cognitive approaches to learning; Limitations and applications of each theories. Memory and Cognition Attention and selectivity; Memory and its processes; Categorizations of memory; Constructive memory and its implication; Application of theories to improve memory; Organization of longterm memory: schema; Abstraction; Problem-solving and reasoning. Intelligence and Psychological Measurement Intelligence: classical and contemporary theories; Measurement of intelligence: history and development; Basic concepts in psychological measurement. Perspectives of Human Development Physical Development; Cognitive development; Social and personality development; Emotional development; Moral development. Human Behaviours in Public Social perception; Concept of self; Attitudes and behaviour: cognitive dissonance and persuasion; Social influence; Obedience and compliance; Interpersonal attraction; Group influence. Key Issues of Mental Health, Stress and Coping Defining abnormality; Disorders and their types according to DSM classification; Source and effects of stress on psychological functioning and physical health; Coping and managing stress. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will be used to explain key concepts and theories with the aid of learning and teaching activities that have been prepared and provided on the Web in order to encourage students active participation during contact hours. Such activities include self-assessment, class exercises, small group discussion topics, role-play and case demonstration. Moreover, audio-visual materials will also be used to facilitate learning during lecture. Tutorials are conducted to help students make use of the psychological concepts learned in the lectures. Tutorials and/or web-based materials and references can be considered as both a supplement to lectures and a self-learning tool for integration and internalization of subject material. Assessment Approach Students will be assessed on all the materials presented in lectures, specified pages in the text book, plus video shows and demonstrations in tutorials. A variety of assessment methods will be used such as presentations, case studies, written reports, test and examination, which are designed to both develop and assess students critical thinking and communication skills on top of the subject matter in the subject. 95

104 Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Weiten, Wayne. Psychology: Themes & Variation. Wadsworth. (latest ed.). Supplementary Baron, R.A. Psychology. London: Allyn and Bacon. (latest ed.). Kalat, J.W. Introduction to Psychology. Pacific Grove: Brooks/Cole. (latest ed.). Stenberg, R. Introduction to Psychology. New York: McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). Weiten, W. Psychology: Themes and variations (with CD-ROM). Pacific Grove: Thomson Learning. (latest ed.). Yeung, K.C. Human Growth and Behaviour I: Vol. I. Hong Kong: Hong Kong Polytechnic University. (latest ed.). 高 尚 仁 : 心 理 學 新 論 香 港 : 商 務 印 書 館 ( 最 新 版 本 ) 葉 重 新 : 心 理 學 台 北 : 心 理 出 版 社 ( 最 新 版 本 ) 96

105 CC2026 Numerical Skills Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Exclusions CC2003 Quantitative Methods CC2030 Mathematics Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with fundamental understanding of elementary algebra and basic statistics and their applications. Studying the subject also helps develop students ability to formulate mathematical models and identify and apply appropriate numerical skills in real-life situations. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand a variety of numerical skills and use them to solve problems in real-life situations identify and apply appropriate techniques for the solution of common mathematical problems attain the mathematical knowledge needed in their future studies apply relevant mathematical knowledge to enhance their understanding of other subjects Indicative Contents Elementary Algebra Factorisation of expressions; Algebraic fractions; Polynomials; Graphs of algebraic functions; Simultaneous linear and quadratic equations; Linear and quadratic inequalities; Simple linear programming; Matrices and matrix operations. Basic Statistics Basic probability; Bernoulli, binomial, geometric, Poisson and normal distributions and their applications; Organisation and representation of numerical data; Common charts and curves; Measure of central tendency and dispersion; Applications of mean, mode, medium, quartile and standard deviation. 97

106 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures are used to introduce and explain mathematical concepts, techniques and their applications in a non-theoretical approach. Students have ample opportunities to apply, consolidate and reinforce the subject knowledge learned through related problem-solving exercises in tutorials. Assessment Approach Effective assessment tools are adopted, including end-of-chapter type problems, written assignments, tests and examinations, all designed to develop and assess the analytical and problemsolving skills of students. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Barnett, Bluman. Numerical Skills. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed). References Dugopolski, M. College Algebr. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed). Tan, S. Finite Mathematics for the Managerial, Life and Social Sciences. Brooks/Cole. (latest ed). Triola, M. Elementary Statistics. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed). 98

107 CC2028 Grammar in Context Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 42 hours of Seminar Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This practical course provides a platform for students to learn, consolidate, and improve their knowledge in English grammar in different contexts that involve extensive use of the English language, such as news reporting, business writing, oral communication, and literary writings. Through these contexts students will understand the underlying grammatical principles in the workings of English, with a major focus on formation and functions of various sentence patterns for different purposes of writing. With this knowledge, students can take a step forward into the identification and correction of grammatical error, evaluation and appreciation of deviations in sentence structures in different genres of text, and production of contextually appropriate and grammatically correct sentences. Students who wish to improve their grammar for better communication, understand and appreciate the intricate network of grammatical rules, or pursue further studies in language or linguistics will find this course useful. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: make use of the various grammatical concepts learnt to facilitate the communication process for various purposes. analyse, explain and correct grammatical inconsistencies, ambiguities and other stylistic aberrations to achieve communicative success in different contexts. identify the use of different sentence patterns from diverse settings (e.g. news, commercial advertisements, business correspondences, fictions, films, etc). produce grammatical and context-specific texts with reference to the nature and purpose of writing. Indicative Contents Grammar in Newspaper Major sentence, minor sentence, sentence part, word class, phrase, clause, variation in sentence structure Grammar in Business Subjunctive, imperative, you-attitude, sentence reduction for brevity, sentence expansion for clarity 99

108 Grammar of the Spoken Language Contraction, minor sentence, word stress, sentence stress, intonation Grammar and Literary Language Poetic license, stylistic aberrations, grammar of poetic language Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures are reserved for discussing and analyzing the inner workings of English grammar in different contexts. Tutorials are practice sessions to ensure students thorough comprehension of the rules of English grammar by applying them to the analysis and production of grammatical and context-specific sentences. Students are thus expected to be specially disciplined and committed to the course of study since the course entails a rather systematic and largely logical approach to the study of English grammar. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used. These include take-home assignments that help students to revise materials taught and discussed in the lectures and tutorials, a quiz and a final examination that evaluate the depth of internalization of the newly-learnt concepts through students demonstration of applying these concepts to their analysis and creation of texts for different contexts. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Carter, R., Hughes, R., McCarthy, M. Exploring grammar in context: grammar reference and practice (Upper-intermediate and Advanced). Cambridge University Press (latest ed.). References Crystal, D. Making Sense of Grammar, Pearson Education (latest ed.). Greenbaum, S. and Nelson, G. An Introduction to English Grammar, Longman (latest ed.). Hughes, R. Exploring Grammar in Writing, Cambridge University Press (latest ed). Koch, R. S. Focus on Grammar: An Advanced Course for Reference and Practice Workbook, Addison-Wesley (latest ed.). Murcia, M. C. and Freeman, D. L. The Grammar Book: An ESL/ EFL Teacher s Course, Heinle & Heinle-Thomson (latest ed.). Nettle, M. and Hopkins, D. Developing grammar in context: grammar reference and practice (intermediate). Cambridge University Press (latest ed.). Steer, J. M. The Advanced Grammar Book, Heinle & Heinle-Thomson (latest ed.) 100

109 CC2030 Mathematics Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Exclusions CC2003 Quantitative Methods & CC2026 Numerical Skills Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject introduces students to the fundamentals of algebra and calculus. It provides students with practices in applying mathematical concepts to solve scientific and engineering problems. Studying the subject will also help students to develop their analytical and logical thinking for their further study in other engineering subjects. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand fundamental mathematical concepts in algebra and calculus extend their knowledge of mathematical techniques and adapt known solutions to different situations apply the appropriate mathematical techniques to solve problems in science and engineering think analytically and logically Indicative Contents Basic Algebra Linear functions and quadratic functions; Binomial theorem; Simple inequalities; System of Linear equations in two and three variables; Elimination method; Matrix and matrix operations; Use of matrices to solve systems of linear equations. Complex Number Complex numbers; Geometrical representation; n-th root of complex number. Calculus Basic concepts of limits and derivatives; Gradient of tangent and rate of change; Second order derivatives; Maximum and minimum; Curve sketching; Optimization problems; Definite and indefinite integrals; Integration methods; Applications of integration (e.g. properties of area, volume and mass); Double integrals. 101

110 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of fundamental mathematical concepts in algebra and calculus and demonstrate how they can apply to solve scientific and engineering problems. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply appropriate mathematical techniques to solve problems in science and engineering. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools may be used, including assignments, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject expected learning outcomes. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Smith, Robert T. and Minton, Roland B. Calculus: Concepts and Connections. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). References Anton, Howard. Calculus. (7 th edition) Wiley. (2002). Anton, Howard. Contemporary Linear Algebra. John Wiley & Sons. (2003). Barnett, Raymond and Ziegle, Michael. College Algebra. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). Bostock, L. Core Maths for Advanced Level ( 3 rd edition) Stanley Thornes. (2000). Thomas, G.B., Finney, R.L., Hass, J.R. and Giordano, F.R. Thomas Calculus. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). 102

111 CC2031 Japanese II Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction Japanese (supplemented by English and/or Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisite CC2011 (Japanese I), or a minimum of 42 hours training on Japanese and/or equivalent proficiency of Japanese, which must be supported by an official document Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Preferred Background Knowledge An ability to understand and write Chinese characters Aims This foundation course is basically a continuation of CC2011 Japanese I. It aims to further develop students competence in correct pronunciation, writing, vocabulary and grammar through more reading, writing, speaking and listening practices of Japanese language. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognize and pronounce more new sounds. strengthen their Katakana usage. develop a vocabulary repertoire of about 1,300 words (including Kanji, commonly used expressions and phrases). acquire a fundamental knowledge of Japanese grammar and sentence patterns. speak simple Japanese phrases and sentences to initiate and respond in situational conversations at the elementary level. read and understand short passages. cultivate a preliminary understanding of Japanese culture. Indicative Contents Phonetic and Writing Systems More new sounds and their corresponding Katakana practices Vocabulary / Reading /Writing Essential daily vocabulary (e.g. location and position, different counters and counting methods); read short dialogues and passages; write basic sentences in correct word order Grammar More verbs (e.g. transitive, give, receive), state verbs (e.g. understand, like); present/past tense form, affirmative/negative form and verb conjugations; expressions of existence; adjectives and conjugations; comparative and superlative structure; more particles 103

112 Speaking / Listening Substitution, transformation and expansion drills; situational conversations (e.g. pay a visit to someone, invitation and decline, shopping, sightseeing, ordering); simple listening comprehension practice Culture / Society Selected topics on Japanese culture and society Teaching/Learning Approach Through direct drills, practices and activities in classes, students will participate actively in the learning process. A multimedia approach will be adopted whereby students will be exposed to audio and visual materials to enhance their understanding of the Japanese language and culture. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including written assignments, oral presentations, case studies, tests and examination designed to develop and assess students communication skills in the Japanese language. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I ( みんなの 日 本 語 ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局, 2002 年 (Second half of the textbook will be used.) 向 日 葵 出 版 社 編 日 語 假 名 習 字 簿 香 港 : 向 日 葵 出 版 社,2004 年 References 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 ( 讀 本 篇 ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,2004 年 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I, II ( 句 型 練 習 冊 ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,2003 年 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I, II ( 練 習 C 会 話 イラストシート ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,2002 年 向 日 葵 出 版 社 編 日 本 語 90 日 1 (90 Days of Japanese Language 1) 香 港 : 向 日 葵 出 版 社, 2002 年 大 新 出 版 社 新 日 本 語 の 基 礎 大 新 出 版 社,1998 年 104

113 CC2033 哲 學 概 論 Introduction to Philosophy Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours Lecture 14 hours Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject helps provide a solid foundation of knowledge of the Eastern and Western philosophies and further equips students with a basic understanding of the scope and the meaning of the discipline of philosophy. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the scope and meaning of philosophy; grasp the basic characteristics of both western and Chinese philosophy, and also their main differences; understand the basic methods and problems in philosophy, and appreciate the works of philosophers; and apply the philosophical theories in analyzing the students own worldview and find out an acceptable philosophical outlook. Indicative Contents The Meaning of Philosophy The different branches of philosophy; Metaphysics; Epistemology; Ethics; the significance of philosophy; Kant s understanding of philosophy. The Existence of God Rational proves of the existence of God; the meaning of religion. Mind, Body and Self The relation of mind and body; the structure of consciousness; the existence of the human soul; personal identity and the problem of self. The Meaning of Life I: Plato The theory of Ideas; ideal life and ideal state; the existence of afterlife; the meaning of love. 105

114 The Meaning of Life II: Confucianism The theory of human nature; Confucius, Mencius, and Xunzi; virtues and the moral meaning of life; the relation between Tien( 天 ) and human beings. The Meaning of Life III: Taoism The pursuit of spiritual freedom; Laozi and Zhuangzi; Wuwei( 無 為 ) and the artistic meaning of life. The Meaning of Life IV: Buddhism The painfulness of life and the causes of this painfulness; the analysis of the eternal flux and the empty nature of the phenomena; the pursuit of quietude. The Philosophical Differences between East and West The philosophical differences between east and west, an elementary outline. Teaching/Learning Approach As philosophy is a subject encouraging people to reflect more openly and deeply, students will be encouraged not only to understand but to question their own original points of view, in order to philosophize for themselves. The lectures not just teach the books or philosophers viewpoints, but to endeavor to criticize them and help students set up their own thinking. Therefore, aside from the students ability of understanding the theories and of finding suitable reference materials, their critical thinking power and creativity are also what the course aims at. Discussions and debates will be conducted in tutorial lessons to sharpen the students philosophizing ability. Moreover, a number of films will be used as example in discussing their philosophical ideas. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, group projects, book reading reports, tests and examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks Jostein Gaarder, Sophie s World: a Novel about the History of Philosophy, Berkley Publishing Group (1996). T. Schick, Jr. and L Vaughn, Doing Philosophy: An Introduction through Thought Experiments, 2nd edition, McGraw Hill (2003). 牟 宗 三 : 中 國 哲 學 十 九 講 台 灣 : 學 生 書 局,1989 年 錢 穆 : 中 國 思 想 史 台 灣 : 學 生 書 局,1983 年 106

115 References Hosphers, John, An Introduction to Philosophical Analysis, Prentice Hall, 勞 思 光 : 哲 學 淺 說 新 編 香 港 : 中 文 大 學 出 版 社,1998 年 林 正 弘 主 編 : 想 一 想 哲 學 問 題 台 灣 : 三 民 書 局,2002 年 107

116 CC2034 香 港 歷 史 與 文 化 The History and Culture of Hong Kong Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of instruction English and Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours Lecture 14 hours Tutorial Prerequisite Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject aims at helping students understand and explore the characteristics of the culture and history of Hong Kong from historical perspectives and enable them to use such knowledge to solve current problems. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: open their mind of Hong Kong in the filed of economic system, judicial system, administrative style, heritage, the tourist industry, legislative system, cultural characteristic and the development of social life; understand the 19th and 21st century from different perspectives and take a broader view of the period in Hong Kong, the character of the cultural, economic and the political of Hong Kong; have a profound knowledge of the continuity and change in Hong Kong between the recent past and the present, thus looking at the future from different perspectives; trace the political, socio-economic and cultural change of Hong Kong and the modern world; apply relevant knowledge concepts and principles of the history of Hong Kong in daily life; identify and deal with the current problems which we have encountered; analyze the most recent current issues in Hong Kong through the use of the history and trace the historical roots of these current problems; and develop a lifelong interest in reading and studying about the cultural and history of Hong Kong that will continue after the completion course. Indicative Contents Introduction The geography condition, the climate, the economic value and cultural characteristic of Hong Kong. Hong Kong s salient past(old Hong Kong) The traditional village; the fishing and farming in Hong Kong. Beginning of the Colonial Hong Kong, Opium War; the 2 nd Opium War; the Taiping Uprising; the Boxer Uprising; the late Qing reform; the 1911 Revolution. 108

117 Emergence of a Hong Kong Problem, The May Fourth Movement; early warnings; war and negotiations. British or Chinese Hong Kong? The activity of rightists and leftists; the British government and the National Government of Nanjing; the attitude of the Communist Government to the situation of Hong Kong. Crown Colony for Ever, Preparations for negotiations; a new government in China; the Cultural Revolution and Hong Kong. Towards the Joint Declaration, Negotiations, a British initiative, Beijing reactions; beginning of negotiations; the breakthrough; agreement. Hong Kong in Transition, British policy to Hong Kong; democratic debates. The Tiananmen Factor, Turmoil in Beijing; identity crisis; rise of confrontation. End of Cooperation and the new era, now A new Governor; confrontation; failure of conciliation; the new government after Teaching/ Learning Approach During lectures and tutorials, interactive approach is adopted. Students are required to actively participate in discussion and presentation. Audio and visual materials are also used to enhance students understanding of the teaching content. Each tutorial, students will be divided into groups and required to present an assigned topic for discussion. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentation, case studies, written reports, tests and examination designed to assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Tsang Steve, A Modern History of Hong Kong: , New York: St Martin s Press (1999). References Chan Lau Kit Ching, China Britain, And Hong Kong: , Hong Kong: Chinese University Press (1990). Endacott G.B., Hong Kong Eclipse, Hong Kong: Oxford University Press (1978). Gillingham Paul, At the Peak: Hong Kong Between the Wars, Hong Kong: MacMillan (1983). 109

118 Ng P.Y.L. & H.D.R. Baker, Hong Kong Country: A Chinese Gazetteer of the Hong Kong Region, Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press (1983). Sayer, G.R., Hong Kong: Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press (1975). Smith Carl T. A Sense of History. Studies in the Social and Urban History of Hong Kong, Hong Kong: Hong Kong Educational Publishing Co. (1995). Welsh Frank, A History of Hong Kong, London: Harper Collins Publishers (1993). 余 繩 武 劉 存 寬 主 編 : 十 九 世 紀 的 香 港 香 港 : 麒 麟 出 版 社,1994 年 余 繩 武 劉 存 寬 主 編 : 二 十 世 紀 的 香 港 香 港 : 麒 麟 出 版 社,1995 年 蔡 榮 芳 : 香 港 人 之 香 港 史 香 港 : 牛 津 大 學 出 版 社,2001 年 110

119 CC2101 Financial Accounting Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject introduces the basic concepts of financial accounting. It enables students to apply fundamental financial theories, analyse financial statements and reports, and prepare basic financial statements. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the assumptions, principles and conventions underlying financial accounting process appreciate the role and importance of accounting information in assisting decision-making in a business context undertake the work involved in the recording, processing, summarizing and reporting phases of the accounting cycle apply relevant accounting concepts and principles in the preparation of financial statements apply fundamental analytical tools for the interpretation of financial statements Indicative Contents Role and Principles of Financial Accounting and Reporting Nature, principles and scope of financial accounting, management accounting, financial management and auditing; Users of financial accounts and statements; Accounting Standards; Application of information technology in processing financial and related information. Financial Accounting Framework Double-entry bookkeeping and accounting systems; Methods of classifying expenditure between capital and revenue; Accounting treatment of fixed assets, current assets, liabilities, provisions and reserves, and capital; Control accounts, bank reconciliation, suspense accounts, and correction of errors; Preparation of journal, ledger accounts, trial balance and basic financial statements. Additional Issues on Earnings Extraordinary items, accounting changes, earnings per share, cash and stock dividends. 111

120 Preparation of Financial Statements Preparation of Financial Statements for sole-traders, clubs or societies, partnerships, and limited companies. Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements Need for analysis and interpretation of financial statements; Interpretation techniques including ratio analysis and cash flow statement; Calculation and interpretation of basic financial ratios. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts and applications of the accounting principles. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including individual assignments, in-class exercises, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students analytical and quantitative skills in solving accounting problems. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Libby, Libby and Short. Financial Accounting. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). References Horngren C.T., W.T. Harrison and L.S. Bamber. Accounting. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Meigs, Williams, Haka and Bettner. Financial Accounting. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Warren C.S., J.M. Reeve and P.E. Fess. Financial Accounting., South-Western. (latest ed.). Weygandt, J.J., D.E. Kieso and P.D. Kimmel,. Financial Accounting. Wiley. (latest ed.). Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards. HKICPA. 112

121 CC2102 Theory and Practice of Management Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject introduces the key concepts and theories concerning the functions of management in a fast changing environment. It provides a foundation for the more in-depth treatment in the management and business subjects. Studying this subject will also help develop students critical thinking for their life-long learning. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the nature of managerial work. explain the key concepts and theories in managing organisations. identify and evaluate the functions of management. appreciate the importance of different management functions in managing organisations Indicative Contents Management and Management Theory Nature of management, level of managers and the role of managers in an organisation; Evolution of management theories and their implications for management of organisations in Hong Kong. Business Environment Factors affecting the performance of an organisation in a fast changing environment; General and specific environmental factors; Implications of globalisation to Hong Kong business; Social responsibility and managerial ethics of business. Planning Principles of planning; Role and method of strategic planning in organisations; Decision making in business and industrial organisations. Organising in Enterprise Key elements of organisational structure and design; Identification of various forms of organisational structure and their advantages and disadvantages. 113

122 Leading Function of Managers Basic theories in motivation; Application of motivation theories in organisations; Leadership styles and its implication to management. Control Function in Organisation Importance of control in organisations; Types of control and their application to organisation; Importance of performance assessments. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts and theories of the syllabus topics. Occasional discussions will be conducted. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts and theories taught in lectures and to apply them to the analysis of real-life business issues. The activities in tutorials normally include student presentations, discussions of problems sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Robbins, S. P., Coulter, M., Management, Prentice-Hall International Editions (latest ed.). References Bateman, T. S., Snell, S. A., Management - Competing in the new era, McGraw-Hill/Irwin (latest ed.). Jones, G. R., George J. M., Contemporary Management, McGraw-Hill/Irwin (latest ed.). Schermerhorn, J. R., Management, John Wiley & Sons (latest ed.). 114

123 CC2104 Introduction to Microeconomics Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject equips students with analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of economic issues from a micro perspective. It provides the conceptual framework to analyse microeconomic behaviour of economic agents, business decisions, and market efficiency. Studying the subject will also help develop students critical thinking for their life-long learning. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the issues involved in the allocation of scarce resources for individual economic agents and the economy as a whole. apply relevant economic knowledge to conduct economic analysis of the behaviour of firms and markets. identify market failure and discuss the effectiveness of government economic policy upon the tradeoff between efficiency and equity. use concepts of market force interaction to analyse and predict changes in markets. Indicative Contents Scope of Microeconomic Analysis Concept of scarcity, choice and opportunity cost; Nature of economics as a science for understanding human behaviour. Demand, Supply and the Price Mechanism The law of demand; Elasticity of demand; The law of supply; Production and cost; Price control; The functions of price and the market system. Production and costs Production function; Law of diminishing returns; Various measures of cost; Costs in the short run and long run; Economies and diseconomies of scale. Market Structure Perfect competition; Monopoly; Monopolistic competition; Oligopoly; Profit maximization under different market structure. 115

124 Efficiency of Markets Efficiency and social interest; Market failure and government; Taxation; Externalities and property rights; Public goods and common resources. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key economic concepts, with specific reference to current economic issues wherever appropriate. Occasional group discussions will be conducted. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life economic issues. The activities in tutorials include student presentations and discussions of problems sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Mankiw, N. Gregory, Principles of Microeconomics, Thomson South-Western (latest ed.). References Frank, Robert H, Microeconomics and Behaviour, Boston, Mass: McGraw-Hill (latest ed.). Miller, Roger LeRoy, Economics today the micro view, Addison Wesley (latest ed.). Parkin, Michael, Microeconomics, Addison Wesley (latest ed.). Pindyck, P.S. and Rubinfeld, D.L., Microeconomics, Prentice Hall (latest ed.). 116

125 CC2110 Food Service Operations Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject introduces students to different concepts and operations of food service organisations in different business settings. It explains the purpose and operation of each functional component in a food service organisation and how to make a food service business viable. Studying the subject will also help the students to acquire professional, business, human resources, management, social and intellectual skills and knowledge needed for food and beverage operations. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students should be able to: identify the major types of food service organisations and the needs of different market segments analyse and evaluate the operation of food service organisations based on the systems approach understand and apply the food service operational techniques and principles operate and manage the needs, procedures and organisation of resources such as staff, materials, facilities, equipment and costs in the management of a food and beverage operation Indicative Contents An Overview of Food Service Operations Types of food service organisations and their classifications; Food service systems; Catering cycle and its function in food service organisations. Food Service Markets Food and beverage consumers and the meal experience; Service standards; Service quality and customer satisfaction. Products and Service Menu knowledge; Alcoholic and non-alcoholic beverages; Different styles of restaurant service. Management of Food Service Operations Staffing issues in restaurants; Purchasing and receiving; Production and service; Marketing for food and beverages; Hygiene and safety; Revenue and cost control; Restaurant technology. 117

126 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures primarily focus on the delivery of food service operation knowledge. Occasional group discussions and in-class exercises will be produced. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to explore further concepts, theories, and principles, to make enquiries about lecture content and to apply the theories to real-life issues. The activities in tutorials normally include presentations, discussions of problem sets and case studies, and video shows. Site visits to different types of food service establishments together with talks given by speakers from the industry will provide students with opportunities to observe operational activities in reallife business settings. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Ninemeier, Jack D. and Hayes, David K. Restaurant Operations Management: Principles and Practices. Pearson Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). References Dahmer, Sondra J. Restaurant Service Basics. Wiley. (latest ed.). Mill, R.C. Restaurant Management: Customers, Operations, and Employees. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Rande, Wallace L. Introduction to Professional Foodservice. John Wiley. (latest ed.). Walker, John R. and Lundberg, Donald E. The Restaurant: From Concept to Operation. Wiley. (latest ed.). 118

127 CC2113 Chinese for Business Executives 商 務 行 政 中 文 程 度 2 學 分 3 修 讀 性 質 非 科 學 教 學 語 言 中 文 粵 語 講 授 ; 中 文 書 寫 教 學 模 式 42 小 時 課 堂 講 授 修 讀 條 件 無 評 估 方 法 50% 課 堂 習 作 50% 期 終 考 試 課 程 目 標 本 課 程 透 過 課 堂 講 授 課 堂 練 習 分 組 習 作, 教 員 的 批 改 及 指 正, 訓 練 學 員 運 用 中 文 傳 播 商 業 訊 息 的 能 力 課 程 尤 注 重 培 訓 學 員 口 語 表 達 及 專 業 商 務 行 政 中 文 寫 作 的 能 力, 全 面 地 訓 練 學 生 掌 握 專 業 商 務 中 文 的 各 種 技 巧 學 習 成 果 相 信 學 員 成 功 完 成 本 科 目, 可 以 培 養 以 下 的 學 習 能 力 : 明 白 商 務 行 政 中 文 的 定 義 瞭 解 商 務 行 政 中 文 的 體 例 及 格 式 設 計 各 行 業 商 務 中 文 的 文 體 運 用 中 文 商 務 實 用 文 的 知 識, 成 功 撰 寫 適 合 各 行 業 的 中 文 實 用 文 的 文 類 擴 闊 現 有 中 文 商 務 實 用 文 的 應 用 範 圍 掌 握 及 運 用 商 務 中 文 的 口 語 知 識 增 加 學 員 以 中 文 為 商 務 溝 通 及 撰 寫 商 務 中 文 文 書 的 能 力 課 程 內 容 中 文 商 務 實 用 文 的 定 義 介 紹 中 文 商 務 實 用 文 的 發 展 歷 史, 中 文 商 業 實 用 文 的 定 義, 中 文 商 業 實 用 文 的 應 用 範 圍, 中 港 臺 三 地 中 文 商 業 實 用 文 體 例 及 用 語 的 異 同, 中 文 商 務 實 用 文 寫 作 及 文 書 處 理 中 文 商 務 實 用 文 的 特 色, 中 文 商 務 實 用 文 的 種 類 及 應 用 價 值, 中 文 商 務 實 用 文 的 主 要 教 學 內 容 : 信 函, 電 子 郵 件, 傳 真, 廣 告, 直 銷 書, 新 聞 稿 / 商 業 新 聞 稿, 計 劃 書 建 立 商 務 關 係 的 寫 作 中 文 商 務 實 用 文 與 商 業 交 涉 的 關 係 : 交 易 類, 資 訊 類, 關 係 類, 交 涉 類 等 商 務 行 政 文 書 介 紹 及 寫 作 商 務 會 議 及 策 略 會 議 紀 錄, 紀 要, 會 議 及 談 判 的 策 略 及 撰 寫 方 法 契 約 及 法 律 檔 介 紹 中 國 國 內 法 律 檔 的 撰 寫 要 點 及 注 意 的 事 項, 中 國 與 台 灣 中 文 法 律 檔 撰 寫 的 異 同, 土 地 屋 契, 勞 工 法 律 檔 的 要 例 119

128 廣 告 介 紹 中 港 臺 三 地 撰 寫 廣 告 文 稿 的 異 同, 撰 寫 口 語 廣 告 的 要 點, 廣 告 文 書 的 特 色 直 銷 書 及 信 介 紹 撰 寫 推 銷 產 品 的 中 文 文 稿 特 色, 直 銷 信 的 體 例 及 內 容, 直 銷 計 劃 書 的 撰 寫 方 法 計 劃 書 介 紹 撰 寫 中 文 計 劃 書 的 技 巧 及 注 意 的 事 項, 中 文 計 劃 書 的 體 例 及 內 容 演 講 辭 及 溝 通 技 巧 設 定 計 劃, 解 釋 決 定, 闡 述 立 場, 演 講 及 辯 論, 談 判 技 巧, 演 講 技 巧, 演 講 辭 教 學 方 法 本 課 程 是 理 論 與 實 際 並 重, 透 過 大 量 個 案 分 析 ( 佳 作 及 病 例 ) 深 化 課 堂 所 教 知 識, 並 鼓 勵 學 員 參 與 相 互 討 論 及 導 修 報 告 進 一 步 活 用 中 文 強 化 自 信 學 員 完 成 課 程 後, 可 以 掌 握 商 務 中 文 文 書 的 處 理 方 法, 撰 寫 商 務 文 書 的 格 式 及 各 種 文 書 類 別 的 體 例, 增 加 學 員 運 用 中 文 進 行 商 務 溝 通 及 交 往 的 能 力 評 估 方 法 本 課 程 採 用 持 續 評 估 方 法, 分 別 從 學 生 撰 寫 的 報 告, 如 計 劃 書 新 聞 稿 演 講 辭 及 口 語 報 告, 如 : 商 務 面 談 及 求 職 面 試, 並 加 上 測 驗 及 考 試 等 評 鑑 模 式, 準 確 衡 量 學 生 所 學 指 定 課 本 蔡 富 春 主 編 : 中 國 商 務 應 用 文 書 手 冊 香 港 : 經 濟 日 報 出 版 社 ( 香 港 ) 出 版,2002 年 參 考 書 目 Hilderandt, H.W. Effective Business Communication for Asian Managers. McGraw-Hill(1996). Liang, J. Business and Correspondence Chinese: An introduction. Foris(1999). 黃 錫 淩 : 粵 音 韻 彙 香 港 : 中 華 書 局,1989 年 董 兆 傑 : 口 語 訓 練 香 港 : 語 文 出 版 社,1992 年 張 斌 : 漢 語 語 法 修 辭 常 識 香 港 : 香 港 教 育 圖 書 公 司,1993 年 陳 建 民 : 說 話 的 藝 術 香 港 : 語 文 出 版 社,1994 年 陳 永 生 等 編 著 : 國 際 商 務 函 電 與 合 同 香 港 : 華 語 教 學 出 版 社,1999 年 120

129 李 錦 昌 編 著 : 現 代 商 業 傳 意 大 全 香 港 : 商 務 印 書 館 ( 香 港 ) 有 限 公 司,2000 年 黎 運 漢, 李 軍 著 : 商 業 語 言 台 灣 : 台 灣 商 務 印 書 館 股 份 有 限 公 司,2001 年 白 雲 開 : 21 世 紀 商 用 中 文 書 信 寫 作 手 冊 香 港 : 香 港 城 市 大 學 出 版 社,2001 年 盧 丹 懷 等 : 中 港 應 用 文 傳 意 大 全 香 港 : 商 務 印 書 館 ( 香 港 ) 有 限 公 司,2003 年 121

130 CC2126 Introduction to Marketing Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject introduces the basic principles and concepts of Marketing. It equips students with foundation knowledge and skills of marketing to analyse market situations. It exposes students to various areas of marketing. The subject will also help develop students oral and written communication skills and critical thinking. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the role of marketing in today s competitive and dynamic environment. establish the relationship between marketing planning and corporate planning. recognise the importance of various areas in marketing such as consumer behaviour, market research, global marketing and ethical issues. analyse the marketing environment, and identify marketing opportunities, threats and other factors or issues affecting marketing decisions. apply relevant marketing concepts, knowledge and theories to practical marketing situations. Indicative Contents Role of marketing in an organisation Role of marketing in the modern organisation; Evolution of marketing; Products and services marketing; Relationship between marketing planning and corporate planning. Marketing Environment Macro-environment and Micro-environment Economic, social, legal, competition, cultural and demographic factors; Relationship with suppliers, intermediaries, customers and others factors such as resources. Segmentation and Positioning Importance of segmentation and positioning; Different segmentation bases and types of positioning strategies. Consumer Behaviour and Organisational Buying Basic knowledge of consumer behaviour such as different needs and motivations, perceptions and learning theories; Organisational buying process. 122

131 Market Research Introduction to basic marketing research methodologies and applications. Marketing Mix Foundation concepts of Marketing Mix: Product, Price, Place and Promotion. International Marketing Issues and impact of IT Concepts, examples and issues related to international marketing; Applications of IT such as online marketing. Ethical issues Marketing impact on individuals and society; Social responsibility and marketing ethics. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key marketing concepts, with reference to current marketing issues or examples wherever appropriate. Tutorial sessions provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life marketing situations. The activities in tutorials normally include group work, student presentations and discussions of problems sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group presentations and written reports, individual assignments, in-class exercises, tests and examination designed to assess the expected outcomes. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Kerin, R. A, Hartley S.W., and Rudelius W., Marketing: The Core, McGraw Hill/Irwin, (latest ed.). Kotler Armstrong, Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). References Etzel M.J., Walker B.J. and Stanton W.J., Marketing, McGraw Hill/Irwin, (latest ed.). Lamb Hair McDaniel, Marketing, Thomson, South-Western, (latest ed.) William D. Perreault & E. Jerome McCarthy, Essentials of Marketing, McGraw Hill Irwin (latest ed.). 123

132 CC2201 Principles of Programming Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial / Laboratory Prerequisites Nil Exclusion CC2127 Principles of Business Programming Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with the practical skills of computer programming in the context of problem solving. It provides students with an understanding of the structure of a highlevel programming language, and of the design and analysis process of programming. It also provides students with some practical experience of writing structured programs. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: write programs for solving practical problems in the business environment recognise the importance of documentation in software development further develop their analytical skills and problem solving skills in other areas enhance critical and creative thinking competence Indicative Contents Fundamentals of Programming Syntax; Semantics; Compilation; Linking; Execution. Programming Approaches Functional programming; Procedural programming; Structural programming; Object-oriented programming. Data Types String; Numerical data; Boolean; Operators; Literals. Input and Output Standard input/output; Files. Concepts and Technique of Control Sequencing; Alternation; Repetition; Recursion. Practical Programming Programming in a selected high-level language e.g. C, C++ or Java. 124

133 Teaching/Learning Approach Theories and basic concepts will be delivered during the lectures. In the tutorials and laboratory classes, students will be required to design and develop software solutions to practical problems by applying the general principles learned in the lectures. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including programming projects, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess skills of writing programs to solve practical problems and of writing documentation. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Wu, T. C. An Introduction to Object-Oriented Programming with Java. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Adams, J. and Nyhoff, L. C++: An Introduction to Computing. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Kelley, A. and Pohl, I. C by Dissection: The Essentials of C Programming. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). References Barnes, D. and Kolling, M. Objects first with Java: a practical introduction using BlueJ. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Charatan, Q. and Kans, A. Java: the First Semester. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Deitel, H.M. and Deitel, P.J. Java: How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Deitel, H.M. and Deitel, P.J. C++: How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Friedman, F. L. and Koffman, E. B. Problem Sovling, Abstraction, and Design using C++. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). Savitch, W. Problem Solving with C++. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). Deitel, H.M. and Deitel, P.J. C: How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Hanly, J. R. and Koffman, E. B. Problem Solving and Program Design in C. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). 125

134 CC2202 Computer System Architectures Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Exclusion CC3302 Computer Systems Principles Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with the conceptual framework and essential knowledge in computer system architectures and logic design for them to understand and analyze the functions and organizations of modern digital computers. The subject also develops students with learning experience in designing and developing solutions and applications for modern digital computer systems. In addition, studying this subject will help develop students critical and creative thinking in the design and development of the hardware-software interface. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: demonstrate understanding of the basic principles of organizations and operations of digital computers conduct analysis of the functions and organizations of modern digital computers so as to propose appropriate technical solutions and applications related to the problems of computer architectures evaluate the technical issues of digital computer systems including arithmetic logic unit, control unit, communication with peripheral devices and interrupt handling design and develop solutions related to digital computer systems recognize and identify the developmental nature of modern technology related to digital computers show enhanced analytical and problem-solving skills Indicative Contents Computer System Components Interconnection structures and bus interconnections; Memory system overview; Semiconductor and cache memory; External devices; Input/Output (I/O) modules; Programmed and interrupt I/O; Direct memory access (DMA) and I/O channels. Central Processing Unit Boolean algebra and gate networks; Arithmetic and logic unit (ALU). 126

135 Data Representation and Arithmetic Integer representation and arithmetic; Floating-point and floating-point arithmetic. Machine Instructions Machine instruction characteristics and types; Assembly language; Memory addressing modes; Register organization; Instruction format; Instruction cycle and instruction pipelining; Reduced instruction set computer (RISC) architecture. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts in computer system architectures, with specific reference to current development in computer system architectures wherever appropriate. Students are expected to obtain sufficient professionally-specific concepts, skills and knowledge on computer system architectures in lectures. Occasional group discussions might be arranged to enhance students inter-personal and communication skills. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of computer system architecture issues. The activities in tutorials normally include discussions of problem sets and solutions. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students understanding of principles of computer system architectures, evaluate students critical and analytical ability as well as problem-solving skills in the design of computer system components. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Stallings, W. Computer Organization and Architecture: Designing for Performance. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). References Carpinelli, J. D. Computer Systems Organization and Architecture. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.). Hamacher, Vranesic, and Zaky. Computer Organization. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). Williams, R. Computer Systems Architecture: A Networking Approach. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.). 127

136 CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites CC2201 Principles of Programming Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with concepts and knowledge in data structures and algorithms for them to understand and analyze the space/time efficiency of an algorithm, to provide technical solutions for algorithm design problems, to evaluate the appropriate data structures for programming problems, and to appreciate the complexity and computability of algorithms. The subject also develops students learning experience in designing and developing solutions and applications for algorithm design problems. In addition, studying this subject will help develop students critical and creative thinking through the design, development and application of data structures and design of algorithms. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: evaluate the technical issues of searching algorithms for the design and development of searching techniques in a computer program conduct analysis of sorting algorithms so as to implement sorting techniques in the design of algorithms investigate a variety of data structures in order to effectively apply them in the design of algorithms carry out performance analysis of algorithms using the space and time complexity think critically and creatively in the design of algorithms and effectively apply programming techniques in computer program development recognize the potential problems of the algorithms Indicative Contents Algorithm and Analysis Correctness and efficiency of algorithms; Computational complexity - time and space bounds; Best-case, average-case and worst-case analysis. Data Structures Linked list; Stack; Queue; Binary tree; Balanced tree; Tree traversal; Set priority queue. 128

137 Sorting Algorithms Bubble Sort; Insertion Sort; Selection Sort; Quicksort; Mergesort; Heapsort. Searching Algorithms Sequential Search; Binary Search; Tree Search; Hashing. Algorithm Design Methods Divide-and-Conquer; Greedy Methods; Heuristics. Intractability P, NP, and NP-Complete Problems. Teaching/Learning Approach During lectures, fundamental theories and basic concepts of data structures and algorithms will be introduced in order to strengthen students competence in evaluation, analysis, investigation, design, development and application of data structures and algorithms. Related problems may also be given to students so as to enhance their understanding and analytical skills. In the tutorials, students are required to apply the general principles learned in lectures to tackle practical problems and present the solutions. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, tests and an examination. They are designed to assess students understanding of concepts of data structures and algorithms, critical and creative thinking, problem-solving and analytical skills. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks Levitin, A. V. Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). Sahni, S. Data Structures, Algorithms, and Applications in Java. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). References Baase, S. and Van Gelder, A. Computer Algorithms: Introduction to Design and Analysis. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). Cormen, T. H. Introduction to Algorithms. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Drozdek, A. Data Structures and Algorithms in Java. Course Technology. (latest ed.). Sedgewick, R. Bundle of Algorithms in Java, Parts 1-5: Fundamentals, Data Structures, Sorting, Searching, and Graph Algorithms. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). 129

138 Shaffer, C. A. Practical Introduction to Data Structures and Algorithms, Java Edition. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). 130

139 CC2204 Discrete Mathematics Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject aims to equip students with fundamental ideas of discrete mathematics, such as formal mathematical reasoning techniques, basic counting techniques and their applications; and to help students to attain the mathematical knowledge and reasoning skills required in the field of computer science. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: grasp the basic concepts of discrete mathematics acquire enough mathematical knowledge and reasoning skills to apply various discrete mathematical techniques to solve problems in computer science applications think critically and creatively to provide solutions to the discrete mathematics related problems Indicative Contents Logic and Proofs Propositions; Conditional Propositions and Logical Equivalence; Quantifiers; Proofs; Resolutions Proofs; Mathematical Induction. Set, Relations and Functions Sets; Sequences and Strings; Number Systems; Relations; Equivalence Relations; Functions. Counting Methods Basic Principles; Permutations and Combinations; Algorithms for Generating Permutations and Combinations; Introduction to Discrete Probability; Discrete Probability Theory; Generalized Permutations and Combinations; Binomial Coefficients and Combinatorial Identities. Recurrence Relations Solving Recurrence Relations; Applications to the Analysis of Algorithms. 131

140 Graph Paths and Cycles; Hamiltonian Cycles and the Travelling Salesperson Problem; A Shortest-Path Algorithm; Representation of Graphs; Isomorphisms of Graphs; Planar Graphs; Instant Insanity. Trees Terminology and Characterizations of Trees; Spanning Trees; Minimal Spanning Trees; Binary Trees; Tree Traversals; Decision Trees and the Minimum Time for Sorting; Isomorphisms of Trees; Game Trees. Teaching/Learning Approach Concepts will be taught mainly through lectures and tutorials in order to develop students discrete mathematical techniques and reasoning skills. Exercises will be carried out in tutorials to illustrate and reinforce the concepts, techniques and skills in discrete mathematics. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be designed, including tutorial exercises, programming assignments, tests and an examination, to develop and assess critical and creative thinking as well as mathematical reasoning and problem solving skills. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Johnsonbaugh, R. Discrete Mathematics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). References Ross, K. A. and Wright, C. R. B. Discrete Mathematics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Simpson A. Discrete Mathematics by Example. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). 132

141 CC2302 Engineering Mathematics Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites CC2003 Quantitative Methods OR CC2030 Mathematics Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject provides students with the basic principles of mathematics used in various engineering disciplines. Studying the subject will help students to develop their analytical and problem solving skills and apply appropriate mathematical techniques to solve simple engineering problems. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the fundamentals and principles of engineering mathematics search for useful information in solving problems apply the appropriate mathematical methods to solve mathematical problems apply mathematical reasoning to model, analyse and solve problems in engineering develop problem solving abilities Indicative Contents Series Taylor s theorem of a single variable; Infinite series; Power series; Fourier series. Functions of Several Variables Partial differentiation; Maxima and minima; Lagrange multiplier; Taylor's theorem. Ordinary Differential Equations First and second order linear ordinary differential equations; Laplace transforms; Convolution theorem, Fourier transforms. Linear Algebra Matrices and determinants; Vector algebra and differential calculus; Vector spaces; Eigenvalues and eigenvectors; Normalization and orthogonality. 133

142 Teaching/Learning Approach The subject will be delivered by using mathematics as a tool to solve engineering problems. The exercises given to students in tutorials will be directly related to problems that engineers will be required to solve when they discharge their duties. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignment, case studies, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess their theoretical and analytical skills. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Chan, C.K., Chan, C.W. and Hung, K.F. Basic Engineering Mathematics. McGraw Hill. (2006). References Kreyszig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. J Wiley. (latest ed.). Jeffrey, A. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. Harcourt/Academic Press. (latest ed.). Veerarajan, T. Engineering Mathematics (2 nd edition) T McGraw-Hill. (2002). 134

143 CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 10 hours of Tutorial 4 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject introduces the fundamental concepts and techniques of electrical and electronic circuit analysis to students. It develops students skills in analyzing the basic direct-current and alternatingcurrent circuits and applying the circuits. In addition, it helps students to understand the principles and applications of amplifiers and simple logic circuits. Furthermore, it introduces the principles of electro-mechanics and their related applications. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe and explain the principles of electrical and electronic engineering apply the techniques to solve simple problems of electrical and electronic circuits design simple electrical amplifier and logic gate circuits with single function develop systematic problem solving abilities by applying electrical and electronic principles carry out independent investigation in an improvised environment Indicative Contents Fundamental Concepts and Direct Current Circuits Circuit components; Kirchhoffs laws; Loop and nodal analysis; Thevenin and Norton theorems; Resistance, capacitance and Inductance; Independent and dependent sources; Source transformation; Instantaneous power; Source loading and maximum power transfer. Alternating-Current Circuits Average and RMS values; Phasors and complex numbers; Steady-state analysis; Impedance; Admittance; Network theorems; Real and reactive power; Power factor. Time Domain in Analysis Transient analysis; RC, RL and RLC circuits; Initial and final conditions; Laplace transform; Time domain solution by Laplace transform; Impulse and step responses of first and second order systems. 135

144 Basic Diode Circuits I-V characteristics of ideal diodes; Practical diode circuits such as rectifier circuits, clipping and clamping circuits. Basic Amplifiers Circuits Ideal amplifier characteristics; Ideal operational amplifier; Op-amp applications; Inverting, noninverting, summing and difference circuits. Digital System Basics Binary number system and arithmetic; Conversion between binary and decimal numbers; Two complement; Boolean algebra; Basic logic gates; Flip-flops; Karnaugh maps; Don t care condition; Combinational logic circuit designs and modules. Basic Electromechanics Electric and magnetic fields; Faraday s law; Self and mutual inductance; Transformer; Basic AC generator; Three-phase voltage generation; Three-phase power; Introduction to electric motors. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of major electrical and electronic theorems and mathematics techniques used in solving simple circuit problems. In addition, the design methods of the electrical, amplifier and digital circuits are discussed in the lectures. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to practice their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures through the use of the electrical and electronic circuit problems in which the circuits are composed of resistors, capacitors, inductors, diodes, transistors, op-amps, logic gates and electrical motors. In addition, some commonly used software in electrical and electronic engineering is introduced in the tutorials. Laboratories reinforce students concepts and knowledge learnt in lectures through experiments. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, group projects, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess the students understanding on the principles and problem solving techniques in electrical and electronic engineering and the student s capabilities on circuit design. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Rizzoni G. Principles and Applications of Electrical Engineering. Mcgraw-Hill. (latest ed.). References Boylestad, R.L. and Nashelsky, L. Introduction to Electricity, Electronics, and Electromagnetics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). 136

145 Floyd, T.L. Electronics Fundamentals: Circuits, Devices and Applications. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Hughes, E. Electrical and Electronic Technology. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Kerns, D. V. and Irwin, J. D. Essentials of Electrical and Computer Engineering. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Roadstrum, W.H. and Wolaver, D.H. Electrical Engineering for All Engineers. Wiley. (latest ed.). 137

146 CC2307 Engineering Science Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 10 hours of Tutorial / Case Study 4 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject enables students to establish extensive knowledge of the atomic structure of matters and to appraise the various properties of pure substances, states, phase change and behaviour of ideal gas. In addition, it helps students to understand the forms of energy and their conversion and apply the law of conservations of mass and energy to various kinds of heat engine and heat pump problems. Furthermore, studying this subject can help students to identify the relationship between material properties and manufacturing processes in manufacturing systems with the considerations of the green design and environmental issues. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify and reflect critically on the basic atomic structures of matters, such as bonding structures, wave-particle duality and crystalline structures, in relation to the properties of materials recognise the basic properties of materials, such as mechanical, electrical and optical properties, and know how to apply these properties in modern engineering practices theoretically design a basic manufacturing system and recognise the basic inputs and outputs of the system and their importance when designing products for the consumer market appraise the engineering materials and the basic engineering processes used in manufacturing systems and select those that are with appropriate time, quality, cost considerations, green design and environmental issues acquire the fundamental knowledge and properties in thermodynamic such as the relations among temperature, pressure and density, the enthalpy and heat transfer cope with the simple thermodynamic problems, such as heat transfer, steady-flow system and heat engine, by applying laws of conversion and laws of thermodynamic apply background knowledge or newly obtained information to review and investigate possible outcomes 138

147 Indicative Contents Materials Science Atomic structure; Wave-particle duality; Bonding, crystal structures and energy levels; Optical properties of material; Conductors, insulators, semi-conductors and P/N junction; Stress-strain behavior, elastic properties of materials; Tensile properties; Compressive, shear, and torsional deformation. Thermodynamics Basic concepts and definitions of thermodynamics; State; Thermal properties; Temperature; Closed and open systems; Work and heat; Processes and cycles; Equation of state of perfect gas and gas constant; Phase (p-v-t) diagram of a pure substance; Phase changes and latent heat; Vapour and liquid; Table of properties of pure substances; The first law of thermodynamics; Energy and mass conservation in systems; Internal energy and enthalpy; Applications to closed or steady flow processes; Applications of the First Law of thermodynamics. Manufacturing Technology Manufacturing as a system; Product design activity; The product and the marketplace; Evolution of engineering materials; The role of materials in manufacturing; The relationship between manufacturing processes and material properties; Process capability; Cost consideration in materials selection; Procedures for selecting materials and processes; Green manufacturing and environmentally conscious design. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of major theorems, principles, laws and mathematical techniques. In addition, the modern engineering practices are discussed in the lectures. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to practice and discuss their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures through the use of the engineering questions and case studies. In addition, multimedia resources will be used to introduce the various engineering practices to students. Laboratory classes reinforce students concepts and knowledge learnt in lectures through experiments. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, group projects, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess the students knowledge and problem solving techniques in various engineering fields, such as atomic structures, material properties, manufacturing systems and thermodynamics. 139

148 Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks Callister, W. D. Material Science and Engineering An Introduction. Wiley. (latest ed.). Çengel, Y. A. and Turner, R. H. Fundamentals of Thermal-fluid Sciences. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.) Edwards, L. and Endean M. Manufacturing with Materials. Milton Keynes. (latest ed.). References Bolton, W. Engineering Science. Newnes. Oxford. (latest ed.). El Wakil, S. D. Processes and Design for Manufacture. PWS Publishing Company. (latest ed.). Rogers, G and Mayhew, Y. Engineering Thermodynamics, Work & Heat Transfer. John Wiley & Sons. New York. (latest ed.) Waterman, N. A. and Ashby, M. F. The materials selector on CD-ROM [interactive multimedia]. Chapman & Hall. (latest ed.). 140

149 CC2404 Applied Physics and Instrumentation in Health Care Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject equips students with the fundamentals of physics and the knowledge of the working principles of some major instruments used in healthcare. Based on a thorough understanding of concepts and principles as well as their application in instrumentation in healthcare, students will be able to appraise the usefulness and limitations of the instruments and develop an awareness of the safety issues and hazard controls when using them. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the fundamental concepts of heat, electricity, magnetism, electromagnetic radiation and sound waves apply the working principles of some major instruments used in healthcare appraise the usefulness and limitations of the instruments used in healthcare discuss the safety aspects and hazard controls in using some of the healthcare instruments show enhanced professionalism in terms of care and sense of responsibility Indicative Contents Heat and Temperature Temperature scales and humidity; Types of temperature sensors; Boiling and melting; Thermal expansion. Heat conduction, convection and radiation. Electricity and Magnetism Electrostatic and electricity; Magnetism and electromagnets; Motion of charged particles in electric and magnetic fields; Electric currents and their usage; Electrical appliance safety precautions and standards; Gas discharge and plasma; Magnetic therapy. Electromagnetic Waves The spectrum and characteristics of electromagnetic wave; Ultraviolet (UV) index and protection; How sunburns and sun tans work. Visible light (VIS) and lasers; Principle and properties of laser; Laser classifications and safety standard; Laser therapy and laser dermatology; Source of infrared radiation (IR); IR therapy; Microwave and x-ray applications. 141

150 Acoustic and Ultrasound Sound waves; Frequency and pitch; Sound intensity and loudness; Characteristics of ultrasound; Generation and detection of ultrasound; Ultrasound in medical imaging. Instruments / Equipment Thermometer and hygrometer; Diathermy unit; Nebulizer for aerosol therapy; Aspirator; Pulse oximeters; Vaporizer/steamer; Sphygmomanometers; Stethoscopes; Autoclaves and ultrasonic cleaners; Electrocautery; Infrared noncontact thermometer; IR-VIS-UV laser systems; UV sterilizer; Ultrasound imaging and therapy units. Teaching/Learning Approach This course will introduce the fundamentals of heat, electricity, magnetism, electromagnetic radiation and sound waves. Lectures will emphasize the concepts and applications of the physical phenomena involved. Key issues, such as the limitations and hazards of using various instruments will be addressed. Preventive measures for minimizing the hazard will be discussed. Tutorials will focus on problem solving and case studying. Practical issues related to instrumentation in health care will be emphasized. Through these learning activities, students can identify the fundamental concepts related to physics and instrumentation and apply the related working principles. In addition, they are developed to appraise the usefulness and limitations of the instruments used in healthcare areas. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including regular assignments and quizzes, a mid-term test and an examination. They are designed to develop and assess students performance in the identification of the concepts and application of working principles involving the instruments used in health care areas. Indicative Reading Griffiths, W. T. The Physics of Everyday Phenomena (3 rd ed.) McGraw Hill. (2001). Jones, E.R. and Childers, R. L. Contemporary College Physics (3 rd ed.) McGraw Hill. (2001). Urone, P. College Physics (2 nd ed.) Thomson Learning. (2001). 142

151 CC2406 Calculus Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject is to provide students with the basic skills of calculus, which is the core of many mathematical disciplines such as optimization, financial mathematics, statistics, simulation etc. The subject introduces students to the fundamental concepts and skills of calculus. The emphasis will be on the basic understanding of the concepts, techniques and applications. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: discuss the concepts of limit of a sequence, limit of a function and continuity develop the understanding of derivatives of a function and its geometric meaning, and the ability to compute derivatives using various rules of differentiation apply differential calculus to calculate rates of change, locate maximum, minimum and points of inflexion, approximate D y by differential and to sketch the graph of a given function master the concepts of indefinite integrals as anti-derivatives and definite integrals as limit of sums and the fundamental theorem of calculus and other integration theorems evaluate indefinite integrals using techniques such as change of variables, integration by parts and partial fraction decomposition solve simple differential equations of first and second order organize and articulate in a variety of ways that are clear and understandable Indicative Contents Limits and Continuity Limit of a function, evaluation of limits, continuity. Differentiation Derivative of a function, rules of differentiation, higher derivatives, L'Hôpital's rule. 143

152 Applications of Differentiation Maximum and minimum, rates of change, differentials, linear approximations, increasing and decreasing functions, curve sketching. Integration Integrals, techniques of integration, applications of integration. Ordinary Differential Equations First order equations, second order linear equations with constant coefficients. Teaching/Learning Approach The lectures aim to provide the students with an integrated knowledge required for the understanding of the basic mathematical concepts and techniques. To develop students' ability for logical thinking, effective communication and ability to apply the theory they learn in lectures, tutorial and presentation sessions will be held. Assessment Approach The continuous assessment is comprised of homework assignments, in-class quizzes and tests. The assignments are used to assist the students to reflect on and review their progress. The end-ofsemester examination is used to assess the knowledge acquired by the students and their ability to apply and extend such knowledge. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks Edwards, C.H. and Penney, D.E. Elementary Differential Equations. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.). Thomas, G. and Finney, R. Calculus and Analytic Geometry. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.). Reference Adams, R. Single Variable Calculus. Pearson Education. (latest ed.). 144

153 CC2417 Human Biology I Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours Lecture 14 hours Tutorial / Virtual Laboratory Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject enables the students to acquire a basic level of understanding of the body as an integrated entity from the molecular level to the whole body and to appreciate the inter-relationships between body systems as a whole. The study of Human Biology contributes to the students acquisition of a general basis for further study in areas related to human biology. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: appreciate and discuss the topics related to human biological science use appropriate terms to describe the human body, the chemistry of life, cell structure, and the basic metabolic processes of the organ systems studied identify and explain the intricate complexities of structure and function in the human body analyze the interrelationships between organ systems and physiological processes critically assess and evaluate systems that maintain homeostasis in biological systems show enhanced analytical and critical thinking skills Indicative Contents Organization of the Human Body The human organism Structure and function of the cell Histology: The study of tissues Support and Movement Integumentary system Skeletal system Muscular system Articulation and movement Integration and control systems Nervous system Endocrine system 145

154 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction of the anatomy followed by elaboration of the key concepts and the underlying principles on physiology. Clinical applications related to the basic human biology knowledge will be discussed during lectures to enhance students acquisition of basic concepts and their relevant applications. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to engage in more active learning. Multimedia aid such as interactive videos, CD-ROMs, and online quizzes are adopted to reinforce and consolidate materials from the lectures. The virtual laboratory sessions are designed to supplement the theoretical content taught in lectures. These learning activities are to develop students abilities in identifying the relationship between structure and physiology and analysing the mechanism in maintaining homeostasis. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools may be used, including objective questions, case studies, group presentations, written reports, tests and examinations designed to designed to evaluate students level of understanding; analytical mind and abilities to put theories into application. Indicative Reading Marieb, E.N. Human Anatomy and Physiology (6 th ed.). San Francisco: Benjamin Cummings, Martini, F.H. Fundamentals of Anatomy and Physiology (6 th Cummings, ed.). San Francisco: Benjamin Tortora, G.J. and Grabowski, S.R., Principles of Anatomy and Physiology (10 th ed.). New York: John Wiley and Sons, Waugh, A., et al. Anatomy and Physiology in Health and Illness (9 th ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone,

155 CC2418 Human Biology II Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours Lecture 14 hours Tutorial / Virtual Laboratory Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject continues with Human Biology I that enables the students to acquire a basic level of understanding of the body as an integrated entity from the molecular to the whole body level and to appreciate the inter-relationships between body systems as a whole. The study of Human Biology contributes to the students acquisition of a general basis for further study in areas related to human biology. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: appreciate and discuss the topics related to human biological science use appropriate terms to describe the human body, the chemistry of life, cell structure, and the basic metabolic processes of the organ systems studied identify and explain the intricate complexities of structure and function in the human body analyze the interrelationships between organ systems and physiological processes critically assess and evaluate systems that maintain homeostasis in biological systems show enhanced analytical and critical thinking skills Indicative Contents Regulation and Maintenance Cardiovascular system Lymphatic system and immunity Respiratory system Digestive system Nutrition, metabolism, temperature regulation Urinary system Water, electrolytes, and acid-base balance Reproduction and Development Reproductive system Genetics, embryology and pre-natal development Development, growth and ageing 147

156 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction of the anatomy followed by elaboration of the key concepts and the underlying principles on physiology. Clinical applications related to the basic human biology knowledge will be discussed during lectures to enhance students acquisition of basic concepts and their relevant applications. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to engage in more active learning. Multimedia aid such as interactive videos, CD-ROMs, and online quizzes are adopted to reinforce and consolidate materials from the lectures. The virtual laboratory sessions are designed to supplement the theoretical content taught in lectures. These learning activities are to develop students abilities in identifying the relationship between structure and physiology and analysing the mechanism in maintaining homeostasis. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools may be used, including objective questions, case studies, group presentations, written reports, tests and examinations designed to evaluate students level of understanding; analytical mind and abilities to put theories into application. Indicative Reading Marieb, E.N. Human Anatomy and Physiology (6 th ed.). San Francisco: Benjamin Cummings, Martini, F.H. Fundamentals of Anatomy and Physiology (6 th Cummings, ed.). San Francisco: Benjamin Tortora, G.J. and Grabowski, S.R. Principles of Anatomy and Physiology (10 th ed.). New York: John Wiley and Sons, Waugh, A., et al. Anatomy and Physiology in Health and Illness (9 th ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone,

157 CC2422 Linear Algebra Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject is to provide students with the basic skills of linear algebra, which is the core of many mathematical disciplines such as operations research, statistics, econometrics etc. The subject introduces students to the ideas and techniques of basic linear algebra and its applications. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: perform basic operations of matrix algebra and apply them to solve systems of linear equations discuss the basic concepts of vector spaces, linear transformations and inner product spaces interpret the concepts of vector spaces from a geometric perspective apply the techniques of linear algebra to problems in statistics and applied mathematics such as the calculation of eigenvalues and eigenvectors apply the knowledge of linear algebra to the solution of problems in statistics and numerical analysis develop problem-solving abilities Indicative Contents Matrix Algebra Linear equations and matrices, matrix operations, row-reduction, echelon form, determinants. Vector Spaces Vector space axioms, subspace, spanning sets, linear dependence and independence, bases and dimension. 149

158 Linear Transformations Definition of linear transformation, kernel and range, the matrix of a linear transformation, change of basis, eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Inner Product Spaces Inner product, norm, orthogonality, Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization process, diagonalization of symmetric matrices. Teaching/Learning Approach The first three intended outcomes will be achieved via lectures, tutorials and assignments. The fourth will be acquired through lectures and computer demonstrations. The fifth and sixth will be developed via small case studies and lectures. Assessment Approach The fourth and fifth intended outcomes will be assessed by written or computing assignments. All others will be assessed by tests and an examination. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Cullen, C. Linear Algebra with Applications. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.). References Apostol, T.M. Linear Algebra: A First Course with Applications to Differential Equations. Wiley. (latest ed.). Nakos, G. and Joyner, D. Linear algebra with Applications. Brooks/Cole. (latest ed.). Strang, G. Linear Algebra and its Applications. Harcourt, Brace, Jovanovich. (latest ed.). 150

159 CC2425 Statistics for Business I Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims The aim of this subject is to introduce to the students the compilation of statistical data, simple and basic statistical calculation, elements of probability and probability distributions. Applications in business will be emphasized by using appropriate practical examples to illustrate the principles and methods. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: master statistical techniques for data compilation and calculation of descriptive statistics master techniques for solving problems on probabilities perform probability calculations relating probability distribution for discrete random variables perform probability calculations relating probability density function for continuous random variables determine the appropriateness of applying probability distributions or density functions under various business situations assess critically results of business problems be prepared for life-long learning Indicative Contents Descriptive Statistics Frequency distributions: construction and uses of frequency tables; Measures of central tendency: arithmetic mean, median, mode; Measures of variability: range, percentiles, quartile deviation, mean deviation, variance, standard deviation, coefficient of variation; Applications in business. Probability Experiment, events and probability; Probability rules; Bayes' theorem, emphasis of its business applications. 151

160 Discrete Random Variables Introduction to discrete random variables and their probability distributions; Mathematical expectation; Special discrete distributions: uniform, binomial, multinomial, hypergeometric, negative binomial, geometric, Poisson; Binomial approximation to the hypergeometric, and Poisson approximation to the binomial; Illustrations of their applications in business. Continuous Random Variables Concept of continuous random variables and their probability density functions; Mathematical expectation; Special continuous distributions: uniform, exponential, normal; Normal approximation to the binomial. Illustrations of their applications in business. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will be used to introduce the subject materials. Illustrative business cases will be used to strengthen students' statistical concepts. Students are required to reinforce their knowledge of this subject through assignments. Assessment Approach The continuous assessment is comprised of homework assignments and tests. The assignments and the test are used to assist the students to reflect on and review their progress. The end-of-semester examination is used to assess the knowledge acquired by the students. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Newbold, P., Carlson, W.L. and Thorne, B.M. Statistics for Business and Economic. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.). References Berenson, M.L., Levine, D.M. and Krehbiel, T.C. Basic Business Statistics. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.). Montgomery, D.C. and Runger, G.C. Applied Statistics and Probability for Engineers. John-Wiley. (latest ed.). 152

161 CC2439 General Chemistry Level 2 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 8 hours of Tutorial 6 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject introduces the fundamental concepts on physical, organic and inorganic chemistry. It provides sufficient information for students to continue chemistry instruction at college level. Throughout the course, students will have a general understanding of chemical properties and physical properties of chemicals. It is also hoped that they will become aware of the importance of chemicals as part of their daily lives. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: use chemical terms and principles in their field of study describe the physical and chemical properties of chemicals generalize and understand the fundamental principles of chemistry explain and apply chemical properties to real-life examples Indicative Contents Properties of chemicals Atomic structure; Basic concepts of chemical bonding; Physical properties of first 30 th elements in periodic table; States of matters; Properties of solutions and gases; Spectrophotometry Thermodynamics and kinetics Concepts of chemical thermodynamics; Entropies and Enthalpies; Rate of reaction, Order of reactions, Catalyst and enzyme Functional groups Chemistry of functional groups of organic chemicals: alkane, alkene, haloalkane, alcohol, aldehyde, ketone, carboxylic acid, ester, amine and amide; Marcomolecules: structure and chemical reactions Chemistry in everyday life Material Science; Nanotechnology, Chemicals commonly use in everyday life: bleach, artificial colours, preservatives, batteries and lemon cells 153

162 Teaching/Learning Approach The course is composed of three parts: lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions. Lectures provide theory-based teaching on physical, organic and inorganic chemistry. Examples and references will be given to students whenever appropriate. Tutorials provide students with opportunities to broaden, enlighten and reinforce the general knowledge obtained in the lectures. Students will be involved in problem based activities, classroom feedback, case studies, presentations, and discussions in the tutorial. Laboratory sessions allow students to understand, verify, and apply knowledge developed from lectures. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools including presentations, classroom feedback, laboratory reports, group discussion, tests and an examination will be used to assess the process of learning as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Malone, L. Basic concepts of chemistry. Danvers. MA: Wiley. (7 th ed). References Averill, B. Chemistry: principles, patterns, and applications. San Francisco, California: Pearson/Benjamin Cummings. Bauer, R. C. A conceptual introduction to chemistry. New York: McGraw-Hill. Brady, J.E. Chemistry: matter and its changes. Hoboken, N.J.: Wiley. (4 th ed). Chang, R. Chemistry. Boston: McGraw-Hill Higher Education. (9 th ed). McMurry, J. Fundamentals of general, organic, and biological chemistry. Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Pearson/Prentice Hall. (5 th ed). Russo, S. Introductory chemistry. San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings. (3 rd ed). Suchocki, J. Conceptual chemistry: understanding our world of atoms and molecules. San Francisco, California: Benjamin Cummings. (3 rd ed). Wade, L.G. Organic chemistry. Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Pearson Education. (5 th ed). 154

163 CC3003 Contemporary Social Problems Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours Lecture 14 hours Seminar Prerequisite Nil Assessment 40 % Coursework 60 % Examination Aims This subject introduces to students with the concepts of social problems from a sociological perspective. It provides to students with fundamental overview on sociological paradigms and cultivates students critical thinking ability. Studying the subject equips students with analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of social problems in contemporary society. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify social issues from a sociological perspective. gain insight of both global and local social problems. make a reasoned analysis of the prevailing social problems. become sensitive toward the development of social policies in tackling social problems. develop social awareness toward the society they are living in. Indicative Contents The Sociology of Social Problems The sociological diagnosis of social problems, pitfalls in sociological theorizing, social disorganization and social dysfunctions. Crime and Juvenile Delinquency The criminal justice system, trends and patterns of crime and delinquency, prevailing criminological theories and social control. Poverty and Inequality A delineation of poverty, trends in poverty, poverty and economic inequality from a global perspective. Race and Ethnicity Prejudice and discrimination, assimilation and pluralism, explaining racial and ethnic stratification. 155

164 Families Structures and characteristics of families throughout the world, sociological perspectives on families, violence in families, families and intimate relationships. Education Sociological theories of education, schools and societies, educational quality and educational challenges in the twenty-first century. Urbanization and Urban Problems The urban environment, the development of cities, models of urban growth, suburbanization and the fiscal crisis of cities. Population and the World s Environment Growth and control of population, the theory of demographic transition, population in industrialized and developing countries, a conflicting perspective on population, human intrusion into the natural environment. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of social problems based on sociological theories and concepts. Seminars provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts delivered in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of contemporary issues and problems. The activities in seminars include student presentations and discussions of case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical skills in examining the understanding of social problems. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks Etizen and Baca Zinn, Social Problems (8 th ed.), Englewood Cliffs, Prentice Hall (2000). References Ferguon, S. J., Mapping the Social Landscape (4 th ed.), New York: McGraw-Hill Higher Education (2005). Kornblum, W. & Julian, J., Social Problems (11 th ed.), New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall (2004). Lauer, R.H. and Lauer, J.C., Social Problems & the Quality of Life (9 th ed.), New York: McGraw- Hill Higher Education (2004). 156

165 Mcveigh, F., Modern Social Problems, New York, Holt Rinehart and Winston (1997). Neubeck, K., Social Problems (4 th ed.), New York, McGraw Hill (1997). Tylor, S., ed. Sociology: Issues and Debates, Great Britain: Palgrave (2000). 157

166 CC3004 Development of Pearl River Delta Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject provides students with the knowledge of the fundamental structure of the Pearl River Delta region and a comprehensive understanding of various aspects of her socio-economic development and their implications to Hong Kong s development by introducing the most updated information about the latest and salient socio-economic development in the Pearl River Delta region and developing students ability to identify, comprehend and analyse the business and economic press coverage of Pearl River Delta and Hong Kong with a critical perspective. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand and analyse the pertinent socio-economic development of the Pearl River Delta region and the implications to Hong Kong s development. identify the challenges and opportunities afforded at around the Pearl River Delta region. appraise the future development of the Pearl River Delta region by investigating the underlying forces and factors that facilitate or inhabit the development. Indicative Contents Introduction Definition of Pearl River Delta; Importance of Guangdong and Pearl River Delta; Economic reform and the openness policy; Links with Hong Kong. Foreign Investment and Foreign Trade Guangdong s external trade; Exports of Pearl River Delta; The opening of domestic market and foreign investment; Possibility of a South China Trading bloc. Industrial Structure and Industrial Policy Patterns of industrial structure in Guangdong; Retardation of the tertiary sector; Processing operations and foreign-invested enterprises; An effective and equitable policy. 158

167 Labour Market Labour cost and labour supply in Pearl River Delta; Human resources and the development of High-Tech and tertiary industries; Liberalisation of the labour market; Relaxing household registration. Infrastructure of Pearl River Delta Electricity, land transportation, port construction, telecommunications, co-ordination of infrastructure in Hong Kong and Pearl River Delta. Environmental Degradation Problems of environmental pollution, air and water pollution; Problems of industrial wastes; Sources of environmental pollution; Role of Township and Village Enterprises (TVEs) in environmental pollution; Controlling environmental pollution. Regional economic development Greater Pearl River Delta concept; Pan Pearl River Delta regional cooperation; Impacts of Yangtze River Delta region to Pearl River Delta. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on providing students with the most updating information about the socio-economic development in Pearl Rover Delta and analyzing the implications to Hong Kong s development. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the lecture discussions and to identify and comprehend the opportunities and challenges of latest salient issues through individual and group presentations. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. Students will be required to actively participate in the learning process through reading articles, doing project and conducting self-study. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook This is a wide and dynamic topic mainly involving current issues and we are not recommending a specific textbook. References Cheng Y. S. (ed). Guangdong in the Twenty first Century: Stagnation or second Take-off. City University of Hong Kong Press (latest ed.). Liu P. W., et al., The Fifth Dragon: The Emergence of Pearl River Delta. Addison Wesley, Singapore (latest ed.). 159

168 Yeh, Lee, Lee and Sze (ed.) Building a Competitive Pearl River Delta Region Cooperation, Coordination, and Planning. Centre of Urban Planning and Environmental Management, HKU (latest ed.). Yeung, Shen and Li, The Western Pearl River Delta Growth and opportunities for Cooperative Development with Hong Kong, Hong Kong Institute of Asia-Pacific Studies, the Chinese University of Hong Kong (latest ed.). Yeung Y. M. and Chu K. Y.(ed)., Guangdong, Survey of a Province Undergoing Rapid Changes. The Chinese University Press. Second edition (latest ed.). Greater PRD: bridgehead to the China market, Research Department, Hong Kong Trade Development Council (latest ed.). Pearl River Super Zone: tapping into the world's fastest growing economy, South China Morning Post (latest ed.). Central Policy Unit, HKSAR ( Hong Kong Trade Development Council: Pan-Pearl River Delta ( Hong Kong Trade Development Council: Pearl River Delta ( The Greater Pearl River Delta Business Council Annual Report ( 160

169 CC3006 The Perspectives of Eastern and Western Cultures Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisite Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims On the basis of theories and contextual analyses, this subject examines the changing relationship among culture, society, history, religion, and popular arts in the East and West. It allows students to understand the key problems of human creativity, social mentality and cultural consumption in the contexts of local history and global transformation. All these forces will be pivotal in the development of our cultural imagination, cultural education and cultural policies in the years ahead. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the similarities and differences between Eastern and Western cultures. become more sensitive to different cultural novelties and distinctiveness and successfully interact with people of different cultural backgrounds. differentiate the multiple perspectives with which people view the East and West today. analyze the complex interplay between the modern self, society and history through an interdisciplinary approach. develop a capacity for independent judgment on both Eastern and Western cultural practices and social institutions they must deal with today. apply cultural concepts and theories to the analysis of the fundamental issues and problems of different civilizations. Indicative Content The Conceptions and Definitions of Eastern and Western Cultures Concepts of cultures, difference between cultures and civilizations, representations of the East and West, Globalization and Americanization, Samuel Huntington s notion of the Clash of Civilization. The Conceptions of Beauty The difference between the East and West in the concepts of beauty, the western images of Eastern beauty, the Japanese images of western beauty, ancient and modern representations of perfect human figures; modern cultural meaning of Miss Universe. 161

170 Language and Communication The origins and evolutions of Eastern and Western languages, pidgins and colonialism, language and the society, accents and Class, tone and gender, the secret of good communications, Greetings and manners, the difference between verbal and body languages in the East and West. Childhood and Toy Culture The difference between the East and West in the concepts of Childhood; the history of Eastern and Western toys, the history of Barbie doll, Barbie culture and the representation of American womanhood; the impact of American Barbie culture on China and Hong Kong; the opponent of Barbie: the emergence of Blythe doll in the early 2000s, Gundam culture and the Japanese worldview. Buddhism and Christianity The difference between the East and West in the conception of afterlife, the concepts of heaven and hells, the life and thoughts of Jesus and Buddha, the rise and decline of Buddhism in India, the impact of Buddhism on East and South East Asian Society; Christianity and Jewish culture, the rise of Christianity in Europe and America. Fortune-telling and Social Culture European witchcraft and black magic, Indian palm reading and its introduction to China, ancient Chinese conception of fate and destiny, Feng-shui and Chinese architecture, I-Ching fortunetelling and Chinese social culture. Love relationship and Marriage The origin and evolution of Valentine culture in the West, the difference between the East and West in dating culture; the Eastern and Western conceptions of Love ; the origins and the evolution of marriage in human society; different marriage pattern in Eastern and Western culture, Eastern and Western definitions of marriage. Gender and Sexuality The rise of feminism in modern western society; ancient Chinese representations of Chinese womanhood; the difference between the West, India and China in attitudes toward sex, sex education in East and West, homosexual cultures in the East and West. Disney Culture and Globalization The Making of Disney Culture in America; Disney Culture and the rise of American middle class in the second half of the 20 th century, Disney films and American family culture, the impacts of Disney culture on Japan, China and Hong Kong. Historical Memory and Museums Colonialism and the British Museums; the flowering of European culture and the development of The British Museum; the Beijing National Museum and the rise of Chinese nationalism; Museum of Hong Kong History and collective identity in Hong Kong. Popular Cultures (I): Comics and the Society The origins and development of Eastern and Western comics, Superman and American heroic culture; Japanese comics and social culture, the impact of Japanese comics on Hong Kong, Taiwanese and Chinese teen culture. 162

171 Popular Cultures (II): Films and TV culture and the Society The development of western film industry; the impact of Hollywood culture on the world; the development of Chinese film industry; the interactive relationship between Film and TV culture, cultural identities and social mentality. Orientalism and Occidentalism Edward Said s notion of Orientalism, the rise of Occidentalism in Asia, the similarities and differences between Orientalism and Occidentalsim, the development of Chinese Occidentalism and June Fourth Student Movement; Occidentalism and Japanese pop cultures. Teaching/ Learning Approach The lecturer will use the Chinese language to present the topics related to Eastern cultures so as to make the teaching content much more accessible and comprehensible to students. Students are required to actively participate in discussion and presentation. Audio and visual materials are also used to enhance students understanding. In each tutorial, students will be divided into groups and will be required to present an assigned topic for discussion. They will be occasionally required to participate in fieldwork and to explore historical sites in Hong Kong under the guidance of the lecturer. Assessment Approach, In addition to tests and final examination that assess students understanding of cultural concepts and theories, presentation as well as essays are used to examine students competence in conducting cultural analysis of cultural issues. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook: Hsu, Francis L.K., American and Chinese: Passages to Differences.Honolulu: The University Press of Hawaii, References: Chan, Stephen Ching-kiu ( 陳 清 僑 ), ed. 情 感 的 實 踐 : 香 港 流 行 歌 詞 研 究 The Practice of Affect: Studies in Hong Kong Popular Song Lyrics, Series in Hong Kong Cultural Studies. Hong Kong: Oxford University Press, Frow, John, Cultural Studies and Cultural Value. Oxford: Clarendon Press, Geertz, Clifford, The Interpretation of Cultures, New York: Basci Books, Kersten, Holger, Jesus lived in India: His Unknown Life Before and After the Crucifixion, India: Penguin Books, King, Larry, How to Talk to Anyone, Anytime, Anywhere, The Secrets of Good Communication. New York: Random House,

172 Law, Kwai-cheung ( 羅 貴 祥 ), 大 眾 文 化 與 香 港 Mass Culture and Hong Kong, Hong Kong: Youth Literary Press, Li, Siu-leung( 李 小 良 ), Wong, Wang-chi ( 王 宏 志 ) and Chan, Stephen Ching-kiu ( 陳 清 僑 ), 否 想 香 港 : 歷 史 文 化 未 來 Hong Kong Un-Imagined: History, Culture, and the Future, Taipei: Rye Field, Lok, Fung ( 洛 楓 ), 世 紀 末 的 城 巿 : 香 港 的 流 行 文 化 The Decadent City, Hong Kong: Oxford University Press, Ma, Kit-wai, Culture, Politics and Television in Hong Kong: Culture and Communication in Asia. London: Routledge, Punter, David, ed. Introduction to Contemporary Cultural Studies. London New York: Longman, Said, Edward, Orientalism. London: Penguin Press, Turner, Mathew ( 田 邁 修 ) and Ngan, Suk-fun ( 顏 淑 芬 ), eds. 香 港 六 十 年 代 : 身 份 文 化 認 同 與 設 計 Hong Kong in the Sixties: Cultural Identity and Design. Hong Kong: Hong Kong Arts Centre, Yu, Mo-wan ( 余 慕 雲 ), 香 港 電 影 史 話 A Historical Narrative of Hong Kong Film, Vol.1. Hong Kong: Subculture Press,

173 CC3008 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject introduces the basic concepts in the science of food and nutrients. These lay the foundation of healthy nutrition and diet. The goal is to create among students an awareness of the relation between diet and health, and to encourage them to follow the principles of a balanced diet to maintain their health, fitness and vitality. It also equips students with the practical ways to implement precautions to prevent food-borne illnesses and the means to design a balanced diet for different stages of one s life cycle, as well as with reference to one s health condition. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the concepts of the role of nutrients and their metabolism in health and diseases analyse the inter-relationship between diet and fitness plan a balanced diet for different stages in the life cycle plan a balanced diet to maintain health, fitness and vitality apply the principles in the prevention of food-borne diseases follow the guidelines of Critical Control Point analysis for food-borne diseases show enhanced critical thinking and problem-solving skills show enhanced professionalism in terms of care, integrity and sense of responsibility Indicative Contents Overview of Nutrients and Nutrition Important nutrients to human health, carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, vitamins, minerals and water. Dietary reference intakes and nutritional assessment. Metabolism Digestion, absorption, transportation, and storage/utilisation of nutrients in the human body. Planning of Diet in Health and for Some Diseases Principles and guidelines in planning a balanced diet to maintain health and to prevent certain diseases such as heart disease, cancer and diabetes; Food fads and trends. 165

174 Diet Supplements and Functional Food Wholesome food versus diet supplements in maintaining health and delay degeneration. Weight Management Energy balance between intake and expenditure; Definition of normal, over- and under- weight using body mass index. Nutrition and Fitness Energy requirement for various physical activities. Nutrition in Life Cycle Dietary consideration during various stages in the life cycle: childhood, adolescence, adulthood, pregnancy and elderly. Food Safety and Prevention of Food-borne Illness Risk factors for food-borne illnesses and their prevention; Use of Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Point in prevention of food-borne illnesses. Teaching/Leaning Approach Lectures emphasize the understanding and explanation of basic information and relevant concepts of nutrition and food hygiene. Tutorials provide a venue for discussion and illustration of the application in designing a healthy diet in health and illness. Assessment Approach Assessment such as individual and group assignments, presentations, tests and an examination will be used to assess the application of the theoretical knowledge. Written assignments and oral presentations are, respectively, for the training of written and oral communication skills. In addition, students ability in making analysis and planning for a balanced and health promoting diet is assessed. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Wardlaw, G.M. Contemporary Nutrition- Issues and Insights (5 th edition) New York: McGraw-Hill. (2003). 166

175 References Geissler, C.A. and Powers, H.J. (ed.). Human Nutrition and Dietetics (11 th edition) Edinburgh: Elsevier/Churchill Livingstone. (2005). Mc Swane. D., Nancy, R. and Linton, R. Essentials of Food Safety and Sanitation (2 nd edition) NJ: Prentice Hall. (2000). 167

176 CC3011 Gender Issues Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours Lecture 14 hours Seminar Prerequisite Nil Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject aims at systematically enhancing students awareness of gender stereotypes and inequality in society from both the personal and sociological perspectives. It equips them with a critical and gender sensitive mind to observe, interpret and articulate social interaction and phenomena. Social construction and deconstruction of gender issues are discussed to enable students to appreciate the importance of gender balance and equality in the changing human world. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify a framework of study in gender issues. deconstruct the current issues of gender inequality from a sociological perspective. develop gender sensitivity toward social issues. demonstrate the ability to use relevant perspectives and arguments in analyzing gender issues. Indicative Contents Thinking about Gender Sociological imagination and the sociological framework for thinking about women and men. Gender Difference and Gender Inequality Natural differences between the sexes, discrimination in everyday life, and the problem in sociological perspectives. The Social Construction of Gender Femininity, masculinity and the concept of androgyny. The Social Construction of Gender in Chinese Society The social construction of language, knowledge, and Chinese culture. Sex Segregation and Work The male/female earnings gap; Sex segregation in the workplace; Consequences of occupational sex segregation. Family, Economy and the Institutionalization of Gender Inequality Historical perspectives on modern families; Feminist perspective on families, and the diversity of contemporary households. 168

177 Gender, Social Stratification and Social Policy Current social policy related to gender issues; Concept of a gender-balanced society. Teaching/Learning Approach To facilitate students learning in this subject, lectures, seminars and group presentations are offered. Students are encouraged to actively participate in the learning process. During lectures, theories and concepts on sociology and gender issues are delivered. In seminars, students take part in various kinds of interesting and challenging group presentations and discussion which help to consolidate and enrich their understanding and critical analysis of the subject matter. Assessment Approach In addition to an examination that assesses students understanding and application of gender concepts and theories, presentations, case studies and group projects as well as written reflection papers are used to enhance students analytical ability and sensitivity in conducting personal and sociological analysis of gender issues. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Anderson, M.L., Thinking about Women: Sociological Perspectives on Sex and Gender, US: Allyn and Bacon (latest ed.). Lindsey, Linda L., Gender Roles: a Sociological Perspective, Pearson Prentice Hall (latest ed.). References Francis. B. and Skelton C., Investigating Gender Contemporary Perspectives in Education, USA: Open University Press (latest ed.). Hilary M. Lips, Sex & Gender: An Introduction, Boston: McGraw-Hill (latest ed.). Lee, Eliza W.Y., Gender and Change in Hong Kong: Globalization, Postcolonialism and Chinese Patriarchy, Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press (latest ed.). Renzetti, C.M. and Curran, D.J., Women and Society, US: Allyn and Bacon (latest ed.). Thorne, B., Gender Play: Girls and Boys in School, Open University Press (latest ed.). 俞 智 敏 等 合 譯 Pamela Abbott & Claire Wallace 著 : 女 性 主 義 觀 點 的 社 會 學 台 北 : 巨 流 圖 書 公 司 ( 最 近 版 本 ) 顧 燕 翎 林 芳 玫 等 : 女 性 主 義 理 論 與 流 派 : 本 土 撰 寫 最 完 整 女 性 主 義 入 門 讀 本 台 北 : 女 書 文 化 事 業 有 限 公 司 ( 最 近 版 本 ) 169

178 CC3015 Logic Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours Lecture 14 hours Tutorial Prerequisites CC2002 Critical and Creative Thinking or CC2427 The Art of Reasoning Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject aims to strengthen the rational dimension of holistic (or liberal arts) education through enhancing students ability in logical reasoning and abstract thinking (and hence in critical thinking). It lets students see the power of logic through a wide range of applications in daily life. It also cultivates students appreciation to the beauty of the exactitude of formal logic - the essence of human rationality. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: apply logical techniques in assessing reasoning both in everyday life and in academic pursuit. become more critically aware of fallacies in everyday reasoning. use reason in solving conflicts and disputes and in making decisions. Indicative Contents Introduction Logic: the first of the seven traditional liberal arts. The history of logic. The branches of logic. Logic and reasoning. Statement Logic Logical connectives. Symbolizing English arguments. Using truth tables to evaluate arguments. Tautology, contradiction, and logical equivalence. Natural deduction. Applications of statement logic. Predicate Logic Predicates and quantifiers. Symbolizing English arguments. Logic of relations. Identity. Natural deduction. Applications of predicate logic. 170

179 Teaching/Learning Approach Students will be require to actively pardticipate in the learning process. Concepts and rules of logic, together with a lot of examples, are delivered in lectures. The students are required to do exercises after the lectures but before coming to the tutorials. In the tutorials, discussion will focus on places where students encounter difficulties. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, group projects, presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and examination designed to develop and assess students grip of logical concepts and techniques and their ability of applying these concepts and techniques to everyday arguments. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Hurley, Patrick J., A Concise Introduction to Logic, Wadsworth (latest ed.). References Copi, Irving M. and Cohen, Carl, Introduction to Logic, Prentice Hall (latest ed.). Layman, C. Stephen, The Power of Logic, McGraw-Hill (latest ed.). Tidman, Paul and Kahane, Howard, Logic and Philosophy, Wadsworth (latest ed.). 171

180 CC3016 Mass Media and Culture Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Seminar Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject provides an introductory survey of the mass media and their effects on culture, in particular in the Hong Kong society. It enables students to understand and apply key concepts in cultural and media theory, and critically analyze the relationship between media and cultural production, especially within the context of Hong Kong. Taking a critical approach, we will analyze and compare various media, including television, print, and the Internet. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: apply key concepts in cultural and media theories. evaluate the nature of various types of mass media and their potential effects on the individual and society. critically analyze the relationship between media and cultural production, especially within the context of Hong Kong; Indicative Contents Changing Media Old and new media, media convergence, information society, media functions. Media Theory Media economics, political economy, cultural theories, gatekeeping, framing, agenda setting. Newspaper, Television, Internet, Advertising, Public Relations Muckraking, professional journalism, public broadcasting, genres of advertising and public relations. Media Impacts Propaganda, multi-step flow model, selective reception, social learning theory, cultivation theory, stereotyping, spiral of silence. 172

181 Media Ethics Press freedom, social responsibility, truthfulness, privacy, confidentiality, personal conflict of interests. Teaching/Learning Approach Students will have the opportunity to learn concepts through a variety of media, including books, lectures, videos, and the Internet. The purpose is to expose students to the mass media as they are used and consumed in modern societies, helping them draw connections between theoretical concepts and real world applications. Students will further develop their habits of analytical thinking by critically evaluating and discussing issues from multiple perspectives. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Baran, Stanley J., Introduction to Mass Communication, McGraw-Hill (latest ed.). References Andersen, R., Strate, L., Critical Studies in Media Commercialism, Oxford University Press (latest ed.). Wilson, J.R. and Wilson, S.L., Mass Media / Mass Culture, McGraw Hill (latest ed.). Ryan J. and Wentworth, W.M., Media and Society: The Production of Culture in the Mass Media, Allyn & Bacon (latest ed.). 173

182 CC3017 Social Psychology Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Seminar Prerequisites CC2019 Introduction to Psychology Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject familiarizes students with different psychological theories in explaining human behaviour in social setting. It provides a balanced explanation of human behaviour, which often is the interplay of internal and contextual influences, instead of either one of the forces alone. The subject also provides opportunities for students to apply concepts and theories in understanding social phenomena in real life. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: articulate major concepts and major theories to explain social phenomena recognize the importance of context and social influence on human attitudes and behaviours conduct basic empirical study with the use of appropriate research methods to examine social phenomenon with meaningful purpose Indicative Contents Introduction to Social Psychology Defining social psychology; Research methodologies; Utility of the discipline; The latest development and application of the field. Social Cognition Concept of self and identity; Attribution; Social scheme; Stereotypes; Prejudice and discrimination. Attitude and Behaviour Component of attitudes; Attitudes change persuasion, cognitive dissonance and attitude inoculation; Predicting behaviours with attitude. Interpersonal interaction Interpersonal attraction; Intimacy; Love. Altruistic and Aggressive Behaviour Altruistic behaviour; Social loafing; Diffusion of social responsibility; De-individualization. 174

183 Social Influence Theory of conformity; Compliance; Obedience; Power of role; Cult behaviour. Group Dynamics Group thinking; Social dilemmas; Polarization; Gender and cultural differences. Teaching/Learning Approach Theories and concepts will be explained in lectures with the aid of real life examples, newspaper clips, cases and other sources. Students are also expected to participate in activities prepared Guided discussions, experiment demonstrations will be used in seminar to help students to actively apply concepts and theories learnt in the lectures. On-site data collection, field visits and studies will also be employed for group projects. Assessment Approach In addition to tests and examination that will be used to assess students understanding and application of concepts and theories; presentations, case studies as well as group written reports will also be used to evaluate students analytical ability and competence in conducting systematic research on social phenomena on top of the subject matter. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks: Myers, D. Social Psychology. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). Vaughan and Hogg. Introduction to Social Psychology. French Forest NSW: Pearson Education. (latest ed.). References: Brannigan, G.G., and Merrens, M.R. (Eds,.). The social psychologists: Research adventures. NY: McGraw-Hill, Inc. (latest ed.). Hogg, M.A. The SAGE handbook of Social Psychology. London: Thousand Oaks: Sage Publications. (latest ed.). Smith, P.B., and Bond, M.H. Social psychology across cultures: Analysis and perspectives. Boston: Allyn & Bacon. (latest ed.). 175

184 CC3018 The History of Modern China and the World (From Now) Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours Lecture 14 hours Seminar Prerequisite Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject will explore the dawn and evolution of modern China and its interaction with the World from historical perspectives and thus enable students to use the knowledge of the past to analyse current affairs. Learning Outcomes On successful completion of the subject, students will be able to: trace the political, socio-economic and cultural changes of modern China and the world. develop a good knowledge of the continuity and change between the past and the present, thus looking into the future from different perspectives. analyse with the current issues which we have encountered. apply relevant concepts and principles of history to modern Chinese society. Teaching/Learning Approach An active learning approach and peer learning approach will be adopted in the subject. Students will be required to actively participate in the learning process. And students will take part in a wide range of interesting and challenging activities, audio visual materials will be used for learning purposes. Indicative Contents An Introduction of the conception of Chinese modernity The research method of Japanese and Western scholars, the limitation of the Chinese scholars. The first clash with the West: Opium Wars The culture and the economic clash between China and West, the reason of the outbreak of the Opium War. 176

185 Revolution, Republic and Warlordism The May Fourth Movement, Intellectuals and Western Cultures. The Sino-Japanese War and The Communist Revolution The Interaction between Popular Culture and Modern Chinese Nationalism, Modern Chinese Museum: the collective memory of China s Past. The Cultural revolution and the Cult of Mao The rise of Mao, The June Fourth Movement and the 1997 Handover. Assessment Approach In addition to tests and an examination that assess student s understanding and application of concepts and theories, presentations, case studies as well as group written reports are used to examine students analytical ability and competence in conducting systematic investigation of the history of modern China. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks Spence, Jonathan D., The Search for Modern China, New York: Norton Company (2002). 郭 廷 以 : 近 代 中 國 史 綱 香 港 : 香 港 中 文 大 學 出 版 社,1997 年 References Fairbank, John K., Late Ching China, , Cambridge: Cambridge University Press (1978). Fairbank, John K. and Merle Goldman, ed. China: A New History, Cambridge: Harvard University Press (1998). Hsu, Immanuel C.Y., The Rise of Modern China, New York: Oxford University Press (1995). Spence, Jonathan, The Gate of Heavenly Peace: The Chinese and Their Revolution, (New York: Viking (1981). Wakeman, Frederic, The Fall of Imperial China, New York: Fress (1975). 李 定 一 : 近 代 中 國 史 台 北 : 正 中 書 局,1963 年 徐 中 約 : 近 代 中 國 史 上 下 冊 香 港 : 香 港 中 文 大 學 出 版 社,2001 年 177

186 CC3020 Oral Communication in English Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 42 hours of Seminar Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% Coursework Aims The main purpose of this subject is to help students develop their oral English skills. Building on a base of knowledge and strategies introduced in class, students will have many opportunities to practice and improve fluency as well as accuracy of their oral English output. Students will also increase their confidence in English usage through an enhanced awareness of their own language learning strategies. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: use knowledge of the International Phonetic Alphabet and pronunciation rules to improve the accuracy of their spoken English. apply skills and strategies to communicate fluently in interpersonal, group, and public situations. analyse critically the effectiveness of communication in interpersonal, group, and public situations. increase awareness and confidence in their ability to communicate orally in English. Indicative Contents English Pronunciation International Phonetic Alphabet (the IPA system); Features of English consonant and vowel sounds; Pronunciation patterns; Syllables; Stress; Intonation. Interpersonal Communication Communication and relationship development; Assertive conflict resolution; Interpersonal communication in school life, social life, and business life. Group Communication Problem-solving and decision making; Leadership techniques; Group conflict management. Public Communication Organizing presentation content; Improving delivery techniques; Types of delivery; Overcoming presentation fear. 178

187 Teaching/Learning Approach Students will spend a portion of seminar time acquiring knowledge and strategies to improve communication skills. Through pair and group activities, students will have numerous opportunities to practice what they learn, building fluency and confidence in their oral English production. They will also be exposed to audio-visual recordings of interpersonal, group, and public communication, developing the ability to critique examples as another means of internalising the knowledge and techniques of this subject. A portion of seminar time will also be spent in the language laboratory, where students will make use of listening activities, the Internet, and other technologies to improve the accuracy of their spoken English. Assessment Approach Assessment will mostly centre around speaking tasks, both extemporaneous and impromptu in nature. Individual presentations allow students to demonstrate their public communication skills while a group role-play/video assignment measure student s ability to demonstrate effective interpersonal and group communication. Quizzes are used to assess students knowledge of the IPA system as well as other aspects of English pronunciation. Students participation in peer review and constructive feedback will be an assessment component that measures their ability to analyze the effectiveness of various forms of communication while a reflection paper will seek to assess students internalisation and reflection on subject knowledge and activities. Indicative Reading References Adler, Ronald B. and Elmhorst, Jeanne M., Communicating at Work: Principles and Practices for Business and the Professions, McGraw-Hill (latest ed.). Grant, Linda, Well Said: Pronunciation for Clear Communication, Heinle & Heinle (latest ed.). Hancock, Mark, English Pronunciation in Use, Cambridge University Press (latest ed.). Hybels, Saundra and Weaver, Richard L., Communicating Effectively, McGraw-Hill (latest ed.). 179

188 CC3021 Politics and Government Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours Lecture 14 hours Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject aims to systemically enhance students understanding of the roles and functions of government and the interplay among government and politics, with specific reference to the local Hong Kong context. Related concepts are introduced to equip students analytical skills that are necessary to analyze of the current political issues. It also helps to promote the students social awareness and responsible citizenship and to develop their critical thinking for their life-long learning. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify and discuss the roles, functions, inter-relationship, and dynamics of politics and government; relate and apply the basic concepts and relevant knowledge to analyze and evaluate of current local issues in government and politics; develop a critical awareness of the trend of the interplay between government and politics; develop the commitment to concern political issues in the changing society. Indicative Contents An Overview of the Nature of Politics and Government The importance of understanding politics and government; The meaning of politics; The concepts of political development. Governments The roles and functions of government; The state as an agent of modernization. The Structure of Government Legislature, executive and judiciary system; Different forms of government. The Patterns of Government in the Contemporary World Three dimensions of norms of political systems; Five main types of political systems in contemporary world including liberal-democratic, egalitarian-authoritarian, traditionalinegalitarian, populist and authoritarian-inegalitarian regimes. 180

189 Political Culture Systems, patterns and processes Political Parties Roles of political parties; ideology and structure of the major political parties. Change and Political Development Characteristics and the process of political development, democratization, political institutionalization and political decay. Current Issues Politics and government Public sector reform Checks and balances, and accountability Need for and limits to government action Alternatives of government action Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts, with specific reference to current political issues. Lectures emphasize on active interaction between students and lecturer. With the aid of audio-visual materials, group discussions will be arranged to strengthen students awareness of current political issues. Seminars are conducted in the form of small class. In seminars sessions, students would be divided into small groups to conduct presentations of assigned topics. They are expected to make use of the seminar sessions to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life political issues. Assessment Approach Besides an examination that assess students understanding and application of political concepts and theories; a variety of assessment tools will also be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, designed to assess students critical thinking abilities and competence in conducting theoretical analysis of current political issues. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Lam, T. M., Politics and Government: An Introduction, Writers & Publishers Cooperative (latest ed.). Coulter, E., Principles of Politics and Government, Boston: Allyn and Baton, Inc., (latest ed.). 181

190 References Grigsby, E., Analyzing Politics: an Introduction to Political Science, West/Wadsworth (latest ed.). Miners, H. J., Government and Politics of Hong Kong, CUHK Press (latest ed.). Lee, C.Y. and Cheung, B.L. Public Sector Reform in HK. Hong Kong: CUHK Press (latest ed.). Osborne, D. & Gaebler, T., Reinventing Government: How the Entrepreneurial Spirit is Transforming the Public Sector, Plume Book (latest ed.). Tsang, S., Government and Politics, Hong Kong University (latest ed.). 羅 永 祥, 陳 志 輝 編 著 香 港 特 別 行 政 區 施 政 架 構 香 港 : 三 聯 書 店 ( 最 新 版 本 ) 182

191 CC3022 東 亞 歷 史 文 化 經 濟 及 社 會 發 展 History, Culture, Economic and Social Development of East Asia Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisite Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This is an interdisciplinary subject designed to introduce students to the historical, cultural, economic and social aspects of East Asia. It helps widen students knowledge of East Asia, in particular, China, Korea and Japan. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the similarity and difference between China, Japan and Korea in culture, history, economy and society; be sensitive to the cultural novelties and distinctiveness of different East Asia countries and successfully interact with people of different East Asian cultural backgrounds; appreciate the multiple perspectives with which people view East Asian social and economical development; analyse the complex interplay between economic development, culture, society and history through an inter-disciplinary approach; demonstrate a capacity for independent judgment on East Asian cultural practices and social institutions they must deal with today; apply different concepts and theories to the analysis of the fundamental issues and problems of East Asia; and develop a lifelong interest in reading and studying about East Asia that will continue after the completion of the course. Indicative Content Introduction The Concept of East Asia; the Physical and Ethnic Geography of East Asia, the Need for Historical and Cultural Understanding; Land, People and Languages Cultural and Social Tradition in East Asia Basic Social Structures and Family System; Religious Traditions in Asia, Confucianism in East Asia Society; Literature and Arts; Popular Culture 183

192 East Asian Response to the West in the 19th Century The Impact of the West on East Asia; Foreign Aggression on China s Periphery; Early Westernization in Self-Defence in China; The Reaction to Christian Missions in China; the Resort to Military Force in Japan; the Creation of New Government in Japan, Korea s Response to the Outside world Imperial Japan: Economy, Politics and Society The Maturing of the Economy; Social and Cultural Change; Taishõ Democracy ; the Rise of Militarism; Japan at War; Colonizing Korea China: From Monarchy to Warloardism The Late Qing Reform; the Revolution of 1911; the Republic s Decline into Warlordism World War II in East Asia Japan s Aggression in China, Japan s Greater East Asia Co-Prosperity Sphere; the War Ending in East Asia The New China and the New Japan The Rise of Maoist Leadership; Founding the People s Republic; The American Occupation and the Yoshida Ministries, ; Social and Cultural Change in the Era of High Growth in Japan The Cold War in East Asia War in Korea,; Korea: from Colony to Divided Nation; Taiwan: from Colony to Republic; China, Taiwan and the United Nation; the Rim Nations of East Asia The Resurgence of East Asian Economic Power Japan as Number 1 ; Little Dragons; China Joining the World Market Economy; The Japan that can Say No; the Japanese Model of Economic Growth; The Eve of and the Beginning of the 21st Century Disaster at Tiananmen; Democracy Coming to Taiwan; the Korean Peninsula: Democracy and Nuclear Weapons, Red Star over Hong Kong; Economic downturn in East Asia, SARS Crisis in East Asia; Taiwanese Independent Movement; the Sino-Japan Relation Teaching/ Learning Approach During lectures and tutorials, interactive approach is adopted. Students are required to actively participate in discussion and presentation. Audio and visual materials are also used to enhance students understanding of the teaching content. Each tutorial, students will be divided into groups and required to present an assigned topic for discussion. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies; written reports, tests and examination designed to assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. 184

193 Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Bowman, John S., Columbia Chronologies of Asian History and Culture, New York: Columbia University Press, Fairbank, J.K., Reischauer, E.O. and Craig, A.M., East Asia: Tradition and Transformation, Boston: Houghton Mifflin Co., References Allinson, Gary D., The Columbia Guide to Modern Japanese History, New York: Columbia University Press, Brodsgaard, Kjeld E. and Young, Susan, eds., State capacity in East Asia : Japan, Taiwan, China, and Vietnam, Oxford : Oxford University Press, Clyde, Paul H. and Beers, Burton F., The Far East: A History of Western Impacts and Eastern Responses, , Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, Copland, Ian, The Burden of Empire: Perspectives on Imperialism and Colonialism, Melbourne: Oxford University Press, Cumings, Bruce, Korea s Place in the Sun: A Modern History, New York: Norton, Deyo, Frederic, The Political Economy of the New Asian Industrialism, Ithaca, New York: Cornell University Press, Dockrill, Saki, From Pearl Harbor to Hiroshima: The Second World War in Asia and the Pacific, , New York: St. Martin's Press, Hsu, Immanuel C. Y., The Rise of Modern China, New York: Oxford University Press, Jansen, Marius B., The Making of Modern Japan, Cambridge, Mass.: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, Meyer, Milton W., Asia: A Concise History, Lanham, Md.: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers, 梁 英 明 近 現 代 東 亞 文 化 北 京 : 北 京 大 學 出 版 社,1995 年 余 定 邦 喻 常 森 編 : 近 現 代 中 國 與 東 亞 關 係 史 廣 州 : 中 山 大 學 出 版 社,1999 年 185

194 CC3023 History, Culture, Economic and Social Development of Southeast Asia Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisite Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This is an interdisciplinary subject designed to introduce students to the historical, cultural, economic and social aspects of Southeast Asia. Informed by theories and contextual analyses, this subject enable students to understand the certain critical differences among different Southeast Asia countries while appreciating how they constitute a regional world system based on certain shared cultural values and practices. Learning Outcomes On Successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the similarity and difference among Southeast Asia countries in culture, history economy and society. be sensitive to the cultural novelties and distinctiveness of different Southeast Asia countries and successfully interact with people of different Southeast Asian cultural backgrounds. appreciate the multiple perspectives with which people view Southeast Asian social and economical development. analyze the complex interplay between economic development, culture, society and history through an inter-disciplinary approach. demonstrate a capacity for independent judgment on Southeast Asian cultural practices and social institutions they must deal with today. apply different concepts and theories to the analysis of the fundamental issues and problems of Southeast Asia. develop a lifelong interest in reading and studying about Southeast Asia that will continue after the completion of the course. Indicative Contents Introduction The Concept of Southeast Asia; the Physical and Ethnic Geography of Southeast Asia, the Need for Historical and Cultural Understanding; Land, People and Languages 186

195 Waterways: From Early Settlements to the First Maritime Kingdom Evidence from Prehistory; Farming and Metalworking; Early States and Indian Influences; Funan; Champa; Srivijiaya; Waterways; Settlements and Trade Basic Social Structures and Family System Southeast Asian Kingship; Kingship and Display; Angkor and Cambodia; Early Javanese Kingdoms; Borobudur; Prambanan; Eastern Java; Majapahit; Pagan and Burma; A Tai Century; Ayudhya; The Indian Legacy Multiplicity of Beliefs: The Religions of Southeast Asia Hinduism; Buddhism; Theravada Buddhism; Confucianism; Taoism; Islam; Christianity; Messianic and Millenarian Beliefs Cultural Tradition in Southeast Asia Literature and Arts; Popular Culture; the Relations between Buddhism and Southeast Philosophy; the Interaction between Elitist and Popular Culture; Folk Culture European Economic Advances in Southeast Asia European Contacts and Early Colonization; Colonization by Trade; Dutch Territorial Conquests in Java; the Expansion of European Control; Britain; French Indochina; USA; Consolidation of Independence in Siam New National Cultures in Southeast Asia Early Resistance; The Beginning of Nationalism; Social Change: Education, language and Literacy; International Influence on the Emergence of Nationalism/ Religion and Nationalism; Secular Nationalism; Bendict Anderson s notion of Southeast Asian Cultural Nationalism Violence and Transition: Occupation, Independence and Cold War Japanese Occupation; Mobilization; Japanese Trained Armies; Resistance; Economic and Social Disruption; the End of Japanese Occupation; The Indochina War; the Agony of Cambodia and Laos; Independence in Other Countries: Malaysia and Singapore Economic Development and Democracy: Southeast Asia in Recent decades Accelerated Economic Growth; the Fifth Little Dragon: Thailand; Authoritarian Rule and Economic Development; ASEAN; Economic Crisis in the late 2000s, Corruption and Economic Crimes in Philippine; Singapore s Competition with Hong Kong as a Financial Center; Critical Social Issues in Contemporary Southeast Asia Muslim and Terrorism in Indonesia; Prostitution and AIDs in Thailand; Anti-Chinese sentiment in Malaysia and Philippine Teaching/ Learning Approach During lectures and tutorials, interactive approach is adopted. Students are required to actively participate in discussion and presentation. Audio and visual materials are also used to enhance students understanding of the teaching content. Each tutorial, students will be divided into groups and required to present an assigned topic for discussion. They will be occasionally required to participate in fieldwork and explore historical sites in Hong Kong and mainland China under the guidance of the lecturer. 187

196 Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies; written reports, tests and examination designed to assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Wolters, O.W., History, Culture, and Religion in Southeast Asia, Ithaca: Cornell University Press, Christie, Clive J., A Modern History of Southeast Asia: Decolonization, Nationalism and Separatism, London: Tauris Academic Studies, 1996 References Antlov, Hans and Tønnession, Stein, eds., Imperial Policy and Southeast Asian Nationalism, Richmond, Surrey: Curzon Press, Hall, D.G.E., A History of South-East Asia, 4th edition, London: Macmillan Press, Pluvier, J.M., Southeast Asia from Colonialism to Independence, Kuala Lumpur, Oxford University Press, Purcell, V., The Chinese in Southeast Asia, London, Oxford University Press, Tate, D. J. M., The Making of Southeast Asia, two vols., Kuala Lumpur: Oxford University Press, Reid, Anthony, Southeast Asia in the Age of Commerce, , two vols., New Haven: Yale University Press, Steinberg, David Joel, In Search of Southeast Asia, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, Vatikiotis, Richard R.J., Political changes in Southeast Asia, London: Routledge, 梁 英 明 : 近 現 代 東 南 亞 ( ) 北 京 : 北 京 大 學 出 版 社,1994 年 余 定 邦 喻 常 森 編 : 近 代 中 國 與 東 南 亞 關 係 史 廣 州 : 中 山 大 學 出 版 社,1999 年 188

197 CC3024 Japanese III Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction Japanese (supplemented by English and/or Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisite CC2031 (Japanese II), or a minimum of 84 hours training on Japanese and/or equivalent proficiency of Japanese, which must be supported by an official document Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Preferred Background Knowledge An ability to understand and write Chinese characters Aims This course is a continuation of CC2031 Japanese II. It aims to further develop students competence in acquiring more vocabulary and complicated grammar through more grammatical, reading, writing, speaking and listening practices of Japanese language. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: develop a cumulated vocabulary repertoire of about 1,600 words (including Kanji, commonly used expressions and phrases). read and understand longer passages. write clear and appropriate Japanese sentences with accurate grammar (especially on the three verb categories and their different verb conjugations) and sentence skills. speak and use simple and daily used expressions to initiate and respond to different social contexts, such as requesting, giving permission, declining, and expressing one s ability and experience, as well as to engage in different situational conversations. understand Japanese culture in more depth and relate it to application of the language. Indicative Contents Vocabulary More vocabulary of general terms, adverbs and conjunctions Grammar Three categories of verbs and their different conjugations (e.g. dictionary, affirmative, negative and -te forms); continuous verb form; different verb forms for request, duty, obligation, permission, and prohibition; expressions to indicate ability and experience; how to connect two or more actions/events, alternative or indefinite number of actions/events; more particles Reading /Writing Read longer passages and understand more elaborated comprehension; use simple and complex sentences to write short compositions 189

198 Speaking / Listening Substitution, transformation and expansion drills; oral response drills; situational conversations; listen to short passages; conversational practices to initiate and give appropriate responses to different questions and communicate in different social contexts Culture / Society Selected topics on Japanese culture and society Teaching/Learning Approach Through direct drills, practices and activities in classes, students will participate actively in the learning process. A multimedia approach will be adopted whereby students will be exposed to audio and visual materials to enhance their understanding of the Japanese language and culture. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including written assignments, oral presentations, case studies, tests and examination designed to develop and assess students communication skills in the Japanese language. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 II ( みんなの 日 本 語 ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局, 2002 (First half of the textbook will be used.) References 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 ( 讀 本 篇 ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,2004 年 スリーエーネットワーク 編 やさしい 作 文 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,2003 年 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I, II ( 句 型 練 習 冊 ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,2003 年 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I, II ( 練 習 C 会 話 イラストシート ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,2002 年 向 日 葵 出 版 社 編 日 本 語 90 日 1 & 2 (90 Days of Japanese Language 1 &2 ) 香 港 : 向 日 葵 出 版 社,2002 年 大 新 出 版 社 新 日 本 語 の 基 礎 台 北 : 大 新 出 版 社,1998 年 日 本 語 ジャーナル 編 集 部 日 本 生 活 事 情 東 京 : 株 式 会 社 アルク,1993 年 190

199 CC3025 Japanese IV Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction Japanese (supplemented by English and/or Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisite CC3024 (Japanese III), or a minimum of 126 hours training on Japanese and/or equivalent proficiency of Japanese, which must be supported by an official document Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Preferred Background Knowledge An ability to understand and write Chinese characters Aims This course is a continuation of CC3024 Japanese III. It aims to further develop and strengthen students competence in acquiring more vocabulary and a higher level of grammar through more grammatical, reading, writing, speaking and listening practices of Japanese language. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: demonstrate similar language proficiency skills as required by the Japanese-Language Proficiency Test Level 4 administered by The Japan Foundation and Japan Educational Exchanges and Services; develop a cumulated vocabulary repertoire of about 2,000 words (including Kanji, commonly used expressions and phrases); read and understand longer, more complicated passages; write clear and appropriate Japanese sentences using more complicated grammatical elements, accurate grammar, and varied sentence skills; speak and utilize commonly used expressions to initiate and respond to different social contexts, especially exhibiting the ability to converse in appropriate stylistic registers; and understand Japanese culture in more depth and relate it to application of the language. Indicative Contents Vocabulary More vocabulary of general terms, adverbs and conjunctions. Grammar Two levels of speech (polite style verb form vs. plain style verb form) and their different linguistic expressions / verb conjugations; verbs of quoting and telling what one thinks; expressions of guessing; verbs of giving and receiving objects and acts; conditional expressions and verb forms; using a simple sentence as a noun modifier to form complex sentences; more particles. 191

200 Reading / Writing Read longer passages and understand more complicated comprehension; use a variety of short and complex sentence structures to write longer compositions. Speaking / Listening Substitution, transformation and expansion drills; oral response drills; situational conversations; listen to longer passages; conversational practices to initiate and give appropriate responses to different questions and communicate in different social contexts by using appropriate stylistic registers. Culture / Society Selected topics on Japanese culture and society. Teaching/Learning Approach Through direct drills, practices and activities in classes, students will participate actively in the learning process. A multimedia approach will be adopted whereby students will be exposed to audio and visual materials to enhance their understanding of the Japanese language and culture. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including written assignments, oral presentations, case studies, tests and examination designed to develop and assess students communication skills in the Japanese language. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 II ( みんなの 日 本 語 ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局, 2002 年 (Second half of the textbook will be used.) References 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 ( 讀 本 篇 ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,2004 年 スリーエーネットワーク 編 やさしい 作 文 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,2003 年 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I, II ( 句 型 練 習 冊 ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,2003 年 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I, II ( 練 習 C 会 話 イラストシート ) 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,2002 年 向 日 葵 出 版 社 編 日 本 語 90 日 1 & 2 (90 Days of Japanese Language 1 & 2 ) 香 港 : 向 日 葵 出 版 社,2002 年 192

201 大 新 出 版 社 新 日 本 語 の 基 礎 台 北 : 大 新 書 局,1998 年 日 本 語 ジャーナル 編 集 部 日 本 生 活 事 情 東 京 : 株 式 会 社 アルク,1993 年 193

202 CC3121 Business Environment in China Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-Science Medium of Instruction English, supplemented by Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese) Mode of Study 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject aims at providing students with a comprehensive view of the general business environment viz. political, infrastructural, legal, institutional, economic, cultural and social conditions in the Chinese mainland. As a result, students are able to analyse and understand such important variables which are essential and crucial for investors in making decisions and managing their investment and business activities in China. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: Appreciate the range of factors that would determine the business environment in China. Understand how each of the following factors affects China s business environment: political factors, legal and other institutional factors, economic factors, cultural and social factors. Appraise the issues relating to the analysis of business environment in China. Apply the relevant knowledge to further their understanding and in making decision in the business activities in China. Indicative Contents Business Environment Concept of business environment; Make up of business environment. Organisation and internal environment Firms in China; Types of business organisation; Organisation objectives; Internal environment. Elements of the external business environment Political, economic, and legal environment in China; Social, cultural and demographic issues in China. China and the Global Business Environment International business environment; Competitiveness environment; China s Entry into the WTO and Implications. 194

203 Teaching/Learning Approach Theories, concepts, basic facts and updates on latest developments will be delivered in lectures. In the tutorials, students will be encouraged to apply what they have learnt in the lectures and from readings to analyse the current issues and cases that are related to China s business environment through activities such as group discussions, debates and presentations. The medium of instruction will be English, supplemented by Chinese for terms used in China. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and examination, to develop and assess the critical thinking as well as the analytical and communication skills. Students will be required to actively participate in the learning process through reading articles, doing project and conducting self-study. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Zhou Li Nong: China Business. Prentice Hall (latest edition). References Fumio Itoh (ed.). China in the Twenty-first Century: Politics, economy, and society. Tokyo; New York: United Nations University Press, Henry C. Steele and Oliver H.M. Yau. China business: Challenges in the 21 st century. Hong Kong: Chinese University Press, Palmer A., and Hartley B., The Business Environment, McGraw Hill (latest ed.). 195

204 CC3122 China s Economy Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-Science Medium of Instruction English, supplemented by Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written Chinese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject aims at providing students with concepts for understanding the economy of China since 1949, with emphasis on its post 1978 reform period. Students are expected to explain why China was successful in maintaining a high economic growth in the past two decades. Moreover, they will be able to analyse the role of China in the world today and identify challenges China will be facing in the future. Therefore, studying this subject will help develop students analytical skills and critical thinking in their life-long learning. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: Understand the historical background of China s economic development Recognise China s achievements and setbacks in its economic performance since economic reforms Identify the range of factors that would determine economic performance in China and analyse how various factors affect China s overall economic performance Review and generalise economic developments in important sectors in China Compare economic developments in major economic regions in China Identify and evaluate the opportunities and challenges resulting from China s entry into the WTO Indicative Contents History of the Development of China s Economy Lessons from history; Experiments in economic policies and political upheavals; Economic Reforms since Deng s open door policy; Future reforms: problems and prospects. China s Macroeconomy: Overview Growth; Economic fluctuations; Economic policies; Institutional factors affecting the macroeconomy; Political movements, power struggles and the macroeconomy. Topics in China s Economic Developments China and the world economy; Investment: domestic and foreign; Consumption; Demographics and human capital; Institutional developments. 196

205 Regional Differences in Economic Development Individual Sectors Automobile Industry; Retail & Consumer Product Industry; Telecommunication Industry; Banking and financial system. WTO: Changes and issues Teaching/Learning Approach Well designed questions covering the learning outcomes will be asked to raise students interest and road map will be used to get students prepared for the lecture. The same set of questions will be asked at the end of the lecture to ensure the learning outcomes have been achieved. Occasional problem-based learning activities related to current economic issues happened in China might be arranged to encourage student participation and critical thinking. Students are required to keep on reading news and they need to explain and comment on their news cutting during the tutorials. It can reinforce their understanding by applying the knowledge they have learnt and strengthen their communication skills. Activities such as group discussions, debates and presentations will also be arranged for them to analyse the current issues in China s economy. Assessment Approach Effective assessment tools will be used, including debates, job interviews, case studies, presentations, written reports, tests and examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. Students will be required to actively participate in the learning process through reading articles, doing project and conducting self-study. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook There is no prescribed textbook. This is a dynamic topic mainly involving current issues. Lecture summary and supplementary notes will be distributed from time to time. References Chow, Gregory C. China s Economic Transformation. Malden, Mass.: Blackwell Publishers (latest ed.). Robert F.Ash and Y.Y. Kueh, The Chinese Economy Under Deng Xiaoping. Oxford University Press (latest ed.). Useful Websites ( 中 國 資 訊 行 ) (Ministry of Commerce of the People s PRC) (Trade Development Council) (World Trade Organization) 197

206 (China Economic Information) (National Bureau of Statistics) (China Daily) (People s Daily) (Institute of World Economics and Politics) Journals, Periodicals China Business Review China Economic Review The China Quarterly 198

207 CC3129 商 貿 普 通 話 Business Putonghua 程 度 3 學 分 3 學 科 性 質 非 科 學 教 學 語 言 普 通 話 學 習 模 式 28 小 時 課 堂 講 授 14 小 時 導 修 課 修 讀 的 必 備 條 件 CC2012 初 級 普 通 話 評 估 方 法 60% 課 堂 習 作 40% 期 終 考 試 課 程 目 的 : 根 據 學 生 在 CC2012 初 級 普 通 話 課 程 中 所 建 立 的 普 通 話 知 識 和 漢 語 拼 音 技 巧, 學 生 將 在 課 程 中 強 化 運 用 漢 語 拼 音 的 能 力, 並 廣 泛 地 應 用 商 務 情 景 語 彙 及 會 話, 期 望 學 生 能 達 到 一 個 高 水 準 的 普 通 話 表 達 能 力, 使 他 們 在 將 來 工 作 的 環 境 中 更 好 地 應 用 所 學 的 普 通 話 說 話 技 巧, 同 時 也 有 助 他 們 達 成 終 身 學 習 的 目 標 學 習 目 的 : 在 完 成 本 課 程 後, 學 生 將 獲 得 以 下 訓 練 : 強 化 漢 語 拼 音 練 習 及 普 通 話 正 音 訓 練 普 通 話 與 廣 州 話 的 對 比, 使 學 生 能 說 純 正 的 普 通 話 並 擁 有 自 學 普 通 話 的 能 力 廣 泛 地 應 用 商 務 情 景 語 彙 及 會 話, 使 學 生 熟 悉 將 來 工 作 的 語 言 環 境 並 能 以 標 準 的 普 通 話 與 老 闆 客 戶 商 業 夥 伴 代 理 等 各 方 進 行 有 效 的 溝 通 學 習 商 務 演 講 談 判 和 投 訴 的 技 巧, 使 學 生 能 學 習 到 有 關 的 技 巧 以 應 付 將 來 工 作 所 需 及 學 習 所 需, 也 能 增 強 學 生 的 自 信 課 程 內 容 : 漢 語 拼 音 強 化 練 習 及 辨 音 訓 練 普 通 話 正 音 訓 練 普 通 話 辭 彙 語 法 的 規 範 表 達 普 通 話 與 廣 州 話 對 比 及 翻 譯 商 務 情 景 語 彙 及 會 話, 尤 其 是 關 於 產 品 介 紹 及 推 銷 定 價 訂 貨 傭 金 裝 運 條 件 包 裝 付 款 方 式 保 險 合 同 索 賠 代 理 的 會 話 商 務 文 章 朗 讀 產 品 推 銷 及 介 紹 工 作 環 境 介 紹 及 工 作 經 驗 分 享 面 試 技 巧 199

208 商 務 演 講 ( 投 資 分 析 市 場 營 銷 分 析 等 ) 商 務 談 判 商 務 投 訴 教 學 模 式 : 主 講 課 集 中 教 授 商 務 情 景 語 彙 及 會 話, 以 及 講 解 面 試 商 務 演 講 商 務 談 判 和 商 務 投 訴 的 技 巧, 亦 會 討 論 普 通 話 辭 彙 語 法 的 規 範 表 達 教 學 模 式 以 課 本 教 授 錄 音 聆 聽 角 色 扮 演 小 組 討 論 爲 主 導 修 課 集 中 訓 練 廣 州 話 與 普 通 話 對 譯 說 話 練 習 漢 語 拼 音 強 化 練 習 及 普 通 話 正 音 訓 練, 亦 會 介 紹 一 般 工 作 環 境 及 分 享 工 作 經 驗 教 學 模 式 將 以 課 堂 練 習 商 務 文 章 朗 讀 角 色 扮 演 小 組 討 論 和 辯 論 爲 主 評 估 形 式 評 估 形 式 有 兩 種 : 連 續 評 估 和 期 終 考 試 連 續 評 估 包 括 : (i) 一 次 個 人 口 語 評 估 : 將 以 個 人 演 講 的 方 式, 進 行 一 次 不 少 於 5 分 鐘 的 商 務 演 講 內 容 可 自 行 選 擇 產 品 介 紹, 市 場 投 資 分 析 或 市 場 營 銷 分 析 等 (ii) 一 次 小 組 口 語 評 估 : 學 員 將 分 為 四 人 一 組, 自 選 題 目, 進 行 不 少 於 10 分 鐘 的 商 務 談 判 情 景 會 話 (iii) 一 次 課 堂 測 驗 : 內 容 包 括 漢 語 拼 音 辨 音 ; 漢 語 拼 音 與 詞 語 及 句 子 的 互 相 譯 寫 ; 粵 語 方 言 詞 語 短 句 與 普 通 話 的 對 譯 等 形 式 期 末 考 試 分 口 試 和 筆 試 兩 次 進 行 課 本 : 史 湄 鄭 定 歐 編 著 : 商 貿 普 通 話 香 港 : 香 港 城 市 大 學 專 業 進 修 學 院 出 版 (1998 年 10 月 第 二 版 或 2003 年 2 月 第 二 版 ) 參 考 書 : 中 國 社 會 科 學 院 語 言 研 究 所 詞 典 編 輯 室 編 : 現 代 漢 語 詞 典 簡 體 字 修 訂 本 (1996 年 7 月 ) 北 京 : 商 務 印 書 館 或 繁 體 字 版 本 (2001 年 7 月 ) 香 港 : 商 務 印 書 館 200

209 曾 子 凡 編 著 : 廣 州 話 普 通 話 口 語 詞 對 譯 手 冊 香 港 : 三 聯 書 店 ( 香 港 ) 有 限 公 司 (2002 年 7 月, 電 腦 光 碟 版 ) 李 明 石 佩 文 : 漢 語 普 通 話 語 音 辨 正 北 京 : 北 京 語 言 文 化 大 學 出 版 社,1998 年 施 仲 謀 編 著 : 廣 州 話 普 通 話 語 音 對 照 手 冊 香 港 : 華 風 書 局 有 限 公 司,1986 年 曾 子 凡 編 著 : 香 港 人 學 說 普 通 話 香 港 : 三 聯 書 店 ( 香 港 ) 有 限 公 司,1991 年 201

210 CC3135 Inventory and Warehousing Management Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisite Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims The aim of this subject is to provide students with analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of inventory and warehousing management knowledge and principles. This subject emphasises the importance of the roles and functions of inventory and warehousing operations in logistics and supply chain management. This subject will also provide students with the knowledge and skills that are necessary for the design and management of warehousing operations. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognise the importance of optimum inventory and efficient warehousing management in business appreciate cargo storage and materials handling systems which provide a good academic and vocational foundation for a career in related fields present inventory and warehousing issues in an integrated logistics flow which reflects sound business practices develop approaches to define, analyse and solve inventory and warehousing problems Indicative Contents Introduction to Inventory and Warehousing Management Importance of inventory management; Types of inventories; Types and functions of warehouse. Materials Handling Materials handling systems and objectives; Types of handling equipment; Advantages and limitations of different handling equipment; Selection of the most appropriate equipment in specific situations. 202

211 Inventory Strategy and Management Objectives of inventory management; Inventory costs; Economic order quantity (EOQ); Fixed order quantity and fixed order cycle inventory control; Inventory models; Inventory management concept and practice: JIT, MRP, DRP. Warehousing Operations and Management Objectives of warehousing management; Warehouse layout and design; Physical control and security; Automation and IT systems in warehousing. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the understanding and explanation of key inventory, materials handling and warehousing management concepts and principles. Occasional corporation visits and videos might be arranged to facilitate students learning. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of concepts taught in lectures and apply the knowledge and principles in practical situations. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including in-class exercises, case studies, individual and group projects and presentations, term tests and an examination to develop and assess students analytical skills and oral/written communication skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Arnold, J.R. Tony and Chapman, Stephen N. Introduction to Materials Management. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.). References Ackerman, K. B. Practical Handbook of Warehousing. Chapman & Hall, NY. (latest ed.). Ballou, R. H. Business Logistics/Supply Chain Management. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Bloomberg, D. J., Lemay, S. and Hanna, J. B. Logistics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Bowersox, Closs, Cooper. Supply Chain Logistics Management. McGraw-Hill Irwin. (latest ed.). Mulcahy, D. E. Warehouse Distribution and Operations Handbook. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Muller, M. Essentials of Inventory Management. New York: American Management Association. (latest ed.). Murphy, P.R. and Wood, D.F. Contemporary Logistics. Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ. (latest ed.). 203

212 Recommended Journals Business Logistics Logistics Management E Logistics World ( ) International Journal of Logistics Management ( Logistics World ( ) 204

213 CC3143 Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with fundamental understanding of principles, concepts and application of integrated logistics and supply chain management in the business context. It is also designed to equip students with the necessary skills and techniques for coping with logistics and supply chain challenges and problems in an ever-changing business environment. Critical thinking and analytical skills development are accomplished through lectures, case studies and experiential learning. This subject helps students to develop the ability and knowledge in logistics and supply chain which will prepare them for further studies, employment and life-long learning. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognise the role and structure of logistics and supply chains in the business context integrate knowledge and skills in logistics and supply chain operations across a wide range of business domains and levels appreciate the importance of effective and efficient utilization of information technology for logistics and supply chain management identify appropriate procurement strategies and courses of action at the functional and business levels evaluate the functions and performances of various domestic and international transportation systems utilise both quantitative (e.g. Economic Order Quantities) and qualitative techniques (e.g. Just In Time strategy) to design an appropriate inventory management strategy This subject enhances students professional competence and develops their all-roundedness on logistics and supply chain operations, critical thinking and problem-solving skills. 205

214 Indicative Contents Role of Logistics and Supply Chain in the Economy and Organisation What logistics and supply chain are; Macro and micro logistics; Global logistics; Value-added role of logistics / supply chain, supply chain relationships; Problem and challenges facing supply chain managers. Demand Management Customer demand and services; Order fulfilment. Procurement Management Role and function of procurement, e-procurement; Procurement strategies. Inventory and Warehousing Management Reasons for holding inventory; Inventory costs; Inventory decision making; Role and functions of warehousing; Material handling; Packaging. Logistics Information System E-logistics; Radio frequency and barcode technologies; Vendor Managed System (VMI). Transportation and Distribution Management Intermodalism (air/sea/road/rail and pipeline transportation); Vehicle routing and scheduling; Cargo distribution management. Business Logistics / Supply Chain Strategy Outsourcing; Third-party logistics providers; Strategic alliances. Teaching/Learning Approach Interactive lectures are specifically designed to introduce key concepts, roles and functions of logistics and supply chain operations coupled with specific reference to current and global issues. Case studies and problem-based learning activities may also be arranged to encourage student participation and higher order thinking. Student-centred tutorials are developed to strengthen students understanding of the knowledge covered in lectures. A variety of effective teaching tools such as case studies on current issues with discussion forums, group presentations of task-based exercises and company visits will be used throughout students learning pathway. Assessment Approach Effective assessment tools, including presentations, reflective journals, objective tests, business case studies, projects, End-of-Chapter type problems, portfolio and examinations will be adopted to develop and polish student s critical thinking, analytical skills, teamwork and communication skills. 206

215 Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Donalds, W. Logistics: An Introduction to Supply Chain Management. Palgrave Macmillan. (latest ed.). References Ballou, R. H. Business Logistics/Supply Chain Management and Logware CD Package. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Bloomberg, D., Lemay, S. and Hanna, J. B. Logistics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Bowersox, Closs, Cooper. Supply Chain Logistics Management. McGraw-Hill Irwin. (latest ed.). Bowersox, D. J. and Closs, D. J. Logistics Management The integrated supply chain process. McGraw-Hill International Edition. (latest ed.). Coyle, Bardi, Langley. The Management of Business Logistics A supply chain perspective. Thomson, South-Western. (latest ed.). Handfield, R. B. and Nicholas, Ernest L. JR. Introduction to Supply Chain Management. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Kaminsky and Simchi-levi. Designing and Managing the Supply Chain: Concepts, strategies and case studies. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). Martin, C. Logistics and Supply Chain Management. Financial Times, Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Recommended Journals Business Logistics Logistics Management Logistics and Transport Focus E Logistics World ( ) International Journal of Logistics Management ( Logistics News Journal ( Logistics World ( ) Supply Management ( 207

216 CC3144 Practicum in Workplace Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-science Medium of English Instruction (Language used in the workplace will depend on the requirement of individual industry partners) Mode of Study 300 working hours (or above) subject to the arrangement between the College and the industry partner or equivalent combinations* (such as 150 working hours, and 21 hours of workshops provided by the industry partner or the staff designated by the College (designated staff)). * The weight combination of working hours and workshop hours may vary (in proportional basis) depending on the nature of the work and the field. However, the combination must consist of at least 150 hours of work experience. Prerequisite Nil Exclusion CC3144 Practicum in Workplace and CC3145 Extensive Practicum in Workplace are mutually exclusive. Attendance For the mode of study with workshop component, students are required to attend at least 75% of the workshops. Assessment 100% Continuous Assessment (Pass/Fail grades): (I) Assessment by the industry partner: 50% on assessment by the industry partner (II) Assessment by the designated staff 25% on learning progress reports 25% on reflective journals/log books Students are required to pass in both components (I & II) in order to get an overall pass in the subject. Aims This subject provides students opportunities to develop practical skills and attributes such as good attitudes and commitment through practicum in a real world setting. This subject also helps students to apply and reflect on the theories and concepts learnt from other subjects. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: Understand the organisational settings and develop professional knowledge and essential practical skills required in workplaces of their study areas. Apply the theories and concepts learnt into real world setting. Prepare for the realities of workplaces. Develop attributes for all-roundedness such as independent thinking, good attitudes, commitment and interpersonal communication skills in workplaces. Identify their strengths and weaknesses in a workplace environment. 208

217 Structure of the Practicum Students may consider one of the following periods for their practicum: Semester 1: the required working hours should normally be completed by the end of Semester 1 Semester 2: the required working hours should normally be completed by the end of Semester 2. Summer Term: the required working hours should normally be completed by the end of the academic year. Any working schedule that deviates from the above should be completed either within two consecutive semesters or one semester follows by one term or vice versa subject to the approval of the designated staff. Work Nature The nature of work must be within the same or similar scopes of study areas. Students must obtain approval from the designated staff on the work nature before commencement. Teaching/Learning Approach Workshops and consultation sessions will be provided to participants. Students will be guided to write learning objectives, progress reports and reflective essays throughout the period of practicum. Review meetings with concerned parties will be conducted by the designated staff. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assessment report by the industry partner, learning progress reports, reflective journals or log books assessed by the designated staff. Indicative Readings Designated staff may assign or recommended readings or reference books to students if necessary. 209

218 CC3145 Extensive Practicum in Workplace Level 3 Credits 6 Nature Non-science Medium of Instruction English (Language used in the workplace will depend on the requirement of individual industry partners) Mode of Study 600 working hours (or above) subject to the arrangement between the College and the industry partner or equivalent combinations* (such as 300 working hours, and 42 hours of workshops provided by the industry partner or the staff designated by the College (designated staff)). * The weight combination of working hours and workshop hours may vary (in proportional basis) depending on the nature of the work and the field. However, the combination must consist of at least 300 hours of work experience. Prerequisite(s) Nil Exclusion CC3144 Practicum in Workplace and CC3145 Extensive Practicum in Workplace are mutually exclusive. Attendance For the mode of study with workshop component, students are required to attend at least 75% of the workshops. Assessment 100% Continuous Assessment (Pass/Fail grades): (I) Assessment by the industry partner: 50% on assessment by the industry partner (II) Assessment by the designated staff 25% on learning progress reports 25% on reflective journals/log books Students are required to pass in both components (I & II) in order to get an overall pass in the subject. Aims This subject provides students opportunities to develop practical skills and attributes such as good attitudes and commitment through practicum in a real world setting. This subject also helps students to apply and reflect on the theories and concepts learnt from other subjects. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: Understand the organizational settings and develop professional knowledge and essential practical skills required in workplaces of their study areas. Apply the theories and concepts learnt into real world setting. Prepare for the realities of workplaces. Develop attributes for all-roundness such as independent thinking, good attitudes, commitment and interpersonal communication skills in workplaces. Identify their strengths and weaknesses in a workplace environment. 210

219 Structure of the Practicum Students may consider one of the following periods for their practicum: Semester 1: the required working hours should normally be completed by the end of Semester 1. Semester 2: the required working hours should normally be completed by the end of Semester 2. Summer Term: the required working hours should normally be completed by the end of the academic year. Any working schedule that deviates from the above should be completed either within two consecutive semesters or one semester follows by one term or vice versa subject to the approval of the designated staff. Work Nature The nature of work must be within the same or similar scopes of study areas. Students must obtain approval from the designated staff on the work nature before commencement. Teaching/Learning Approach Workshops and consultation sessions will be provided to participants. Students will be guided to write learning objectives, progress reports and reflective essays throughout the period of practicum. Review meetings with concerned parties will be conducted by the designated staff. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assessment report by the industry partner, learning progress reports, reflective journals or log books assessed by the designated staff. Indicative Readings Designated staff may assign or recommended readings or reference books to students if necessary. 211

220 CC3150 Organisational Behaviour Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-Science Medium of Instruction English Mode of Study 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Exclusion CC2108 Organisational Behaviour Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject introduces the key concepts and theories of human behaviour, and highlights their significant impact on the management of organisations. It prepares students to further develop their knowledge in the field of management either through continuous professional development or academic studies. This subject will also help develop students critical thinking for their life-long learning. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: Comprehend the key concepts and theories relevant to the management of workplace behaviour at individual, group and organisational levels. Apply the relevant concepts and theories to analyse practical organisational issues, and suggest proper solutions to address the issues. Appraise the importance of diversity in organisations. Indicative Contents Individual Behaviours Values and ethical behaviour; Attitudes and job satisfaction; Personality and emotions; Perception and individual decision making; Motivation. Group Behaviours Group behaviour; Teams and team diversity; Communication; Leadership; Power and politics; Conflict and negotiation. Organisational Behaviours Organisational culture; Organisational change and development; Resistance to organisational change; Approaches to managing organisational change; Cross-cultural organisational behaviour. 212

221 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts and theories in the topics of the syllabus. Real-life examples and business-related case studies will be presented to help students understand the implications of the concepts and theories. Case studies, discussions of problems, video shows and games are employed in tutorials to help students apply the concepts and theories learned into real-life business situations. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and examination which are designed to develop and assess students critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Robbins, Stephen P., Organizational Behavior, Prentice Hall, (latest ed.). References Ivancevich, John M., Konopaske, Robert, Matteson, Michael T., Organizational Behavior and Management, McGraw Hill/Irwin, (latest ed.). Kinicki, Angelo, Kreitner, Robert, Organizational Behavior: Key Concepts, Skills and Best Practices, McGraw Hill/Irwin, (latest ed.). Luthans, Fred, Organizational Behavior, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, (latest ed.). McShane, Steven L., Von Glinow, Mary A., Organizational Behavior, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, (latest ed.). Moorhead, Gregory, Griffin, Ricky W., Organizational Behavior: Managing people and organizations, Houghton Mifflin, (latest ed.). 213

222 CC3153 Principles of Knowledge Management Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-Science Medium of Instruction English Mode of Study 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with a basic understanding on the concepts and models of knowledge management and illustrate how these concepts can help organisations to sustain their competitive advantages. This subject also helps students to acquire the principles of a dynamic knowledge-based workplace that calls for new management laws and techniques to undertake business in the information age. This subject is designed to equip students with the necessary foundation to help organisations to create new intellectual or informational assets in today s digital and knowledge-based economy. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: Understand the importance of knowledge management and apply those basic concepts and theories in assisting organisations in the creation and management of its important assets, i.e. knowledge. Have an awareness of the nature and dynamics of the new knowledge-based workplace. Identify the forces and drivers of the new knowledge-based workplace. Appreciate the role of electronic knowledge management and other management principles to sustain competitive advantage in the knowledge-based workplace. Demonstrate basic ability to apply and integrate concepts to develop, transfer, share, adapt, apply and create knowledge within an organisation. Indicative Contents Introduction to Knowledge Management Defining knowledge management; Objectives of knowledge management; Knowledge management and the e-business space; Knowledge management challenges; Critical success factors; Knowledge and competitive advantages. Knowledge and Learning Organisations Knowledge management and learning in organisations; Types of organisational knowledge; E- learning characteristics; Strategic importance and effectiveness of e-learning. 214

223 Capturing and Sharing Knowledge Relationship of information technology, information management and knowledge management; Types of knowledge shared; Why people share or don t share; Recommendations; Organisational challenges. Organisational Culture, Change Management and Communities of Practice Knowledge flows and networks; Characteristics of organisation culture; Knowledge workers and roles; Driving forces of the knowledge-based workplace; Introducing communities of practice. Role of Information Technology in Knowledge Management Requirements of knowledge workers; Technology aspect of knowledge management; Introducing the intranet; Differentiating intranet, internet and extranet; Intranet business issues; Components, applications and benefits of an intranet. Challenges and opportunities of a corporate intranet; Introducing portals; Benefits of portals; Enterprise knowledge portals; Groupware workflow and document management; Overview of data warehousing. Knowledge Management Frameworks and Processes Introducing the knowledge management framework; Knowledge creation, transfer, storage, retrieval, application and their IT applications; Managing intellectual capital; Protecting knowledge; Knowledge harvesting. Business Case and Strategy for Knowledge Management Importance and essentials of knowledge management strategy; Best practices; Guidelines for knowledge strategy formulation; Applying concepts to existing knowledge management business models and cases; The business development process; Phases of knowledge management project; Knowledge management implementation. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of basic Knowledge Management concepts, with specific reference to related business models. Tutorials provide students with an opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life situations. The activities in tutorials include group discussions, and presentations of case studies, videos questions and problem sets. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group projects and presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and examination which are being designed to develop and assess students critical thinking as well as analytical skills relating to knowledge management. 215

224 Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Ashok Jashapara, Knowledge Management An integrated approach, Pearson (latest ed.). References Becerra-Fernandez, Gonzalez, Sabherwal, Knowledge Management Challenges, Solutions and Technologies, Prentice Hall (latest ed.). Davenport, T.H. and Prusak, L., Working Knowledge: How Organisation Manage What They Know, Harvard Business School Press (latest ed.). Despres, C. and Chauvel, D., Knowledge Horizons: The Present and the Promise of Knowledge Management, Butterworth-Heinemann, Boston (latest ed.). Klein, G., Sources of Power: How People Make Decisions, MIT Press, Cambridge (latest ed.). Liebowitz, J., Knowledge Management Handbook, CRC Press, Boca Raton (latest ed.). Stewart. T.A., Intellectual Capital: The New Wealth of Organisations, Currency Doubleday, New York (latest ed.). Sveiby, K.E., The New Organisational Wealth: Managing & Measuring Knowledge-based Assets, Berrett-Koehler, San Francisco (latest ed.). Tiwana, A., The Knowledge Management Toolkit: Orchestrating IT, Strategy, and Knowledge Platforms, Prentice Hall (latest ed.). Yau, Liao, Knowledge Management: The Key to Success in the 21 st Century, Hong Kong: Chinese Management Research Center, City University of Hong Kong (latest ed.). Brint KM Virtual Library, Davenport, T. Some principles of knowledge management, Google directory for KM Tools 216

225 CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites CC2201 Principles of Programming Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject aims to equip students with fundamental database concepts. It provides students with the general knowledge of database architecture and technology. It helps them to understand the database technology potentials. It also provides students with the fundamental knowledge to evaluate various database management systems of different data models against organization needs and make the appropriate selection for an organization. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: demonstrate understanding of the basic concepts of database systems acquire fundamental knowledge to evaluate various database management systems of different data models justify the appropriate selection of database management system for an organization assess the value of database technology potentials effectively communicate information and analysis of database systems Indicative Contents Basic Concepts Of Database System Database and its objectives; Database management system (DBMS) and its components; American National Standards Institute/Scalable Processor ARChitecture (ANSI/SPARC) threelevel system architecture; Data independence. Relational Data Model Relational structure; Relational languages: relational algebra, relational calculus, structured query language (SQL); Relational constraints: entity constraints, referential integrity constraints and foreign keys; Relational view definition and management. 217

226 Future Directions Of Data Base Object-oriented and post-relational systems; Distributed database/database management system (DB/DBMS); Mobile databases; Web databases; Logic-based systems: data warehousing and data mining. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the concepts, the principles and key issues in data base systems using an interactive approach in order to develop students knowledge base for evaluation and justification of database systems. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen and consolidate their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures. Laboratory activities will be conducted to familiarize the students with database application programming techniques. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including laboratory database programming exercises, presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess database application programming skills as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Rob, P. and Coronel, C. Database Systems: Design, Implementation, and Management. Thomson Course Technology. (latest ed.). References Garcia-Molina, H., Ullman, J. D. and Widom, J. Database System Implementation. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Pratt, P. J. and Adamski, J. J. Concepts of Database Management. Thomson Course Technology. (latest ed.). Ramakrishnan, R. and Gehrke, J. Database Management Systems. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Silberschartz, A., Korth, H. F. and Sudarshan, S. Database System Concepts. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). 218

227 CC3202 Software Engineering Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites CC2201 Principles of Programming Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject aims to present students with concepts in the software engineering field. A variety of ways in which software engineering is approached will also be discussed, with the major focus on the issues of software processes requirements analysis and definition, system and software design, implementation and unit testing, integration and system testing as well as operation and maintenance. In addition to the knowledge gained, students are given the opportunity to analyze the system and user requirements so as to apply software engineering techniques and design appropriate procedures or flows for software development. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: acquire the solid understanding of the key concepts of software engineering and their practical relevance apply software engineering techniques in software development conduct analysis of system and user requirements so as to provide appropriate design for software development demonstrate critical and creative thinking through the design in various phases of software engineering process communicate and cooperate effectively and productively in team work on the design for software development identify the trend, potential problems and opportunities of software engineering issues Indicative Contents Software Processes Software process models; Process iteration; Computer-aided software engineering (CASE). Requirements Software requirements; Requirements analysis & validation; System models; Software prototyping; Formal specification. 219

228 Software Design Architectural design; Distributed systems design; Object-oriented Design; Real-time software design; Design with reuse. Programming Languages and Techniques Programming style; Fault avoidance and tolerance; Exception handling; Defensive programming; Features of programming languages. Software Verification and Validation Testing techniques; Static analysis; Design and code reviews; Inspection; Walkthrough; Formal proof; Software reliability and safety. Software Metrics Software quality assurance and standards; Metrics for source code, Testing and maintenance. Software Maintenance Systems reviews and audits; Re-engineering; Software reuse; Software process improvement. Teaching/Learning Approach Key software engineering concepts, techniques and methodologies will be presented in lectures, with specific reference to related software engineering cases in order to develop students solid understanding of software engineering concepts, techniques and methodologies. Software engineering problems and exercises will be given to students in tutorials in order for them to explore appropriate design and solutions. Students knowledge in software engineering concepts, techniques and methodologies will be consolidated and enhanced in tutorials through discussion. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools including assignments, group projects, tests and examination are designed to assess students understanding of software engineering concepts and applicability of software engineering techniques. Also, students critical and creative thinking, problem-solving and analytical skills are assessed through the design and development in software engineering projects and assignments. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Sommerville, I. Software Engineering. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). 220

229 References Ghezzi, C., Jazayeri, M. and Mandrioli, D. Fundamentals of Software Engineering. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Pfleeger, S. L. and Atlee, J. M. Software Engineering: Theory and Practice. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Pressman, R. S. Software Engineering - A Practitioner's Approach. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). 221

230 CC3203 Information Systems Analysis and Design Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites CC2201 Principles of Programming Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject equips students with the basic skills in developing information systems to support different types of business organizations. It provides a good training for students to learn how to be a system analyst or developer and to build information systems from the first request made by users to the stage of implementation. Studying the subject will help develop students analytical mind, as well as a professional attitude, and design and project management skills for their future learning and career development in the information technology field. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the user and system requirements for information system analysis and design apply and reflect on various analyses and design techniques in system development appraise problems faced by system developers distinguish the capabilities and limitations of system design and development technologies such as visual development tools and computer-aided software engineering explore the basic professional attitude in developing information systems Indicative Contents Systems Analysis Fundamentals Role of system analysts; Types of information systems; System development life cycle (SDLC) and alternative approaches; Skills for system analysts; Automated tools for system development. Requirements Determination Sampling and investigating hard data; Interviewing and listening; Using questionnaires; Observing decision-maker behaviour and the office environment; Prototyping and rapid application development. 222

231 Requirements Structuring Data flow diagrams, structured English, decision tables, decision trees and state-transition diagram; Entity-relationship (E-R) diagrams. Design Input/Output design; Interfaces and dialogues design; Database design; Program and process design. Object-oriented Analysis and Design Methods Object-oriented development life cycle; Objects; Classes; Attributes; Relationships; Messaging; Dynamic/static binding; Polymorphism; Encapsulation; Overviews of analysis approaches and design methods. Implementation System conversion; User training; User guide and operations manual; Changeover methods. Systems Development Project Management & Professional Ethics Planning and schedule; Software cost estimation; Ethnics; Code of conduct; Public interest; Employers and clients; Profession; Professional competence and integrity. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of the theories, concepts, techniques and methodologies in the analysis and design of information systems. Occasional group discussions will be conducted to enhance students understanding of the theories, concepts, techniques and methodologies in information system analysis and design. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen and consolidate their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures. They also help students to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life issues in developing information systems and enhance their knowledge and skills in developing information systems. The activities in tutorials normally include exercises or mini-cases, student presentations, discussions of problems and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Kendall, K.E. and Kendall, J.E. Systems Analysis and Design. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). 223

232 References Hoffer, J. A., George, J. F., and Valacich, J. S. Modern Systems Analysis and Design. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). Cadle, J. and Yeates, D. Project Management for Information Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Robson, W. Strategic Management and Information Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Valacich, J. S., George, J. F., and Hoffer, J. A. Essentials of Systems Analysis and Design Pearson Education. (latest ed.). 224

233 CC3204 Data Communications and Networking Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40 % Coursework 60 % Examination Aims This subject equips students with the concepts and knowledge in data transmission across digital communications networks. It provides the conceptual framework to analyze the practical aspects of packet data communications and the interconnection of computers using a Local Area Network, a Wide Area Network and the Internet. Studying the subject will also help develop students professional knowledge to identify problems and provide solutions in different real-life situations of data communications and the networking field. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: grasp the key principles of data communications, the operation and protocols of computer networks analyze communication systems from the perspectives of communication architectures, transmission techniques, network organization, security and implementation techniques explore technical and practical issues of communicating data between computers over networks design a communication system such as Local Area Network, Wide Area Network and the Internet by applying the knowledge acquired and by selecting the appropriate network devices and systems show enhanced analytical and problem-solving skills Indicative Contents Data Communications Fundamentals Protocol layering concept; Standards organizations; OSI reference model; Transmission media; Modulation techniques; Data rate; Bandwidth; Channel capacity; Communication devices. Data Link and Protocol Basics Framing; Error detection methods; Error control; Automatic repeat request protocols; Window mechanism; Data link control protocols. Local Area Networks Topologies; Medium access control protocols: ALOHA, CSMA, CSMA/CD Ethernet, token ring, token bus; IEEE 802 Standards; FDDI and Wireless LANs. 225

234 Wide Area Networks and Internetworking Store and forward; Circuit switching; Packet switching; Virtual circuits and datagrams; Routing; Congestion and flow control; Internet architecture; TCP/IP protocol suite; Network security. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the explanation of key concepts and theories in data communication and networking, with specific reference to current technological issues wherever appropriate. Occasional group discussions might be arranged to enhance students active learning and understanding of the key concepts, theories and current technological issues in data communications and networking. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories in real-life situation with the analysis of practical issues. Exercises will be carried out in tutorials to illustrate and reinforce the concepts. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess analytical skills and problem-solving skills in designing and evaluating data communication systems and networks. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Forouzan B. A. Data Communications and Networking. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). References Comer, D. E. Computer Networks and Internets with Internet Applications. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.). Halsall, F. Computer networking and the Internet. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). Shay, W. A. Understanding Data Communications and Networks. International Thomson Publishing. (latest ed.). Tanenbaum, A. S. Computer Networks. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.). 226

235 CC3205 Operating Systems Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites CC2202 Computer System Architectures & CC2203 Data Structures and Algorithms Exclusion CC3302 Computer Systems Principles Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject provides students with the knowledge on the principles of operating systems. Upon the completion of the course, students will have acquired the knowledge on resource management provided by operating systems, concepts and theories of operating systems and implementation issues of operating systems. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the services provided by operating systems grasp the concept of the internal structure of an operating system review and compare different operating systems understand as well as solve problems involving process control, mutual exclusion, deadlock and synchronization show enhanced analytical and problem-solving skills Indicative Contents Introduction to Operating Systems Operating system objectives, types, functionalities and achievements; System components and services; Resource management; Memory management; Input/Output (I/O) management; File management. Process Management Process concepts and characteristics; Processor management and manipulation; Asynchronous concurrent processes; Mutual exclusion; Synchronization; Deadlock; Scheduling algorithms. Memory and Secondary Storage Management Virtual memory; Paging and segmentation system; Secondary storage allocation; Directory and file system structure. 227

236 Protection and Security Protection and access control; Capabilities; Security and cryptography. Case Studies on Operating Systems Structure of UNIX, Windows XP, etc. Teaching/Learning Approach Theories and basic concepts will be delivered during the lectures. Students technical competence will be developed through (supervised) hands-on practice in the tutorials and related class exercises in real-life applications. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including hands-on practice assignments, tests, project and an examination designed to help students to understand and evaluate the concepts and theories of operating systems as well as to recognize the implementation issues of operating systems. The assessment tools are also designed to assess students problems solving abilities in process control, mutual exclusion, deadlock and synchronization. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Stallings, W. Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). References Tanenbaum, A. S. Modern Operating Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Deitel, H. M. Operating Systems. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). Silberschatz A. and Galvin, P. Operating System Concepts. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). Stallings, W. Operating Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). 228

237 CC3206 Programming Project Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 6 hours of Lecture (to be arranged in the first 3 weeks) 20 hours of Tutorial 16 hours of Laboratory (supervised) 28 hours of Laboratory (unsupervised) Prerequisites Satisfactory completion of 6 or more IT-major subjects offered under the Associate in Information Technology programme including CC2201 Principles of Programming & CC3202 Software Engineering. Exclusion CC3314 Engineering Project & CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project Assessment 100% Coursework Aims This subject provides students studying for the Associate Degree of Information Technology award an opportunity to integrate and apply their IT knowledge and skills acquired in earlier semesters through a practical programming group project. It aims to develop and measure the capabilities of students to analyze and solve a complex problem during the course. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: conduct a search of the relevant literature, materials or sources relating to their selected problem area leading to an awareness, precise definition and specification of the problem think critically in the formulation of models and solutions, in the analysis of approaches, and in the evaluation of the outcomes implement a feasible software solution to the problem using one or more high-level programming languages communicate and present clearly and concisely their software product both orally and in writing manage their group project efficiently, effectively and collaboratively Indicative Contents Under the guidance of the subject lecturer, students are expected to work in groups on a feasible software solution of a particular problem. The total effort required from each student is 42 hours of staff contact, 28 hours of unsupervised laboratory work and approximately 98 hours of independent study, which includes the total time spent on literature search, background reading, fact finding, project development, and report writing. 229

238 Projects are normally proposed by the subject lecturer. However, students may propose projects in their areas of interest. Projects should be problem-oriented and there is no restriction to the nature of the problem except that it should require a reasonably sophisticated software solution from the students. Teaching/Learning Approach Lecture hours are for the delivery of information related to project requirements and development environment. Tutorial hours are used to review students architectural design of the software solution and to approve work allocation proposed by students. These hours are also used for progress monitoring and students presentations of their design and the completed software solutions. Supervised laboratory hours are used for environment familiarization, progress demonstrations and guidance for problem solving in laboratory environment. Each project group has to present formally the architectural design and demonstrate the operational features of the software product. Assessment The deliverables required from each project group are: an initial project proposal, an architectural design of the software, and a final report (including the software product). The deadlines for these are week 3, week 5 and week 14 of the semester. Students will be assessed by the subject lecturer based on the following set of criteria and weighting: i. Problem Identification and Specification (Literature Search) 20% ii. Problem Solving (Critical Thinking) 40% iii. Communication and Presentation (Demonstration and Reports) 30% iv. Project Management and Self-Discipline 10% 230

239 CC3207 Object Oriented Programming Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Mode of Study 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites CC2201 Principles of Programming Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with the knowledge and hands-on experience in developing object-oriented programs using an object-oriented programming language. The subject also develops students learning experience in designing and developing solutions and applications using the object-oriented approach. In addition, studying this subject will help develop students critical and creative thinking in the application of object-oriented techniques. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the essential concepts of object-oriented technology and carry out the object-oriented approach for programming design object-oriented programs using object-oriented modeling use different object-oriented programming techniques for computer program development appraise advanced object-oriented programming techniques implement graphics and event handling in an object-oriented fashion recognize the effectiveness and opportunities of object-oriented technology work responsibly, effectively and appropriately as an individual and as part of a group Indicative Contents Basic Principles Object-oriented (OO) programming; Object-oriented programming languages; Divide and conquer; Encapsulation; Interface; Information hiding; Generality; Extensibility; Objectoriented modeling and unified modeling language (UML). Programming Basics Program types; Source files and class Files; Packages; Basic OO program components. Language Fundamentals Identifiers; Variables; Values; Data types and operators; Arrays; Strings; Control structures; Classes and objects; Data abstraction. 231

240 Classes Class and member scope; Constructors; Methods; Fields; Library classes; Programmer-defined classes. Inheritance, Interfaces, and Abstract Classes Inheritance basics; Polymorphism; Interfaces; Abstract classes; Multithread programs. Graphics and Event Handling AWT; Swing; Event-driven Programming; Components and Containers. Network Programming Basic concepts; Sockets; Remote method invocation (RMI). Teaching/Learning Approach Object-oriented programming concepts and techniques will be taught and discussed in lectures, with specific reference to related object-oriented models using unified modeling language. Students will be given opportunities to deepen their understanding of the object-oriented programming concepts and apply object-oriented techniques in the design of computer programs in tutorials. The activities in tutorials include group discussions, presentations of object-oriented programming cases and development of solutions to the object-oriented problem sets. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools including object-oriented design and programming assignments, group projects, tests and an examination are designed to assess students understanding of objectoriented concepts, applicability of the object-oriented approach individually and in a team, critical and creative thinking, problem-solving and analytical skills as well as communication skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Booch, Grady, Rumbaugh, James and Jacobson, Ivar. The Unified Modeling Language User Guide. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). Deitel & Deitel. Java How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). References Barnes, D. Object-Oriented Programming with Java: An Introduction. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.). Kalin, M. Object-Oriented Programming in Java. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.). Morelli, R. and Walde, R. Java, Java, Java, Object-Oriented Problem Solving. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.). 232

241 CC3208 Internet Programming Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites CC2201Principles of Programming Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject aims to enrich students knowledge in terms of the evolving technologies pertaining to the Internet and Web applications development. This subject also aims to equip students with skills required for the development of both the client side and the server side in web-based applications. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: analyze, design and develop real life client side and server side applications with internet technologies design and develop real life server side internet application with technologies like Perl, PHP, and JavaScript recognize web server operation and internet protocols so as to administer web-based systems apply the programming tools and techniques for development of web-based applications show analytical and problem-solving skills Indicative Contents Interactive Web Client/Server computing model; Web server; Client-side and server-side approaches; Client-side Programming HTML. JavaScript/Jscript; Cascading Style Sheets; Dynamic HTML Object Model; Event Model; ActiveX controls. Server-side Programming ASP; CGI; Server-side Java servlets; Java server pagesv Applets as front ends to server-side programs; JDBC. XML Motivation and concepts; Syntax and structure; HTML vs XML; Life cycle of XML documents; Related technologies: XHTML, CSS, XSL, Xlinks and Xpointers; Applications. 233

242 Wireless Internet Motivation and concepts; WAP architecture, specifications and programming models; Microbrowser specifications. Teaching/Learning Approach Theories, concepts, principles and related technologies will be delivered in the lectures. Programming exercises will be given to students in tutorials to enhance and reinforce their understanding of the subject materials. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments to develop real life client side and server-side programs. Tests and an examination are designed to develop and assess analytical skills of the student on Web-based applications. Indicative Reading Deitel, H.M., Deitel, P.J. and Nieto, T.R. Internet and World Wide Web - How to program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Deitel, H. M. and Deitel, P. J. Java - How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Hall, M. and Brown, L. Core Web Programming. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). 234

243 CC3209 Internetworking Protocols and Systems Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites CC3204 Data Communications and Networking Assessment 40 % Coursework 60 % Examination Aims This subject aims to equip students with the essential knowledge and skills in internet communications. It provides the conceptual framework for students to understand and apply current internetworking protocols and systems and to appreciate network management and security. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: grasp the principle of internetworking through the study of the classic TCP/IP protocol suite identify and apply internet protocols in computer networks recognize the intricate complexity of the techniques related to network management and security explore the most up-to-date development in internet technology show enhanced analytical and critical thinking skills Indicative Contents Internetworking Fundamentals and Internet Protocol Internetworking concept and architectures; OSI reference model and TCP/IP reference model; IP address structure; Address Resolution Protocol (ARP); Encapsulation and demultiplexing of IP datagrams; Internet Protocol (IP); IP subnet and routing; Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP); IP multicasting; Mobile IP. Transport Layer and Application Protocols User Datagram Protocol (UDP); UDP multiplexing and ports; Transmission Control Protocol (TCP); Error control, flow control and congestion control; Connection management; Domain Name System (DNS); Selected application protocols, e.g. Remote Terminal Protocol (TELNET), File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP). 235

244 Network Management and Security Rationale and architectures for performance management, fault management, accounting management, configuration and name management, and security management; Management Information Bases (MIB); Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP); Remote Network Monitoring (RMON); Cryptography; Public keys, digital signatures and authentication protocols; Internet security and firewall. Teaching/Learning Approach Introduction and explanation of key internetworking concepts and knowledge will be delivered during lectures. Examples and exercises on internet protocols will be discussed in tutorials to reinforce students understanding of the concepts and to apply the knowledge and skills in solving problems related to computer networks. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including a computer program to implement and study a selected protocol, exercises on applying the knowledge understanding, a test and an examination. The assessment tools are designed to assess students understandability on internetworking concepts as well as the ability in identifying and applying internet protocols. In order to test students ability in exploring the most up-to-date development in internetworking technology, students are required to write a short report on current internetworking technology and issues. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Kurose, J. F. and Ross, K. W. Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). References Comer, D. E. Computer Networks and Internets with Internet Applications. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.). Comer, D. E. Internetworking with TCP/IP Vol. 1. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.). Forouzan, B. A. TCP/IP Protocol Suite. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). 236

245 CC3210 Database Design and Implementation Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours Lecture 14 hours Tutorial Prerequisites CC3201 Fundamentals of Database Systems Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject is designed to provide students with in-depth knowledge as well as solid, comprehensive and advanced concepts and programming skills required of commercial database systems so that student can acquire the experience of designing, implementing and administrating a database system of reasonable complexity using a selected database management system (DBMS). Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: formulate a database system strategy and plan within an organization for database design and implementation. design an appropriate centralized or distributed database system that meets the system requirements specification and complete the implementation of the database system using a selected DBMS or Distributed DBMS tool. appraise other alternative database models and alternative DBMSs. assess and evaluate applicability of the other alternative database models and alternative DBMSs within an organization. Indicative Contents Evolution of Database Models Traditional data models: hierarchical, network, relational; Conceptual modelling and entityrelationship model; Object-oriented & semantic models. Database Design Entity-relationship model; Functional dependencies; Normalization. File Structures and Physical Database Design File organization; Indexing and hashing. Database Implementation & Operational Issues Data dependencies and normalization; Query processing and optimization; Security & integrity constraints; Physical database designs, recovery, concurrency & other operational issues. 237

246 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the theories, concepts, techniques and methodologies in database systems. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen and consolidate their understanding of the concepts. Lab activities are used to acquire practical experience in designing and implementing a database system of reasonable complexity. It also helps students to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life issues in developing database systems and enhance their knowledge and skills in developing database systems using database management system tools. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including project development skills, project presentation and demonstration, written reports, tests and examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking, database design techniques, design validation and evaluation as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Connolly, T. M. and Begg, C. E., Database Systems: A Practical Approach to Design, Implementation and Management, Addison Wesley (latest ed.). References Date, C. J., An Introduction to Database Systems, Addison Wesley (latest ed.). Elmsari, R. and Navathe, S. B., Fundamentals of Database Systems, Addison Wesley (latest ed.). Rob, P and Coronel, C, Database Systems: Design, Implementation, and Management, Thomson Course Technology (latest ed.). Ullman, J. D., Principles of Database and Knowledge-base Systems, Computer Science Press (latest ed.). 238

247 CC3301 Communication Systems Principles Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 10 hours of Tutorial 4 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites CC2302 Engineering Mathematics Assessment 40 % Coursework 60 % Examination Aims This subject equips students with the basic knowledge and analytical abilities essential to understand and implement a communication system. It puts emphasis on the application of the basic principles to practical communication systems which are now a common part of everyday life. Studying the subject will also help students to develop their mathematical foundation in the models of analytical problems in different real-life situations. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the elements in a communication system and the operations of analog signal modulation techniques and their areas of application select a suitable modulation method with specific desired characteristics analyse the performance of a communication system for measuring its efficiency apply digital communications and multiplexing techniques in a confined situation develop problem solving abilities Indicative Contents Signals and Systems Information source; Encoder; Decoder; Communication channel; Signal representations; Fourier series; Fourier transform; Power spectral density; Noise. Analog Signal Transmission Amplitude modulation; Frequency modulation; Phase modulation; Frequency division multiplexing; Generation and demodulation of AM and FM signals; Effect of noise; Radio and television broadcasting. Information and Digital Transmission Measure of information; Channel capacity; Sampling theorem; Pulse-amplitude modulation; Pulse-code modulation; Quantization and coding; Time division multiplexing. 239

248 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the explanation of key concepts and theories in communication systems. Occasional group discussions might be arranged. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories in real-life situation with the analysis of practical issues using exercises and case studies in communication systems. Exercises will be carried out in tutorials to illustrate and reinforce students concepts. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess the knowledge of elements, operations, modulation techniques, performance evaluation and applications in communication systems. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Tamb, H. and Schulling, D. Principle of Communication Systems. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). References Halsall, F. Computer networking and the Internet. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). Haykin, S. Communication Systems. Wiley. (latest ed.). Leon, W.C. Digital and Analog Communication Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Proakis, J.G. and Salehi, M. Communication Systems Engineering. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Stremler, F.G. Introduction to Communication Systems. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.). 240

249 CC3302 Computer Systems Principles Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 10 hours of Tutorial 4 hours of Laboratory Exclusion CC2202 Computer System Architectures & CC3205 Operating Systems Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject enables students to appreciate the basic concepts, features, principles and knowledge in computer organization and operating systems for their understanding in the functions and organizations of modern digital computers. It also helps students to apply the knowledge to solve the problems of computer systems using assembly programming. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: appraise the fundamentals of computer systems and associated technologies describe the operations of components in computer systems and operating systems develop programs to control the components in computer systems and operating systems apply different computer interfacing techniques in designing a computer system develop interpersonal skills in teamwork and leadership Indicative Contents Computer System Computer components; Interconnection structures and bus interconnections; Bus cycle; Memory system overview; Memory interface; Address decoding; Banking; Semiconductor and cache memory; External device; I/O modules; Basic I/O interface; Polling; Programmed and interrupt I/O; Software interrupt; DMA and I/O channels; DMA controller; Shared-bus operation; Disk memory systems; Video display; Memory-mapped I/O; Handshaking; Programmable peripheral interface; Serial interface; Asynchronous/synchronous interface; RS232. The Central Processing Unit and Machine Instructions Arithmetic and logic unit (ALU); Integer representation and arithmetic; Floating-point and arithmetic; IEEE standards; Fast addition, multiplication and division algorithms; Machine instruction characteristics and types; Assembly language; assembler; Memory addressing modes; Register organization; Instruction cycle and instruction pipelining; Reduced instruction set architecture. 241

250 System Software and Operating System (OS) Software hierarchy; Systems software; BIOS; Power-up sequence; Bootstrap; Command Processor; System control; Automatic program execution; System calls; OS objectives, function and achievements; Process concept and characteristics; Processor management; Multitasking and time sharing system; Scheduling schemes and schemes; Context-switching mechanism; Memory management; I/O management; Device Driver; File management; Protection and security; Concurrent programming; OS design and implementation methodology; Performance evaluation; Case studies of commonly used OS. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of major theorems, principles and mathematics techniques of computer systems and operating systems. In addition, examples of modern computer systems and operating systems are discussed in the lectures. Tutorials introduce to students the commonly used software in controlling computer components and they provide students with the opportunity to practice their understanding in computer systems through the use of computer programs and exercises. Laboratories reinforce students concepts and knowledge learnt in lectures through experiments. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, assignments, group projects, programming exercises, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess the students understanding of the basic computer architectures and the structures and functions of operating system. The computer simulation group projects assess the student s abilities in teamwork and leadership. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks Silberschatz A. and Galvin, P. Operating System Concepts. Addison Wesley. (latest ed.). Stallings, W. Computer Organization and Architecture. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). References Mazidi, M. A. and Mazidi, J. G. The 80x86 IBM PC and compatible computers. Volumes I & II, Assembly language, design, and interfacing. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Mitchell, M., Oldham, J. and Samuel, A. Advanced Linux Programming. New Riders. (latest ed.). Tanenbaum, A. S. Modern Operating Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Tanenbaum, A.S. Structured Computer Organization. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). B. B. Barry. The Intel Microprocessors 8086/8088, 80186/80188, 80286, 80386, 80486, Pentium and Pentium Pro Processor: Architecture, Programming and Interfacing. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). 242

251 CC3303 Design of Production and Service Systems Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 27 hours of Lecture 6 hours of Tutorial 9 hours of Laboratory / Case study Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject equips students with the analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of theoretical background in the design of production and service systems. It provides a conceptual framework for students to integrate different components in such systems and enables students to apply these principles to real-life industrial problems. Studying the subject will also help students to develop their critical thinking and problem solving skills for their life-long learning. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: grasp the concepts of production and service systems grasp the principles and techniques in the design of production and service systems identify some components of production and service systems, such as Material Requirement Planning for production and, Inventory Control for both production and service operations integrate different components of a production and service system apply the principles in the design of production and service systems to real-life industrial problems apply background knowledge or newly obtained information to review and investigate possible outcomes Indicative Contents Forecasting Production and service demand management; Qualitative and quantitative methods in forecasting; Forecasting errors and control; Forecasting and its relationship to capacity planning. Aggregate Planning Capacity measurement; Aggregate units; Manual and mathematical methods for aggregate planning. Inventory Control Types of inventory; Dependent verse independent inventory; Order quantities, including quantity discounts; Continuous review and periodic review systems; ABC analysis. 243

252 Material Requirement Planning (MRP) Master production scheduling; MRP concepts and principles; Lot sizing. Operations Scheduling Gantt charts; Single-machine scheduling; Parallel machine scheduling; Flow shop scheduling; Job-shop scheduling; Personnel Scheduling. Just-in-time and Lean Manufacture Advantages and limitations; Set-up and changeover times and their reduction; Push and pull systems of production control; Use of Kanban; Effect on inventory; Issues of implementation. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the understanding and explanation of relevant theories and practices in the design of production and service systems. Occasional group discussions might be arranged. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life issues in the design of production and service systems. The activities in tutorials normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including interactions between teacher and students, assignments, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of subject expected learning outcomes as well as analytical and interpersonal skills. Indicative Reading References Hopp, W. J. Factory Physics. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Metters, R. Successful service operations management. Mason, Ohio: Thomson/South-Western. (latest ed.). Nahmias, S. Production and operations analysis. Boston, Mass: McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Shukla, P. K. Production and operations management. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Sipper, D. Production: planning, control, and integration. New York: McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). 244

253 CC3304 Digital System Design Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 10 hours of Tutorial 4 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject equips students with broadened views of the basic principles and essential knowledge of digital logic systems and microprocessor systems. It also enables them to gain understanding and skills for designing and building simple digital logic circuits using logic gates and programmable logic devices for practical applications. Moreover, it helps students to understand the structure and organisation of microprocessors and basic assembly language programming techniques. In addition, it provides students with the fundamental knowledge of the components in computer systems. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: appreciate the fundamentals of digital systems and microprocessor systems analyse and design simple combination and sequential logic systems familiarize themselves with the principles and applications of programmable logic devices recognize the basic structure and organization and the basic assembly language programming techniques of microprocessor systems develop interpersonal skills in teamwork and leadership Indicative Contents Combinational Logic Decoders; Encoders; Multiplexers; Demultiplexers; Binary adders and subtractors; Binary multipliers; Shifters; Logic operations; Arithmetic Logical Unit (ALU); HDL representation. Sequential Logic Sequential circuits analysis and design procedures; Registers; Counters; HDL representations; Random access memory; Read only memory; Algorithmic State Machine (ASM). Programmable Logic Devices Logic circuits design with Programmable Logic Devices (PLD); Programmable logic array (PLA); Programmable array logic (PAL); Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD); Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA). 245

254 Microprocessor Register transfer operations; Microoperations; Bus-based transfer; Datapath representation; Control word; Control unit; Hardwired control and microprogrammed control; Concepts of assembly and machine languages; Operand addressing; Addressing modes; Instruction set. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of major theorems, principles and mathematical techniques of digital and microprocessor systems. In addition, examples of modern digital and microprocessor systems are discussed in the lectures. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to practice their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures through the digital circuit and microprocessor problems. In addition, some commonly used software in digital system and microprocessor system is introduced in the tutorials. Laboratory hours reinforce students concepts and knowledge learnt in lectures through experiments. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used. Assignments, group projects, tests and an examination are designed to develop and assess the students understanding on the principles and problem solving techniques in digital combination and sequential circuits, programmable logic devices and microprocessor system. The digital circuit and microprocessor group projects assess the student s abilities in teamwork and leadership. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Mano M.M. and Kime C. R. Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. (latest ed.) References Green, D.C. Digital Electronics. Addison Wesley Longman. (latest ed.). Mano, M.M. Digital Design. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Mano, M.M. and Kime, C.R. Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Floyd, T.I. Digital Fundamentals. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Brown S. and Vranesic Z. Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). 246

255 CC3305 Engineering Management Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims The objective of this course is to equip students with the skills and techniques involved in managing people, design, projects, and other related activities in an engineering environment. It provides students with the training on the basic principles in the dimensions of organisation structures, operations and quality management. It introduces the critical factors that engineering managers should deal with in their own disciplines. It also covers environmental concerns and ethical issues that might occur in the field of engineering. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the basic principles and techniques involved in the management of people and engineering activities in the process of product design as well as the production of goods and services appraise and analyse issues relating to engineering management and professional ethics appraise the importance of quality management recognize environmental factors that may affect the operations of engineering organisations in Hong Kong apply basic management skills in their professional career effectively communicate information, arguments and analysis in a variety of forms Indicative Contents Elements of Industrial Systems Functions and types of industrial organisations, structure, corporate objectives, strategy and policy. Industrial Management Roles of managers; Process of management, planning, organising, actuating and controlling of social and engineering activities; Reliability and maintenance management; Corrective, preventive and productive maintenance; Replacement of facilities; Total quality management. 247

256 The Management of Research and Development Project management, matrix organisation, project specification; Management of change due to examples such as technical innovation, organisational changes, business process re-engineering, etc. Effects of Environmental Factors The effects of environmental factors on the operations of engineering companies in Hong Kong; Legal aspects of employment; Professional codes of conduct for engineers; Contracting; Product liability; Sources, effect and control of environmental pollutants. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key management concepts and practices in the engineering field. Relevant authentic cases and examples will be introduced for in-class discussion. Occasional group discussions might be arranged. Tutorials normally include case studies and exercises to reinforce concepts and techniques learnt in lectures, and to provide students with the opportunity to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life engineering management issues. Students will be encouraged to develop their own skills in presenting their viewpoints or findings to audiences through presentations. Assessment Approach The course consists of assignments covering the main topics taught, which are designed to enhance the problem solving and analytical skills of students to apply the learned concepts into real-life cases. A test and an examination will also be used to assess students theoretical and analytical skills. Indicative Readings Babcock, D.L. Managing Engineering and Technology: An introduction to management for Engineers. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Mazda, F.F. Engineering Management. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.). Robbins, S.P. and Conltar, M. Management. Prentice-Hall International. (latest ed.). Schermerhorn, J.R. Management. John Wiley and Sons. (latest ed.). 248

257 CC3306 Industrial Engineering Techniques and Methods Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 16 hours of Lecture 8 hours of Tutorial 18 hours of Laboratory / Case study Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% Coursework Aims This subject equips students with the analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of theoretical background in industrial engineering techniques and methods. It provides students with a conceptual framework to integrate different techniques and methods in industrial engineering for the enhancement of enterprise productivity. Studying the subject will also help students to develop their critical thinking and problem solving skills for their life-long learning. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: carry out method studies in a company for productivity improvement using the basic skills for analyzing and improving working methods, procedures and systems in the context of the workstation and a department taking into account ergonomic considerations use and compile the data of work measurement, and to identify the techniques and importance of quantifying work in the manufacturing and service settings, so as to measure the work content apply facilities layout techniques with appropriate material handling systems to evaluate an existing layout and recommend improvements and/or to plan a new layout apply background knowledge or newly obtained information to review and investigate possible outcomes Indicative Contents Productivity Enhancement Productivity, causes of low productivity in enterprises, resources and outputs of enterprises, their importance and measurement. Work Improvement Benefits, the systematic approach, identifying improvement areas in enterprises; Terms of reference; Approach to personnel, techniques of recording information; Systems flowcharting; Design of documents in both hard and electronic format; Principles of computer screen layout; Examination of existing working methods and development of new methods and procedures; Implementation and continuous improvement. 249

258 Work Measurement Purposes of work measurement in manufacturing and service settings; Techniques for measuring industrial and clerical work, self recording, time study; Work sampling with observations at random and fixed time intervals; Introduction to predetermined motion time systems for manufacturing and clerical work. Introduction to Ergonomics Human physical characteristics, applications to the design of work and layout of the workplace. Layout Planning Objectives, types of layout found in industry and the clerical sectors; Systematic layout planning as applied to manufacturing and clerical work; Introduction to design of flow lines in manufacturing. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the understanding and explanation of relevant theories and practices in industrial engineering techniques and methods. Occasional group discussions might be arranged. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life industrial issues. The activities in tutorials normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including interactions between teacher and students, assignments, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of subject expected learning outcomes as well as analytical and interpersonal skills. Indicative Reading References Chengalur, S.N., Rodgers, S.H. and Bernard, T.E. Kodak s Ergonomic Design for People at Work. John Wiley and Sons, Inc.(latest ed.). Hodson, W.K. Maynard's Industrial Engineering Handbook. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Konz, S. and Johnson, S. Work Design: Industrial Ergonomics. Scottsdale, Ariz.: Holcomb Hathaway. (latest ed.). Meyers, F. E. Manufacturing Facilities Design and Material Handling. Pearson/Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Meyers, F. E. and Stewart, J. R. Motion and Time Study for Lean Manufacturing. Upper Saddle River. N.J.: Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). 250

259 Niebel, B. W. and Freivalds, A. Methods, Standards, and Work Design. McGraw-Hill (latest ed.). Salvendy, G. Handbook of Industrial Engineering: Technology and Operations Management (Published in cooperation with Institute of Industrial Engineers). John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (latest ed.). 251

260 CC3307 Manufacturing Technology Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial / Case study Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject equips students with the analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of theoretical background of materials processing. It provides the conceptual framework to analyse the economic and technological factors that determine the appropriateness of competing routes for the manufacture of specific products. Studying the subject will also help students to develop their critical thinking and problem solving skills for their life-long learning. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the basic principles of material processing conduct material processing analysis for the manufacture of specific products appreciate the use of commercial software for the simulation of material processing conditions apply relevant material processing knowledge to identify, formulate and solve material processing problems Indicative Contents Processing of Metallic Products Classification of manufacturing processes; Casting; Powder metallurgy; Bulk formation; Sheet metal forming; Fastening and joining; Conventional and non-conventional material removal; Bulk and surface treatment; Surface finishing. Processing of Polymeric Products Injection molding; Compression and transfer molding; Extrusion; Thermoforming; Casting; Rotation molding; Fastening and joining; Finishing of plastic parts; Advanced molding technologies. Processing of Composites and Ceramic Products Processing of composites: sheet molding, bulk molding, preform molding, resin-injection molding, pultrusion, hand lay-up, spray-up and filament winding; Processing of ceramic products by casting, molding, extrusion, pressing, sintering and finishing. 252

261 Simulation Introducing and demonstrating process simulation software for both metal and plastic processing. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the understanding and explanation of relevant theories and materials processing practices. Occasional group discussions might be arranged. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life material processing issues. The activities in tutorials normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including interactions between teacher and students, assignments, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of subject expected learning outcomes as well as analytical and interpersonal skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Kalpakjian, S. and Schmid, R. S. Manufacturing Engineering and Technology. Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). References Groover, M. P. Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing: Materials, Processes, and Systems. John Wiley & Sons. (latest ed.). Kalpakjian, S. and Schmid, R. S. Manufacturing Processes for Engineering Materials, Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Schey, J. A. Introduction to Manufacturing Processes. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). 253

262 CC3308 Quality Engineering Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial / Case study Prerequisites CC2003 Quantitative Methods OR CC2030 Mathematics Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject equips students with the analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of the theoretical background of quality engineering. It provides students with a conceptual framework to analyse quality engineering issues involved in both the manufacturing and service industries so as to diagnose quality problems and develop sustainable improvement. Studying the subject will also help students to develop their critical thinking and problem solving skills for their life-long learning. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: grasp the basic concepts of quality identify the functions served by a quality management system design quality elements into products that satisfy both internal and external customers control process performance using appropriate statistical tools diagnose quality problems and develop sustainable improvement apply background knowledge or newly obtained information to review and investigate possible outcomes Indicative Contents Quality Management Processes Modern quality concepts; Quality planning; Quality control; Quality improvement. Design for Quality Failure mode, effects and criticality analysis (FMECA); Taguchi approach to achieving quality; Design reviews. Statistical Quality Control Process variation; Process capability study; Control charts for variables and attributes; Statistical tolerancing; Acceptance sampling plans for attributes: single double and multiple sampling. Supplier Partnership Supplier evaluation and selection; Joint planning with suppliers; Best practices of partnership with suppliers. 254

263 Quality Management Systems Total quality management; ISO9000/14000 series of standards; Quality audits; Product and system certification programs. Quality Improvement Project approach to quality improvement; Diagnostic techniques for identifying root causes; Implementing change and sustaining gains; Kaizen; Team working; 6-Sigma programs. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the understanding and explanation of relevant theories in quality engineering practices. Occasional group discussions might be arranged. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life quality engineering issues. The activities in tutorials normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including interactions between teacher and students, assignments, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of subject expected learning outcomes as well as analytical and interpersonal skills. Indicative Reading References Aikens, C. H. Quality: a corporate force - managing for excellence. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Bentley, J.P. Introduction to reliability and quality engineering. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.). Besterfield, D. H. Total quality management. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Gitlow, H. S. Quality management. Boston, Mass: McGraw-Hill/Irwin. (latest ed.). Peach, R. W.,The ISO 9000 handbook. New York: McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Pyzdek, T. The Six Sigma handbook: a complete guide for green belts, black belts, and managers at all levels. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Pyzdek, T. Quality engineering handbook. New York: Marcel Dekker. (latest ed.). Smith, G. Statistical process control and quality improvement. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson/Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). 255

264 CC3309 Society and the Engineer Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 14 hours of Lecture 20 hours of Seminar 8 hours of Tutorial / Laboratory Prerequisites Nil Assessment 70% Coursework 30% Examination Aims This subject is designed for engineering students to learn about the role of professional engineers in real-life situations and their responsibilities towards the profession, colleagues, employers, clients and the public. It makes students appreciate the historical context of modern technology and the nature of the process whereby technology develops. It also enables students to describe the social, political, and economic impact of technology on society. In addition, it helps students to appreciate the effects of the use of technology relating to safety, health and environment and the implied social costs and benefits. Moreover, it provides students with the information about professional conduct, the legal and moral constraints relating to various engineering aspects. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the different types of intellectual protection and to evaluate the impacts of modern technology on education, business and societal development identify the importance of professional conduct and responsibilities in various engineering activities identify the effects on the use of technology relating to health and safety, environment and welfare of the public in real life cases interpret the academic, training and professional requirement of local and overseas professional engineering institutions work responsibly, effectively and appropriately as an individual and as part of a group Indicative Contents Technology, Values, and Society Trend and transfer of technology; Impact of technology on society; Research and development; Innovation and creativity; Quality assurance and product life-cycle; The outlook of Hong Kong's industry, its supporting organizations and impact on development from the China Markets. 256

265 Safety, Health, and Environment Industrial health and safety including the work of the Labour Department and the Occupational Health and Safety Council; Industrial legislation; Environmental protection and related issues; Role of the engineer in energy conservation, ecological balance and sustainable development. Professionalism and Codes of Ethics Local and overseas professional institutions and education systems; Training of engineers; Professional ethics; Bribery and corruption including the work of the ICAC; Social responsibilities of engineers; Intellectual property right such as patents and copyright protection; The work of the Intellectual Property Department; Contract law for engineers. Teaching/Learning Approach Current issues and relevant topics will be introduced during the lectures, some of which may be delivered by invited or guest speakers. Students need to read relevant articles from newspapers, magazines and journals through guided study for their group projects. The lecturer will act as a facilitator in the group discussion in the seminar sessions of case studies. Assessment Approach The coursework will include paper writing, practical assignments and mini-projects. A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess the students understanding and aspects on different society issues, impacts and responsibilities, such as, technology transfer, professional conduct and sustainable development. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Johnston, S., Gostelow, J.P. and King, W.J. Engineering and Society: Challenges of professional practice. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). References Fleddermann, C.B. Engineering Ethics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Herkert, J.R. Social, Ethical and Policy Implications of Engineering: Selected readings. IEEE Press. (latest ed.). Mitcham, C. and Duval, R.S. Engineering Ethics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Winston, M.E. and Edelbach, R.D. Society, Ethics and Technology. Thomson Learning. (latest ed.). 257

266 CC3310 Statistics and Probability Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 10 hours of Tutorial 4 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites CC2003 Quantitative Methods OR CC2030 Mathematics Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject introduces students to the probability theory and its applications to statistics. It provides students with various statistical skills in solving practical problems under uncertainty in engineering, business, reliability, management science, and other similar fields of endeavour. It also addresses formulating managerial problems and skills in solving the problems by appropriate mathematical models. Studying the subject will also help students to develop their critical thinking and analytic skills for their life-long learning. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognise the use and limitations of quantitative methods in analysing real life problems. appreciate risk and uncertainty from observed data apply appropriate statistical methods to solve practical problems under uncertainty in engineering, business, reliability, management science, and other similar fields of endeavour interpret statistical results and make decisions formulate managerial problems and solve the problems by appropriate mathematical models use computer software to conduct management science and statistical data analysis Indicative Contents Probability Law Elementary probability rules; Permutation and combination; Conditional probability; Statistical independence; Law of Total Probability; Bayes Theorem. Introduction to Statistical Inference Sampling Methods; Advantages and Limitation of Statistical Inference; Roles of computer software in data analysis. Sampling Distributions and Parameter Estimation Normal distribution; Sampling distributions; Central limit theorem; Confidence interval estimations and interpretation; Sample size determination. 258

267 Hypothesis Testing Null and alternative hypotheses; The use of p-values; One-sample, two-sample and pairedsample t-test; Types of error; Analysis of variance; Non-parametric statistics. Correlation and Linear Regression Scatter plots; Correlation coefficient; Regression model; Assumptions; Least squares estimation; Interpretation of slope and intercept; Prediction; Inferences of slope; Coefficient of determination,. Queuing Theory and Network Models Single and multiple channel queuing models; Constant service time model and more complex queuing models; Fundaments of network models. Linear Programming Formulation of optimization problems as linear programming; Simplex method and Sensitivity Analysis; Transportation and Assignment Problem. Teaching/Learning Approach Topics are first introduced in lectures. Emphasis is on problem formulation, problem solving skills, assumptions, and interpretations. Tutorials are conducted in groups to reinforce the materials covered in the lectures. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life engineering/business/industrial problems. The activities in tutorials normally include discussions of problem sets. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including interactions between teacher and students, assignments, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students' achievement of subject expected learning outcomes as well as analytical and interpersonal skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Navidi. Statistics for Engineers and Scientists. Mcgraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Hillier, F.S., Hillier, M.S. and Lieberman, G.J. Introduction to Management Science A Modelling and Case Studies Approach with Spreadsheets. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). References DeGroot, M. H. and Schervish, M. J. Probability and Statistics. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.). Johnson, R. A. Probability and Statistics for Engineers. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Montgomery, D. C. and Runger, G. C. Applied Statistics and Probability for Engineers. John Wiley and Sons, Inc. (latest ed.). Walpole, R. E. Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). 259

268 CC3311 Engineering Materials Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Mode of Study 28 hours of Lecture 10 hours of Tutorial 4 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject provides students with the fundamental knowledge of material science and engineering. The subject also provides students with the basic knowledge and concepts relating to the properties of engineering materials and their applications in a wide range of engineering industries. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the mechanical properties of materials understand and explain how the properties of a material may be modified by processing and alloying classify material types and their properties, and utilise the materials in engineering applications identify the failure of materials apply the knowledge of material engineering to solve a host of engineering problems in a global and societal context design simple engineering components Indicative Contents Microstructures and Mechanical Properties of Materials Solidification; Grain structure; Crystallographic points, directions and planes; Imperfections in solids; Stresses, strains, tensile, shear properties and hardness of materials, Bending and torsion. Phase Diagrams and Heat Treatments Equilibrium Phase Diagrams; Phase transformations; Iron-carbon system; Microstructure and property changes; Thermal process of metals; Hardening, tempering, annealing and normalizing of steels. Characteristics of Metal Alloys, Polymers and Ceramics Ferrous and nonferrous alloys; Polymer structures and composite materials; Mechanical properties of polymers; Defects in polymers; Thermoplastic and thermosetting polymers; Properties of ceramics and glasses; Smart materials; Applications in product development. 260

269 Failure of Materials Fracture; Corrosion and combating corrosion; Creep and creep rupture; Creep resistant materials; Creep; Impact behavior and toughness of materials; Ductile, brittle, plastic and viscoelastic behaviors; Temperature effects; Corrosion and degradation of materials; Safety factor. Raw Material and Manufacturing Costs Categories of cost; Manufacturing cost; Life cycle costing; Material availability; Maintainability in mechanical components. Teaching/Learning Approach The subject will be delivered mainly through lectures but these will be substantially supplemented by tutorials, case studies and laboratory sessions. Practical problems and cases will be raised as a focal point for discussion in tutorial classes, and the laboratories will be used to illustrate and assimilate some fundamental principles of materials science. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, written reports, tests and an examination to assess the concepts as well as analytical skills. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Callister, W. D. Jr. Materials Science and Engineering: An introduction. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.(latest ed.). References Giancoli, D.C. Physics for Scientist and Engineers. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Mangonon, Pat L. The Principles of Materials Selection for Engineering Desgin. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Wolfson, R. and Pasachoff, J. M. Physics with Modern Physics. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.). Benham, P.P., Crawford, R.J. and Armstrong, C.G. Mechanics of Engineering Materials. Longman. (latest ed.). 261

270 CC3312 Thermofluids Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 10 hours of Tutorial 4 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites CC2302 Engineering Mathematics Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with the knowledge of basic concepts in fluids and systems used in thermal science including thermodynamic laws, processes and cycles, work and heat. It also provides an introduction of HVAC systems used in building services engineering to students. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the implications of thermodynamic laws and their applications to heat engine apply basic knowledge of thermodynamics to the analysis of heat and work transfer in thermodynamic processes understand the basic principles of fluid mechanics apply the principles of fluid mechanics in fluid motion and flow measurement identify the needs for and the functions of HVAC systems in buildings apply the fundamental principles of thermodynamics and fluid mechanics to building services engineering/mechanical engineering apply background knowledge or newly obtained information to review and investigate possible outcomes Indicative Contents Introduction to HVACR Systems Functions of HVACR services in buildings; Configuration of HVACR systems in buildings; Introduction to operations of HVACR systems including functions of individual equipment and sub-systems; Transports of fluid and heat in the system and energy input requirement of the systems; Heat and work transfer processes in HVACR systems. Basic Fluid and Thermodynamics Properties State; Close and open systems; Thermal properties; Temperature and the zeroth law; Work and heat; Process and cycle; Ideal gas; Equation of state of ideal gas; Pure substance; Phase diagrams; Fluid properties and thermodynamic properties of air, water and refrigerants. 262

271 The First Law of Thermodynamics The First Law for a control mass undergoing a process/cycle; Internal energy; Enthalpy; Constant volume and constant pressure specific heats; Conservation of mass and control volume; The first law for a control volume; The steady-flow energy equation and its applications. The Second Law of Thermodynamics Heat engines and refrigerators; The Second Law of Thermodynamics; Reversible and irreversible processes; Forward Carnot cycle; Thermodynamic temperature scale; Inequality of Clausius; Entropy and irreversibility; T-s diagram; The second law for a control mass/control volume; Isentropic efficiency. Refrigeration Studies Refrigeration cycle; Compression, condensation, throttling and evaporation processes and heat and work transfer; Corollaries of Second Law; T-s and P-h diagrams; Refrigerators and heat pumps; Coefficient of performance; Source and sink of heat and their effects on COP; Ideal and actual refrigeration cycles; Two-stages and multi-stage refrigeration systems; Sub-cooling and supercooling; Refrigeration capacity control devices; Condenser and evaporator as heat exchangers; Refrigerants; Ozone depletion and global warming. Compressors Types of compressor; Factors affecting the performance of compressors. Fundamentals of Fluids and Fluid Statics Fluid properties; Viscosity and shear stress; Compressibility; Newtonian and Non-Newtonian fluids; Fluid pressure; Pascal s law; Pressure-height relation; Manometry; Forces on submerged surfaces. General Description of Fluid in Motion and Flow Measurement Steady and unsteady; Uniform and non-uniform; Incompressible and compressible; Laminar and turbulent; Continuity and Bernoulll s equation; Streamline and streamtube; Flow; Momentum equation. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures and tutorials will emphasize the concepts and applications of the principles and key issues, using an interactive approach. The laboratory sessions will be used to illustrate and assimilate the fundamental principles of thermofulids. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, written reports, tests and an examination to assess the concepts as well as analytical skills. 263

272 Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Cengel Y.A. and Turner R.H. Fundamental of Thermo-Fluid Sciences. McgrawHill. (latest ed.). References Eastop, T.D. and McConkey A. Applied Thermodynamics for Engineering Technologists., John Wiley. (latest ed.). Gouglas, J.F., Gasiorek, J.M. and Swaffield, J.A. Fluid Mechanics. Longman Group. (latest ed.). McQuiston, F.C., Parker, J.D. and Spitler, J.D. Heating, Ventilating and Air-conditioning Analysis and Design. John Wiley. (latest ed.). 264

273 CC3313 Linear Systems Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 10 hours of Tutorial 4 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites CC2302 Engineering Mathematics Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject provides students with the basic concept and techniques for the modeling and analysis of linear continuous-time and discrete-time signals and systems. It also provides students with an analytical foundation for further studies in Communication Engineering, Control Engineering, and Digital Signal Processing. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe different representations and classifications of signals and systems analyse signals and systems using time-domain, frequency-domain, and s-domain techniques appraise the design of analogue filters identify the advantages and disadvantages on using different representations and modeling techniques apply software tool to analyse and design of signals and systems apply background knowledge or newly obtained information to review and investigate possible outcomes Indicative Contents Classification of Signals Continuous and discrete-time signals; Signals of special importance. Study on Transform and Responses Impulse response and convolution; Linear time-invariant systems: Block diagram, Transfer functions; Fourier series and transform; Spectral density functions; Pole-zero plots; Natural response, transients and stability; Laplace transform and system responses; Poles and zeros; Root locus method; Synthesis of analogue filters; Bode plots. Digital Control Sampling and digitalization of signals; Digital networks and z-transform; z-plane characterization; Mapping between s-plane and z-plane; Introduction to digital filtering. 265

274 State-space Representation Canonical forms; Similarity transformation; Relation with transfer function; Eigenvalues and system stability; State-transition matrix. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of basic concept and essential knowledge in linear systems and signals, and how these can be applied to analyse continuous-time and discretetime signals and systems. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures. Laboratory sessions provide students with the opportunity to use software tools in assisting the analysis and design of signals and systems. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess student s achievement of the subject expected learning outcomes. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Roberts, M. J. Signals and Systems: Analysis Using Transform Methods and MATLAB. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). References Phillips, C. L., Par, J. M. and Riskin, E. A. Signals, Systems, and Transforms (3 rd ed.) Prentice Hall. (2003). Kamen, E. W. and Heck, B. S. Fundamentals of Signals and Systems: Using the Web and MATLAB ( 2 nd ed.) Prentice Hall. (2000). Denbigh, P. System Analysis and Signal Processing. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.). Ziemer, R. E., et al. Signals and Systems: Continuous and Discrete. Prentice Hall (latest ed.). Haykin, S. and Veen, B. V. Signals and Systems. Wiley. (2003). 266

275 CC3314 Engineering Project Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 10 hours of Lecture (to be arranged in first 5 weeks) 32 hours of Laboratory / Seminar (supervised) 32 hours of Independent Study (unsupervised) Prerequisites CC3732 Engineering Graphics and Computing Exclusion CC3206 Programming Porject & CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project Assessment 100% Coursework 40% continuous assessment 20% analysis, design, project management 40% reports and presentations Aims The subject equips students with the analytical skills necessary for working on engineering projects. It provides students with training on practical techniques in problem formation, product modeling, project planning, computer drafting and simulation of product design, where the basic techniques in using CAD/CAM tools in the design process will be used. It also provides an opportunity for students to work as a team so they can appreciate different parts of the whole process in product design and development. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: develop the techniques to formulate engineering problems in a scientific manner and propose engineering solutions subsequently identify and evaluate solutions to solving the engineering problems with the use of analytical tools and engineering software integrate the use of CAD/CAM tools in product design and development process distinguish parts in products which require engineering design and analysis recognise the needed skills in acquiring scientific or engineering information from libraries and other sources write technical reports in a professional manner and make presentations apply background knowledge or newly obtained information to review and investigate possible outcomes develop interpersonal skills and leadership in teamwork environment 267

276 Indicative Contents Project Planning, Development and Evaluation Project requirements; Process and planning of product design and development and its systematic approach; Analyze and evaluate the product functionality; Material selection and material processes; Cost estimation and marketing. Computer-Aided Design/Drafting (CAD) and Modeling Construction of 2D objects; Concepts of blocks and external referencing; Introduction to 3D solid modeling and construction of 3D solid objects; Construction of complex 3D solid objects; Engineering documentation of 2D objects and 3D solid objects; Annotation, dimensioning and plotting. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on introducing and explaining key techniques in formulating problems and the proposed solutions in a professional manner. Emphasis is placed on developing practical skills in writing up technical documents and making formal presentations. Lectures also cover the concepts and hands-on techniques required in using CAD/CAM tools. Supervised laboratory/seminar sessions provide students with the opportunity to discuss and work on their projects in teams, with the lecturer providing guidance and feedback at different stages for students to work consistently towards their project goals, as well as monitoring the progress of each team to ensure projects are done at a reasonable pace. Students are required to write their log books continuously during the project design and development process. Assessment Approach The course consists of a group (3-4 students) project for students to develop and apply their engineering skills in problem formulation and product design/development. Students continuous efforts in working on the project (e.g. log books writing, CAD/CAM tools competency, etc) will also be assessed. Indicative Readings Reference Black, R. Design and manufacture: an integrated approach. Basingstoke [England]: Palgrave Macmillan. (latest ed.). Cooper, K.G. Rapid prototyping technology: selection and application. New York: Marcel Dekker. (latest ed.). Grabowski, R. Using AutoCAD 2006, Advanced. Thomson Delmar Learning. (latest ed.). Grabowski, R. Using AutoCAD 2006, Basics. Thomson Delmar Learning. (latest ed.). Lee, K. Principles of CAD/CAM/CAE systems. Reading, Mass. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.). 268

277 Otto, K.N. and Wood, K.L. Product design: techniques in reverse engineering and new product development. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Tickoo S. AutoCAD 2006: A Problem Solving Approach. Thomson Course Technology. (latest ed.). Bertline, G. R., et al. Engineering Graphic Communication. Irwin. (latest ed.). Giesecke F. E. et al. Engineering Graphics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Giesecke, F. E., et al. Modern Graphics Communication. Prentice-Hall, N.J. (latest ed.). 269

278 CC3315 Applied Mechanics Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 10 hours of Tutorial 4 hours of Laboratory Prerequisite CC2003 Quantitative Methods OR CC2030 Mathematics Exclusion CC2304 Engineering Mechanics Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject equips students with analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of principles of static and equivalent systems. It provides practice in modeling and analysing simple load bearing system and provide a conceptual framework for force and stress analysis. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the basic principles and concepts of applied mechanics solve for the forces and moments in a simple structure formulate and solve equivalent force/couple systems use computer software to solve simple structural problems predict the formation of stresses for simple loading systems Indicative Contents Fundamentals of Mechanics Basic concepts of mechanics; Scalars and Vectors: Vector algebra and components; Position and Unit Vectors; Two and three-dimensional force systems; Moment of a force about a point; Moment of force about a line. Statics Equilibrium of a particle and the associated free-body diagrams; Equilibrium of a rigid body and the associated free body diagram; Two- and three force members equilibrium in three dimensions; Simple trusses: The method of joints, the method of sections, zero-force members; Internal forces developed in structural members; Stress in light weighted structure; Shear and moment equations and diagrams; Relations between distributed load, shear and moment; Flexural formula; Theory of dry friction; Systems with friction; Wedges; Belt friction; Rolling resistance. 270

279 Equivalent Systems Determination of the resultant concurrent forces; Equivalent force/couple systems; Centre of gravity and centroid: by composite parts and by integration; Resultant of a general distributed force system; Moment of interia of areas/mass; Parallel-axis theorem for an area; Radius gyration of an area; Calculation of moments of areas/mass: by composite areas and by integration; Product of inertia for an area/mass; Application to rigid body dynamics; Principles of virtual work. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures and tutorials will emphasize the concepts and applications of the principles and key issues, using an interactive approach. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, written reports, tests and an examination to assess the concepts as well as analytical skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Meriam, J. L., Kraige, L. G. and Palm, W. J. Engineering Mechanics Statics (5 th ed.) J. Wiley. (2002). References Beer, F. P. et al. Vector Mechanics for Engineers Statics. McGraw-Hill. (latest SI metric ed.). Hibbeler, R. C. Engineering Mechanics: Statics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). 271

280 CC3316 Architectural Technology in the Built Environment Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisite Nil Exclusion CC2306 Built Environment Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject equips students with a basic understanding of building services and architectural principles governing the design of a building. This subject provides students with a basic knowledge on the sensitivity of human beings to their surroundings, the functions of buildings as controlled environment for human activities, and the external environmental variables which can affect the building envelope and the environmental control systems. It also develops student s ability in the appreciation of the architectural or building design and its development and procurement processes and relevant building technology elements in conjunction with building services design requirements. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe and quantify human responses to environmental stimuli identify the role of building services engineer in the design team within the construction industry appreciate the processes of building design, construction and commissioning measure and evaluate the basic parameters for assessing environment carry out simple calculations related to variables describing the built environment integrate the architectural and building concepts with building services installations Indicative Contents Human Senses Sensation and stimulus; Non-linearity and power law; Subjective sensory perception; Visual sense and the eye; Aural sense and ear; Skin senses of heat and cold. Outdoor and Indoor Environment Climatology; Seasonal variation; Wind; Temperature; Humidity; Solar radiation; Direct and diffuse solar radiation; Microclimate; Thermal environment measurements; Thermal comfort; Visual environment measurement; Visual comfort and performance; Lighting criteria; Aural environment measurement; Sound and noise; Room acoustics; Natural ventilation. 272

281 Appreciation of Architecture Design Architectural concepts based on existing set of conditions (social, political, economic climate, functional); Design problems and solutions. HKIA/RIBA Outline Plan of Work Role of building services engineer in the design team; HKIA/RIBA outline plan of work; Formulation of the client s BSE requirement brief. Building Envelop and Passive Environmental Control Passive environmental controls and climatic design; Daylighting from windows and skylights; Noise transmission through windows and building envelop; Concept of sustainability. Building Technology and BSE Integration Technology for high-rise commercial and residential developments; Building structural systems; Enclosure systems; Interior sub-division system; Access ceiling and flooring system; Integration of building elements with the building services installations. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures and tutorials constitute the delivery of the subject. Lectures aim at delivering the basic concepts and knowledge of building technology and building services principles. The knowledge will be consolidated through tutorials. Tutorials will be conducted in different formats, such as problem-solving exercises, case studies, and presentations, in order to encourage active participation and learning of students. Assessment Approach An examination and coursework will constitute 60% and 40% of the overall grade of the subject respectively. The written examination aims to assess students ability to apply concepts learned for solving problems on daily maintenance works. Coursework which includes in-class tests, oral presentations and written reports on specific topics serves to consolidate students knowledge, and to assess students understanding to the topics chosen, as well as their analytical and communication skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Lecher, N. Heating, Cooling, Lighting Design Methods for Architect. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (latest ed.). References Brown, G.Z. Sun, Wind and Light Architectural Design Strategies. John Wiley & Sons. (latest ed.). Building Design and Development in Hong Kong. Division of Building Science and Technology. City University of Hong Kong Press. ( 273

282 Ching, F.D.K. Architecture: Form, Space and Order. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (latest ed.). Construct for Excellence. Report of the Construction Industry Review Committee. January (free download). Fanger, P.O. Thermal Comfort: Analysis and applications in environmental engineering. McGraw- Hill. (1972). Goldstein, E.B. Sensation and Perception. Wadsworth Publishing Company, California. (latest ed.). McMullan, R. Environmental Science in Building, Palgrave Macmillan. (latest ed.). Moore, F. Environmental Control Systems heating cooling lighting. McGraw-Hill Inc. (latest ed.). Reid, E. Understanding Buildings: A Multi-disciplinary Approach. Longman Group Ltd. (latest ed.). Stein, B. and Reynolds, J.S. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment. John Wiley. (latest ed.). Wong, W.S. Building Enclosure in Hong Kong, Hong Kong University Press. (latest ed.). 274

283 CC3401 Applied Business Computing Project Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 6 hours of Lecture 22 hours of Tutorial 14 hours of Laboratory (supervised) 28 hours of Laboratory (unsupervised) Prerequisites Satisfactory completion of 6 or more Award-specific subjects offered under the Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business award including (a) CC2201 Principles of Programming & (b) CC3403 Applied Statistical Methods Exclusion CC3206 Programming Project & CC3314 Engineering Project Assessment 100% Coursework Aims This subject provides students studying for the Associate in Statistics and Computing for Business award an opportunity to integrate and apply their statistics and computing knowledge and skills acquired in earlier semesters through a practical group project applied to solve business problems. It aims to develop and explore the capabilities of students to analyse and solve a business problem. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: conduct a thorough search on relevant literature, materials or sources relating to their selected problem area leading to an awareness, precise definition and specification of the problem demonstrate critical thinking in the formulation of models and solutions implement feasible solutions to business problems using one or more techniques communicate and present clearly and concisely their solutions to business problems manage their group project efficiently, effectively and collaboratively work responsibly, effectively and appropriately as an individual and as part of a group Project Description Under the guidance of the subject lecturer, students are expected to work in groups of 4 for one or more feasible solutions for business problems. The total effort required from each student is approximately 42 hours of staff contact and 28 hours of laboratory and 98 hours of independent work and independent study, which includes the total time spent on literature search, background reading, fact finding, project development, and report writing. 275

284 Projects are normally proposed by the subject lecturer. However, students may propose projects in their areas of interest, subject to the approval by the scheme leader or his/her delegate. Projects should be problem-oriented and the nature of the problem should be related to a business application. Application of statistical/computing technique and/or software is expected. Teaching/Learning Approach Lecture hours are for the delivery of information related to project requirements and development environment. Tutorial hours are used to review student s development in the approach to the problem, to approve work allocation proposed by students. These hours are also for progress monitoring; students presentations of their design and their solutions to the project. Supervised laboratory hours are for environment familiarization, progress demonstrations and guidance for problem solving in laboratory environment. Each project group has to present formally the scope of the project, their approach to the project, and demonstrate the operational features of their solutions. Assessment Approach The deliverables required from each project group are: an initial project proposal, an approach to the project, and a final report (including any form of deliverables). The deadlines for these are week 3, week 5 and week 14 of the semester. Students will be assessed by the subject lecturer based on the following set of criteria and weighting: i. Problem Identification and Specification (Literature Search) 20% ii. Problem Solving (Critical Thinking) 40% iii. Communication & Presentation (Demonstration and Reports) 30% iv. Project Management and Self-Discipline 10% Indicative Reading References Reading is based on the project topics. 276

285 CC3403 Applied Statistical Methods Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with an overview of the linear model approach (regression analysis) and the sum of squares approach (analysis of variance) to analyze data. It enables students to have a thorough understanding of the methods of regression analysis as one of the most widely used statistical techniques for analyzing data. The subject helps students to develop their ability to analyze the practical problems with the use of computer statistical packages such as MINITAB and SPSS, as well as commercial software EXCEL. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: gain basic knowledge and understanding of the analysis of variance (ANOVA) approach to analyze data, as well as the assumptions behind ANOVA identify and describe fixed-effects model and random-effects model when dealing with onefactor ANOVA problems analyze and report the results of the ANOVA problems and assess their significance formulate and tackle simple/multiple linear regression problems so as to identify the appropriate model for the problems perform variables selection, estimation and inference on the parameters of the regression model built, and to diagnose if any problems arise due to violation of assumptions of least square regression models develop the competence in the use of appropriate statistical packages/commercial software for the analysis of data using univariate ANOVA and linear least squares regression approaches manage their own learning and to make use of appropriate texts, learning materials and relevant web-sites develop problem-solving abilities 277

286 Indicative Contents Simple Linear Regression Model and assumptions; least squares estimation of parameters; inference on the parameters; coefficient of determination; confidence interval for the mean value of the response variable; prediction interval; test for lack of fit; examination of residuals. Multiple Linear Regression Models An extension of the simple linear regression model and as a special case of the general linear model y = Xb + e ; estimation and inference on the parameters; partial F-tests; polynomial regression. Variable Selection and Model Building Selection of independent variables; criteria for subset regression; the methods of all regressions, backward elimination, forward selection and stepwise regressions. Indicator Variables Concept of indicator variables; use of indicator variables. Multicollinearity The problem of multicollinearity; multicollinearity diagnostics; solutions to multicollinearity. Autocorrelation Sources and effects of autocorrelation; detecting the presence of autocorrelation; parameter estimation procedures with autocorrelated errors. Analysis of Variance One-way classification, partitioning of the total sum of squares and the degrees of freedom; ANOVA table; fixed-effects model and random-effects model; expectations of mean squares, estimation of the overall mean and components of variance. Regression approach to ANOVA. Teaching/Learning Approach The first four intended outcomes will be achieved via lectures and tutorial exercises. The fifth and sixth will be acquired through tutorial discussions and statistical package laboratory sessions. Assessment Approach The first four learning outcomes are assessed by tests and examinations. The third, fifth and sixth learning outcomes are assessed by computer assignments with real data. 278

287 Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks Kutner, M.H., Neter, J. and Wasserman, W. Applied Linear Statistical Models. Irwin. (latest ed.). Walpole, R.E, Myers, R.H. and Myers, S.L. Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). References Bowerman, B.L., O'Connell, R.T. and Dickey, D.A. Linear Statistical Models, An Applied Approach. Duxbury. (latest ed.). Collet, D. Modelling Binary Data. Chapman and Hall. (latest ed.). Dielman, T.E. Applied Regression Analysis for Business and Economics. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). Draper, N.R. and Smith, H. Applied Regression Analysis. Wiley. (latest ed.). 279

288 CC3406 Basic Immunology Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 24 hours of Lecture 12 hours of Tutorial 6 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject introduces to the students the fundamental principles of immunology and helps students to understand the immunological responses encountered in the beauty and health sector. Students are also expected to learn some of the basic immunological techniques applicable to the beauty industry. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: track the development of immunology from past to present and future familiarise themselves with the anatomy and cell types of the lymphoid system describe the underlying principles of the humoral and cell-mediated immunity recognise the manifestations of some of the common immunological responses like infection, allergy and autoimmunity describe the underlying principles of basic immunological techniques like vaccination carry out simple immunological tests such as allergens testing or tissue typing demonstrate enhanced analytical and critical thinking skills appreciate professional attitude required of health care workers Indicative Contents History and Future Potential Important discoveries and theories by earlier scientists, current developments and future role in biology and medicine. Anatomy of the Lymphoid System Interconnection of the blood and lymphatic systems, primary and secondary lymphoid organs, lymphocyte recirculation. Cell Types of the Immune System Origin, properties and biological functions of phagocytes and accessory cells, B and T lymphocytes; cell markers, characteristics of lymphokines, interactions of cells leading to humoral immunity and cell-mediated immunity. 280

289 Antigen Basic properties of antigen, immunogen, hapten and epitopes; adjuvants, major antigenic systems of the body. Immunoglobulin Structure and function, generation of antibody diversity, regulation of antibody response including idiotypic network. The Complement System Activation pathways, action of activated complement factors, biological significance. Immunity Against Infections Host defence mechanisms including innate immunity and specific immunity, immunization and vaccines. Wounds and Wound-healing Types and phases of wound-healing; scar, hypertrophic scar, and keloid formation and treatment. Allergy and Autoallergy Types of hypersensitivity reactions, organ specific and non-organ specific autoimmune diseases, past beliefs and current concepts of autoimmunity. Immunodeficiency States Primary and secondary immunodeficiency, possible mechanisms and its effects on skin appearance, for example, systemic lupus erythematosis. Transplantation Immunology Types of grafts, tolerance and rejection, HLA typing, immunosuppressive agents including cyclosporin. Immunological Techniques Antigen-antibody interaction, antibody specificity and cross-reactions, principles, methodology and applications of immunological tests; production and use of monoclonal antibody. Teaching/Leaning Approach Lectures emphasize the understanding and explanation of basic information and relevant concepts of immunology. The principles are illustrated with formal lectures and supplemented with video viewing. Tutorials provide a venue for discussion, revision and reinforcement of the lecture materials. Tutorial questions and discussion topics are set to stimulate students provocative thinking and learning. Laboratory sessions are designed to illustrate the theoretical content delivered in lectures and the application of simple immunological tests like allergens testing or tissue typing as applicable. 281

290 Assessment Students are required to search and read, comment and criticise, summarise and present information in one individual assignment and several laboratory reports. One test and one end-of-year examination will be used respectively to check the knowledge assimilated and reinforced from the lecture and tutorial. Each of the three components, the individual assignment, laboratory reports and the test, will each contribute one-third of the marks of the continuous assessment. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Wood, P. Understanding Immunology. Essex: Pearson Education Limited. (2001). References Roitt, I. and Delves, P. Essential Immunology. Oxford: Blackwell Science. (2001). Roitt, I. and Robson, A. Really Essential Medical Immunology. Oxford: Blackwell Science. (2000). 282

291 CC3408 Biology of Ageing Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture / Seminar 14 hours of Tutorial / Guided study Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% Coursework Aims This subject enables the students to acquire the basic understanding of the various theories of ageing as well as the biochemical, genetic and physiological mechanisms of ageing. The study of the subject also enables the students to recognize the risk factors that accompany age-related changes and possible strategies in enhancing healthy ageing. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: appreciate and discuss the topics related to biological sciences in ageing use appropriate terms to describe the basic physiological mechanisms of ageing and age-related changes in humans interpret the interrelationship between ageing, physiological changes and decline recognize the increasing risk of chronic, degenerative diseases upon ageing identify possible options of strategies that can promote healthy ageing and enhance quality of life in the elderly demonstrate enhanced problem-solving skills Indicative Contents How and Why Do We Age? Definition of terms in ageing; theories of ageing, e.g. mitochondrial, membrane, genetic, free radical, disposable soma, wear and tear, rate of living, biological clock theories of ageing; evolutionary aspects of ageing. Measuring Age-related Changes and Their Impact on Risk of Disease Age-related changes in cells, tissues and organs; changes in physiological/homeostatic systems; signs and symptoms of age; age-related mortality, all causes and specific causes. Reactive Species, Ageing and Disease Source and action of reactive species; consequences of oxidative damage to lipid, protein, DNA; antioxidant defence; ROS an unavoidable challenge? Description of causes and consequences of age-related diseases brief description of causes and consequences of common age-related disorders, such as arthritis, cancer, cataract, coronary heart disease, dementia, diabetes mellitus, osteoporosis. 283

292 Promoting Healthy Ageing Diet and lifestyle choices in relation to ageing and risk of age-related diseases; food and prevention of cancer and heart disease; role of exercise; can we delay ageing? role of hormone replacement therapy, antioxidants, vitamins, Chinese herbs. Enhancing Quality of Life of the Elderly Physiological, social and spiritual aspects of healthy ageing; support services; societal goals and social effects of healthy ageing. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures and seminars focus on the elaboration of the basic theories and the physiological principles relevant to the biology of ageing. Students are encouraged to question and to be actively involved in their learning process. Guided reading and web-based learning sessions are introduced to encourage self-reliant learning. They are expected to acquire a solid background knowledge in physiology, biology, biochemistry and health sciences. A variety of learning activities such as tutorials, team projects, group discussion and student-led seminars will be used to provide students with the opportunity to engage in more active learning as well as peer learning. These learning activities are designed to develop students abilities in identifying the complex relationship between ageing and physiological changes and to apply knowledge in promotion of healthy ageing. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools, including individual written reports; team projects, student-led seminars and group presentations are used to evaluate students level of understanding; analytical mind and abilities to put theories into application. Indicative Reading Arking, R. Biology of Aging. Sunderland MA, Sinauer Associates Inc. (1998). Beckman, K.B. and Ames, B.N. The free radical theory of aging matures. Physiological Reviews. (1998). Harman, D., Holliday, R. and Meydani, M. Towards Prolongation of the Healthy Life Span. New York, New York Academy of Sciences. (1998). Kirkwood, T. Time of Our Lives. London, Weidenfield & Nicolson. (1999). Mera, S.L. Understanding Disease: pathology and prevention. Cheltenham, Stanley Thornes Publishers Ltd. (1997). Sadler, M., Strain, J.J. and Cabellero, B. The Encyclopedia of Human Nutrition. London, Academic Press. (1999). pp

293 CC3409 Business Forecasting Methods Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites CC3403 Applied Statistical Methods Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims The aim of this subject is to provide students with the concepts and techniques of time series and forecasting. An applied approach will be emphasized. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: differentiate the basic theories of several time series analysis and forecasting approaches synthesize the relevant statistical knowledge and techniques for forecasting use popular statistical software for the analysis of time series and forecasting interpret analysis results and make recommendations for the choice of forecasting methods produce and evaluate forecasts for given time series present analysis results of forecasting problems apply background knowledge or newly obtained information to review and investigate possible outcomes Indicative Contents Introduction to Forecasting and Smoothing Model Forecasting and time series, forecasting methods and errors, simple and double exponential smoothing, Winter's method. Decomposition Methods Trend fitting, additive decomposition, multiplicative decomposition. Nonseasonal Box-Jenkins Models and Their Identification Stationarity, sample autocorrelation and partial autocorrelation function, tentative identification of ARMA models. Estimation, Diagnostic Checking, and Forecasting for Nonseasonal Box-Jenkins Models Estimating model parameters, diagnostic checking, and forecasting. Seasonal Box-Jenkins Models Stationarity, identification, estimation, diagnostic checking and forecasting. Case studies. 285

294 Teaching/Learning Approach The first and second learning outcomes will be achieved via lectures and exercises. The third and fourth will be achieved through laboratory sessions and computing assignments. The fifth and sixth will be acquired via case studies using real data sets. Assessment Approach The first and second learning outcomes will be assessed by written assignments, tests and an examination, while all others will be assessed by computing assignments and case studies. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks Bowerman, B. and O Connell, R. Forecasting and Time Series an Applied Approach. Duxbury Press. (latest ed.). Hanke, J.E., Reitsch, A.G. and Wichern, D.W. Business Forecasting. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Reference Harvey, A.C. Time Series Models. Harvester Wheatsheaf. (latest ed.). 286

295 CC3411 Chinese Family and Culture Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-Science Medium of Instruction Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese), supplemented by English Teaching Pattern 28 hours Lecture 14 hours Seminar Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% Coursework Aims This subject introduces students to the culture of Chinese family. It equips students with both the basic understanding of the tradition of Chinese familism in Hong Kong and Mainland China, as well as the capacity to reflect on the continuity of traditional Chinese elements in families amid the irresistible trend of modernization in Chinese societies. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the basic elements of Chinese culture and their impacts on family relationships. reflect on personality development and moral development and the Chinese family. examine critically the impact of modernization on Chinese families in Hong Kong and Mainland China. describe and discuss core issues of development of Chinese families in Hong Kong and Mainland China; think critically and creatively on issues relating to Chinse family and culture. Indicative Contents Basic Elements of Chinese Culture and Chinese Familism Confucianism and the relational concept of self; Three bonds and five relationships in Chinese humanism; Differential mode of association; Self, family, and society in Chinese culture (renquing, mianzi, and quanxi); Chinese familism and patrilineal culture; Patriarchy and gender inequality in Chinese familism; Traditional Chinese family structures and family rites. Personality and Moral Development and the Chinese Family Development of Chinese personality in family; Kohlberg s stages of moral development; universal ethical principle vs. Chinese situational moral-ethical consideration in interpersonal framework; Morality and modernization in Chinese society. Family in Transition in Chinese societies Modernization and the changes of family structures and functions; Modern Chinese self and cultural transformation; Changing Chinese families in Hong Kong and Mainland China: utilitarianistic familism, new forms of Chinese families, Chinese immigrant families, and family crises. 287

296 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will emphasize clarification of concepts, delineation of theories and summarization of contextual information. Occasional audio-visual presentation, group discussions and exercises might be arranged in the lectures. Seminars will emphasize application of concepts/principles and contextual reflection with an interactive approach. The activities in seminars normally include student presentations, class exercises and discussion on articles and local issues. Assessment Approach Students will be assessed by their coursework including (1) test on their understanding of concepts and theories, (2) tutorial presentation and movie/text reflection on their ability to relate theoretical understanding to local context, and (3) term paper and / or project reports on overall integrative understanding and reflection of the subject. Students will also be assessed on their participation in lectures and tutorials. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Cherlin, Andrew, Public & Private Families: An Introduction. Boston: McGraw-Hill, 喬 健 ( 主 編 ): 中 國 家 庭 及 其 變 遷 香 港 : 香 港 中 文 大 學 社 會 科 學 院 暨 香 港 亞 太 研 究 所, 1991 年 References Slote, Walter and George DeVos, eds., Confucianism and the Family, University of California Press, 劉 錫 霖 郭 康 健 ( 主 編 ): 蛻 變 中 的 中 國 家 庭, 香 港 : 廣 角 鏡 出 版 社 有 限 公 司,1997 年 楊 國 樞 黃 光 國 ( 主 編 ): 中 國 人 的 心 理 與 行 為 ( 一 九 八 九 ) 台 北 : 桂 冠 圖 書 公 司,1991 年 張 懷 承 : 中 國 的 家 庭 與 倫 理 北 京 : 中 國 人 民 大 學 出 版 社,1988 年 費 孝 通 : 鄉 土 中 國 香 港 : 三 聯 書 店 ( 香 港 ) 有 限 公 司,1985 年 288

297 CC3423 Economic and Social Statistics Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject aims to introduce some elementary techniques of statistics particularly useful in economic and social investigations. These include the fundamental concepts of sample survey methods and the use of statistical packages for the processing of data. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the elementary time series analysis techniques and perform statistical forecasting master techniques for index number construction and assess critically its uses and its limitations identify the major social and economic indicators and assess critically their potential applications master the techniques for carrying out statistical sample surveys including sampling design, questionnaire design, data collection and handling of non-response and bias master the techniques for data presentation using statistical packages develop problem-solving abilities Indicative Contents Time Series Modeling time series using seasonal decomposition method, extraction of the secular trends using methods such as least squares, moving averages and semi-average, seasonal variations, residual component analysis, forecasting; exponential smoothing. Index Number Simple and weighted average of price and quantity relatives; construction of simple aggregate (Paasche and Laspeyres) indices; time series of relatives, time series deflation, real value index; fixed and chain base relatives, changing base; composite indices; uses, limitations of index numbers; examples of index numbers in social and economic. 289

298 Survey Method Steps in overall planning of a survey; design and selection of samples, probability sampling designs, sampling frames, sampling errors; design of questionnaires; methods of data collection, pilot survey, non-response and bias; report of survey results. Data Presentation using Statistical Packages Counting survey responses for a single variable, summarizing data, scales of measurement, interpretation of frequency tables, charts and descriptive statistics; counting survey responses for combinations of variables, cross-classification tables, use of graphs and plots. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will be used to introduce the indicative contents. Illustrative economic and social cases will be used to strengthen students' knowledge. Students are required to reinforce their knowledge through assignments. Assessment Approach The continuous assessment is comprised of homework assignments and tests. The assignments and the test are used to assist the students to reflect on and review their overall progress. The end-ofsemester examination is used to assess the overall knowledge acquired by the students. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Hansen, M.H., Hurwitz, W.N. and Madow, L.H. Sample Survey Methods and Theory, Vol. I. Methods and Application. Wiley. (latest ed.). Leonard, J.K. Schaum's Outline of Business Statistics. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). References Moser, C.A. and Kalton, G. Survey Methods in Social Investigation. Heinemann. (latest ed.). Norusis, M.J. The SPSS Guide to Data Analysis. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.). Sekaran, U. Research Methods for Business: A Skill Building Approach. Wiley. (latest ed.). 290

299 CC3430 Financial Mathematics Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject aims to develop students' ability in deriving and understanding concepts of financial mathematics by applying a mathematical approach to the valuation of all derivatives, including futures and options. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand concepts in future markets perform price evaluation for the futures understand concepts in options markets perform price evaluation for the options evaluate investment risk and apply mathematical tools to analyze decisions in investment apply background knowledge or newly obtained information to review and investigate possible outcomes Indicative Contents Futures Futures markets; The use of futures for hedging; Forward and future prices; Interest rate futures; Swaps. Options Options Markets, Calls and puts; Properties of stock option prices; Trading strategies involving options; Model of the behaviour of stock prices; The Black-Scholes analysis; Options on stock indices; Currencies and futures contracts.; General approach to pricing derivatives. Risk Management Stop-loss strategy; Delta hedging; Theta, Gamma, Vega and Rho of a portfolio of derivatives; Scenario analysis; Creating options synthetically. 291

300 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will be used to introduce the subject materials. Illustrative cases on future and options will be used to strengthen students' concepts. Students are required to reinforce their knowledge through assignments. Assessment Approach The continuous assessment comprises homework assignments and tests. The assignments are used to assist the students to reflect and review on their progress. The end-of-semester examination is used to assess the knowledge acquired by the students. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Briys, E., Mai, H.M., Bellalah, M. and de Varenne, F. Options, Futures and Exotic Derivatives. Wiley. (latest ed.). References Carter, C. Futures and Options Markets: An Introduction. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Hull, J.C. Options, Futures and Other Derivatives. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). 292

301 CC3434 General Microbiology Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Exclusion CC3450 Introduction to Microbiology Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject identifies the necessary issues on microorganisms, infections and human defences. It also provides concepts on disinfection and disease prevention. Studying this subject can help students apply the knowledge for the maintenance of personal hygiene and be alert to different pathological conditions caused by microorganisms. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: comprehend and describe the structure and functions of microorganisms that infect humans and the various modes of transmission of the infections describe and explain host-parasite relationships familiarize themselves with etiology and pathogenesis of infections on different body systems caused by microbes conduct proper methods for controlling infections in everyday life, laboratory or health care settings Indicative Contents Structure of Microorganisms Classification of microorganisms: bacteria, viruses, fungi and protozoa; Structure of microorganisms. Host-parasite Relationship Host-pathogen interactions; Defense mechanisms of the human body; Pathogenicity of microorganisms. Transmission of Infections Airborne infections; Water-borne infections; Food-borne infections; Contact-borne infections; Zoonotic infections; Hospital-acquired infections. 293

302 Human Infectious Diseases Respiratory tract infections; Gastrointestinal tract infections; Urinary tract infections; Wound infections. Prevention of Infections Principles and applications of sterilization and disinfection; Immunisation; Introduction to antibiotics. Teaching/Learning Approach Theories and applications of knowledge will be emphasized in lectures. Tutorials will be conducted with problem based activities, classroom feedback, case studies, presentations, and discussions to enhance understanding of the knowledge acquired for disease prevention and maintenance of personal hygiene. Students will be encouraged to discuss with teachers and other students. Assessment Approach The knowledge in microbiology on basic structures of microorganisms, host and parasite relationship, infectious methods and related diseases will be assessed through presentations, classroom feedback, case studies, group discussion, tests and examinations. In the assessment, students should analyse clinical cases given and derive preventive measures in model clinical settings. The assessment tasks will be given from time to time throughout the semester to monitor the process of learning. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Burton, G.R.W. and Engelkirk, P.G. Microbiology for the Health Sciences. Philadelphia: JB Lippincott. (latest ed.). References Meers, P.D. The Microbiology and Epidemiology of Infection for Health Science Students. London: Chapman and Hall. (latest ed.). Talaro, K.P. Foundations in Microbiology, Basic Principles. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Tortora, G.J., Funke, B.R. and Case, C.L. Microbiology: An introduction. California: Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Co. (last ed.). 294

303 CC3450 Introduction to Microbiology Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Exclusion CC3434 General Microbiology Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject identifies the necessary issue on microorganisms and human defences. It provides students with the concepts on disease and infection prevention. Studying this subject can help students to apply the knowledge of microbiology in everyday life and to become alert to different pathological conditions as well as infections related to their field of study and professions. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognise and identify the nature of microorganisms, actions and outcomes of infectious diseases understand the host-parasite relationship and speculate various human defences against pathogens describe the proper aseptic procedures and carry out suitable preventive measures against pathogens in authentic situations Indicative Contents Introduction to Microorganisms Structure, properties and classification of microorganisms: bacteria, virus, fungus, eukaryotic microorganisms. Host-parasite Relationship Host-pathogen interactions; Defences mechanisms of the human body; Pathogens and normal flora. Modes of Transmission of Infections Contact-borne infections; Respiratory-borne infections; Water-borne infections; Blood-borne infections; Food-borne infections. 295

304 Causative Agents and Pathogenesis of Common Communicable Diseases Skin, hair and nail infections; Wound infections; Body fluid infections; Respiratory tract infections. Prevention of Cross-infections Principles and applications of sterilization and disinfection methods; Introduction to antiseptics and antibiotics; Immunization. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures provide students with a good understanding of both the relevant theories and applications of knowledge. Group discussion and cases studies will be included in the tutorials in order to further enhance understanding of the knowledge acquired, to encourage interactions between teacher and students and to illustrate how principles can be applied into practice. Assessment Approach Assessment will be in the form of a written examination, an oral presentation and a written report. The examination and coursework will constitute 40% and 60% of the overall grade of the subject respectively. Written examination aims to assess students knowledge in microbiology on basic structures of microorganisms, host and parasite relationship, infectious and preventive methods. The oral presentation and the written report on the in-depth case study serve to consolidate students knowledge and assess their analytical and communication skills in the field of beauty and therapy. The assessment tasks will be given from time to time throughout the semester to monitor the process of learning. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Jensen, M.M., Wright, D.D. and Robison, R.A. Microbiology for the Health Sciences. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). References Block, S.S. Disinfection, Sterilization, and Preservation. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. (latest ed.). Kennamer, M. Basic Infection Control for Health Care Providers. Albany, Delmar Thomson Learning. (latest ed.). Tortora, G.J., Funke, B.R. and Case, C.L. Microbiology: An introduction. California, Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Co. (latest ed.). 296

305 CC3456 Management Information Systems Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This course aims to acquaint students with the value and contribution of information systems to commercial organizations, with particular reference to the application, development and controls of information systems. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the major features of an information system and the environment within which it operates recognize the importance of the functions and roles of information systems in administrative and commercial organizations understand the application of information systems in commercial organizations develop an understanding of the development and controls of information systems from the administrative and commercial perspective develop a simple information system based on the requirements of commercial organizations apply background knowledge or newly obtained information to review and investigate possible outcomes Indicative Contents Conceptual Foundations Information, Computers and Business Management; Information Systems Concepts; Components and Structure; Information Processing and Decision Making; Impact of Computer Based Information System (CBIS) on Organization and Management. System Development and Implementation Approaches to Systems Development; Systems Analysis and Design Methods; Programming and Testing; Implementation. MIS Applications Functional Applications: Accounting, Financial, Production, Marketing, Personnel & Administrative Systems; Decision Support Systems; Expert Systems. 297

306 Teaching/Learning Approach Basic principles and concepts will be introduced through lectures. In tutorials, students will meet in small groups to discuss specific topics related to the subject or to explore further matters raised in lectures. Tutorials are designed to allow students to have hands-on practice on the design and development of a simple information system. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, simple system prototyping, tests and an examination. They are designed to assess students understanding and appreciation of the use of information systems in today s business environments. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Stair, R. M. Principles of Information Systems. Thomson/Course Technology. (latest ed.). References Laudon, K. C. and Laudon, J. P. Management Information Systems: Managing the Digital Firm. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). McLeod, R. Jr. and Schell, G. P. Management Information Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). O Brien, J. A. Introduction to Information Systems. McGraw-Hill/Irwin. (latest ed.). Oz, E. Management Information Systems. Thomson/Course Technology. (latest ed.). 298

307 CC3458 Operations Research for Business Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims The aim of this subject is to provide students with a basic understanding of the nature of operations research and of the types of problems that it can solve. It enables students to choose the correct techniques to suit a particular problem with applications in resource management, network models, decision analysis and project management. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: implement several basic deterministic and stochastic operations research models synthesize the mathematical knowledge and techniques required in operations research model formulation execute and appraise the main algorithms for solving such operations research problems interpret the results of findings under the application of the algorithm evaluate critically for improvement of findings Indicative Contents The Nature of Operations Research The history and development of operations research; art of modeling; phases of operations research. Linear Programming Formulation of linear programming models; graphical solution of linear programs in two variables; the simplex methods; the dual problem in linear programming; the transportation problem. Game Theory Two persons zero sum game with applications. Project Scheduling by PERT-CPM Arrow/network diagram representation; critical path calculations, construction of the time chart and resource leveling; project control. 299

308 Dynamic Programming Mathematical formulation; functional recursion equation; Bellman's Principle of Optimality; multistage decision making problem; relationship between dynamic programming and linear programming. Teaching/Learning Approach The first learning outcome will be achieved via lectures. The second and third will be developed via lectures, demonstration and exercises. The fourth will be acquired via lectures and exercises. Assessment Approach Quizzes, short tests and assignments will be used to assess the second and third learning outcomes. All outcomes will be assessed in the examination. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Taha, H.A. Operations Research - An Introduction. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). References Hillier, F.S. and Lieberman, G.J. Introduction to Operations Research. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Winston, W.L. Operations Research: Applications and Algorithms. Duxbury Press. (latest ed.). 300

309 CC3467 Social Development in China Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-Science Medium of Instruction Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese), supplemented by English Teaching Pattern 24 hours Lecture 18 hours Seminar Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% Coursework Aims This subject provides students with an overview of the issues in the course of social development in China after It helps students to critically evaluate various social scientific theories relevant to the explanation of social development in China as well as certain commonly-held views concerning China s development experience. Taking a critical approach, it helps students to examine the dilemmas in social development in China. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the issues in the course of social development in China. make use of different theoretical perspectives in examining social development in China. analyse significant issues of development in China. identify the dilemmas in social development that China is facing. effectively communicate information, arguments and analysis in a variety of forms. Indicative Contents Growing social inequality Economic reform; Globalization; Class structure; Poverty eradication. Population, family and women Gender equality; Divorce; One-child policy. Employment and state enterprise reform Privatization; Danwei; Unemployment; Social security. Rural reform and peasants Rural poverty; Rural industrialization; Rural discontent; Village democracy. Environmental problems and sustainable development Development model; Energy policy; Land utilization. 301

310 Teaching/Learning Approach This course consists of lectures and seminars. Lectures focus on the explication of concepts and methods of social research. They will be delivered, whenever necessary, with the aid of audio-visual materials and actual research reports. In sseminars, students are divided into small groups to conduct presentations of their research projects. To introduce the social development of China to students, this course will focus on specific social problems or social issues. Students are expected to choose a specific issue or problem, and then explore how the Chinese government and the people of China respond to it. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports and term essays, all designed to develop and assess students critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Mok, Ka-Ho, Social and Political Development in Post-Reform China, Macmillan Press (latest ed.). References MacPherson, Steward (ed), Social Development and Societies in Transition, Ashgate (1998). 王 偉 : 生 存 與 發 展 北 京 : 人 民 出 版 社 ( 最 新 版 ) 郭 繼 嚴 主 編 : 中 國 社 會 發 展 藍 皮 書 雲 南 : 雲 南 人 民 出 版 社 ( 最 新 版 ) 302

311 CC3471 Social Problems and Social Issues in Contemporary China Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-Science Medium of Instruction Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese), supplemented by English Teaching Pattern 24 hours Lecture 18 hours Seminar Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% Coursework Aims This subject equips students with both a reflective understanding of social problems and social issues from different sociological perspectives and frameworks and the ability to apply such knowledge to analyse social problems and social issues in contemporary China. Studying the subject will help develop both the analytical capacity and ethical awareness of students in order to comprehend the complex problems and issues encountered in the development process of modern China. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify social problems and social issues from different sociological perspectives and frameworks. analyse selected social problems and social issues in contemporary China from sociological perspectives and frameworks. demonstrate an awareness of the ethical dimension of different approaches in resolving social problems. organize and articulate arguments in a variety of ways that are clear and understandable. Indicative Contents Understanding Social Problems Definitions of social problems; Perspectives on studying social problems; Social problems in Chinese conceptualization. Historical Context of Contemporary China Modern China from 1911; PRC from 1949; Cultural Revolution; An open China from Social and Economic Context of Contemporary China Open-door policy from 1978; Special economic zones; Industrialization and urbanization; Rural reform. 303

312 Selected Problems/Issues in Contemporary China Selected topics from the following: Poverty and inequality; Corruption; Migrant labour; Unemployment; Drug; Marital crisis; Demographic crisis; Education; Health care; Ageing; Urban renewal; Urbanization; Social security. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will emphasize clarification of concepts, delineation of theories and summarization of contextual information. Occasional audio-visual presentations, group discussions and exercises might be arranged in lectures. Seminars will emphasize application of concepts/principles and contextual reflection with an interactive approach. The activities in seminars normally include student presentations, class exercises and discussion on articles and local issues. Assessment Approach Students will be assessed by their coursework including (1) problems sets or test on their understanding of concepts and theories and application of them, (2) seminar presentation and discussion paper on their ability to relate theories to the analysis of local issues, and (3) a term paper on overall integrative understanding and reflection of the subject. Students will also be assessed on their participation in lectures and tutorials. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks 陸 建 華 : 中 國 社 會 問 題 北 京 : 石 油 工 業 出 版 社,2002 年 苗 啟 明 楊 志 堅 : 中 國 社 會 發 展 問 題 探 索 昆 明 : 雲 南 民 族 出 版 社,2000 年 References Loseke, D.R. Thinking about Social Problems: An introduction to constructionist perspectives. New York: Aldine de Gruyter (1999). Rubington, E and Weinberg, M.S. The Study of Social Problems: Seven perspectives. Oxford: Oxford University Press (1995). 袁 亞 愚 等 著 : 社 會 學 家 的 分 析 : 中 國 社 會 問 題 北 京 : 中 國 社 會 出 版 社,1998 年 304

313 CC3475 Statistical Data Analysis Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 14 hours of Lecture 28 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% Coursework Aims This subject aims to familiarize students with the various ways for analyzing data and presenting analysis results through extensive hands-on experience, using commercial database system such as EXCEL, as well as statistical packages such as MINITAB and SPSS. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the basic functions for data analysis available in popular software packages synthesize the statistical knowledge and techniques required in data analysis software apply statistical techniques to analyze large data sets produce presentable results for statistical analysis interpret analysis results and make recommendations for actions based on analysis results define, formulate and solve problems in a systematic approach apply background knowledge or newly obtained information to review and investigate possible outcomes Indicative Contents File Management Worksheets and charts; page setup; preview and printing. Descriptive Statistics Measures of central tendency and dispersion; histogram; rank and percentile; table and tally; covariance and correlation. Probability Distribution Probabilities and cumulative probabilities of commonly used distributions such as binomial, Poisson, normal, t-, χ2- and F-distributions. Sampling and Simulation Sampling with and without replacement; random number generation; simulation of simple processes. 305

314 Inferences for Means Confidence interval for mean; hypothesis testing concerning single mean; one-tail and two-tail tests; p-values; confidence interval for difference of two means; hypothesis testing concerning difference of two means. χ 2 -test Contingency table; tests of goodness of fit and independence. Regression Simple linear regression; scatter plots; multiple linear regression. Teaching/Learning Approach The second learning outcome will be achieved via mainly lectures and exercises. The first learning outcome will developed via lectures, demonstration and practical exercise. The third and fourth will be acquired via sample cases, past student work, and practical examples. The fifth and sixth will be acquired via group and individual case assignments. Real life data will be used in examples and case assignments. Assessment Approach Quizzes and short tests will be used to assess the second learning outcome. All others will be assessed via cases undertaken in groups and individually. Indicative Reading References Catapult, Inc. Microsoft Access 2000, Step by Step. Microsoft Press. (latest ed.). King, N. Teach Yourself-Visual FoxPro 3 for Windows. MIS press. (latest ed.). Middleton, M.R. Data Analysis using Microsoft Excel. Duxbury Press. (latest ed.). 306

315 CC3476 Statistics for Business II Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites CC2425 Statistics for Business I OR CC3310 Statistics and Probaility Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims The subject aims to introduce to students the basic elements of statistical methods in estimation and hypothesis testing. Applications in business will be emphasized by using ample practical examples to illustrate the principles and methods. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand statistical techniques of estimation and hypothesis testing concerning population means, proportions and variances under different circumstances formulate the appropriate models for practical problems with special reference to project goals, data quality and appropriateness of model assumptions derive and assess critically the results from the analysis provide services to the industry with an awareness of local and international practices Indicative Contents Sampling Distributions Population and random samples. Sampling distributions related to sample means, sample proportions, and sample variances. Useful Distributions in Statistical Inference Definitions of normal, t, F and chi-square distributions; familiarisation with the relationships between these distributions and the use of corresponding tables. Estimation of Parameters Concept of a point estimator and unbiasedness. Concept of a confidence interval. Point and interval estimates of a mean and the difference between two means, a proportion and the difference between two proportions, a variance and the ratio of two variances. Sample size required for a specified precision in an estimate. Illustrative examples of their applications in business. 307

316 Test of Hypotheses Statistical hypotheses and their tests. Type I and type II errors. One-sided and two-sided tests. Tests of significance; levels of significance; test statistics; critical regions. Tests for an assumed mean, the difference between two means, an assumed proportion, the difference between two proportions, an assumed variance, and the ratio of two variances. Illustrations of their applications in business. The use of chi-square tests for goodness of fit and for independence; contingency tables. Illustrative examples of their applications in business. Nonparametric tests: the sign test, the signed rank test, the rank sum test, the Kolmogorov-Smirnov test, and the run test. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will be used to introduce the contents of subject. Illustrative business cases will be used to strengthen students' concepts of this subject. Students are required to reinforce their knowledge through assignments. Assessment Approach The continuous assessment comprises of homework assignments and tests. The assignments and the tests are used to assist the students to reflect on and review their progress on their overall learning outcomes. The end-of-semester examination is used to assess the overall learning outcomes achieved by the students. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Carlson, W.L. and Thorne, B. Applied Statistical Methods: for Business, Economics, and the Social Sciences. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). References McClave, J.T., Benson, P.G. and Sincich, T.L. Statistics for Business and Economics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Montgomery, D.C. and Runger, G.C. Applied Statistics and Probability for Engineers. John Wiley. (latest ed.). 308

317 CC3477 Survey Design and Analysis Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject aims to introduce to the students the basic concepts of the survey sampling theory including a brief introduction to the methods of sample selection, estimation, sampling variance, standard error of estimation in finite population, development of sampling theory for use in sample survey problems, and sources of errors in surveys and mathematical treatments of types of errors. Applications will be emphasized by using ample practical examples to illustrate the principles and methods. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand concepts and techniques in sampling methods formulate sampling plans with special reference to survey goals, sampling frames availability, and resource constraints assess critically the appropriateness of competing sampling plans understand solution methodology to estimate population parameters for sampling plans conduct sample surveys within the context of socially acceptable professional and ethical practices be prepared for life-long learning Indicative Contents Need for Sample Survey and Basic Concept Types of sampling errors, sampling and complete enumeration, principal steps in a sample survey, terms and definitions in sample surveys. Sample Design, Methods and Theory Simple random sampling, stratified random sampling, systematic random sampling, varying probability sampling, ratio and regression estimation, cluster random sampling, multi-stage sampling, multi-phase sampling. Types of Errors and Biases Non-sampling errors, response and non-response errors, measurement and control of errors. 309

318 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will be used to introduce the contents of the subject. Illustrative cases will be used to strengthen students' concepts. Students are required to reinforce their knowledge through assignments. Assessment Approach The continuous assessment comprises homework assignments and tests. The assignments are used to assist the students to reflect on and review their progress on their overall learning outcomes. The end-of-semester examination is used to assess the overall learning outcomes achieved acquired by the students. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook Thompson, S.K. Sampling. Wiley. (latest ed.). References Hansen, M.H., Hurwitz, W.N. and Madow, L.H. Sample Survey Methods and Theory, Vol. I & II. Wiley. (latest ed.). Kish, L. Survey Sampling. Wiley. (latest ed.). Levy, P.S. and Lemeshow, S. Sampling of Populations: Methods and Applications. Wiley. (latest ed.). 310

319 CC3487 Introduction to Pathophysiology and Pharmacology Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial / Seminar Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject focuses on the biological basis of common pathophysiological conditions and the differences between normal body function and pathological alternations to normal functions. It also emphasizes the general principles of pharmacology that contribute to the students acquisition of a general basis for further study in areas related to healthcare and applied biological science. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: outline the patterns of inheritance of familial disease list the various factors which can cause pathological changes describe causes and consequences of selected disease states, including the common chronic diseases such as cancer, coronary heart disease and diabetes mellitus explore the relationship between selected environmental agents/pollution and named disease states describe the ageing process identify the relationship between ageing and chronic, degenerative diseases describe the effect of nutritional and lifestyle choices on ageing and the risks of age-related, chronic and degenerative diseases describe the concepts of pharmacokinetics, therapeutic drug monitoring and iatrogenic disease Indicative Contents Causes of Disease: Inherited, Acquired and Multifactorial Disorders Patterns of inheritance; gene linkage and penetration; multiple allele systems and incomplete expression; normal and abnormal karyotype; translocation, balanced and unbalanced; causes and consequences of abnormal karyotype with selected examples; factors causing acquired disease, e.g. nutrition-related, trauma, toxins etc. Disorders of Cell Growth & Tissue Differentiation; Carcinogenesis Definition/explanation of causes and consequences of cellular changes, e.g., hyperplasia, metaplasia, atrophy, dysplasia, with selected examples; comparison of benign and malignant neoplasms; criteria and classification of malignancy; behaviour, clinical effects and methods of spread of tumours; factors involved in carcinogenesis. 311

320 Immune Response and Disorders of the Immune System Primary and secondary immune responses; the role of the spleen, the thymus, lymph nodes and lymphoctyes; the production and action of antibodies; immunodeficiency states, including AIDS; autoimmune disease and allergies. Inflammatory Response Protective action of inflammation; vascular changes and cellular responses in acute inflammation; possible outcomes of acute inflammation; characteristics of chronic inflammation; causes and consequences of chronic inflammation; hypersensitivity reactions; pathological changes of the respiratory system caused by coronavirus and related immunological response of the body (severe acute respiratory syndrome). Disorders of Metabolism Cellular changes in disorders of metabolism; causes and consequences of selected disorders of metabolism, e.g. inborn errors of metabolism, diabetes mellitus and the metabolic syndrome, renal failure, coronary heart disease. Environmental Factors in the Aetiology of Disease Effects of improper sewage, ionising radiation, microbes, cigarette smoking, heavy metals, stress, pollution etc., and their relationships to named disorders and disease states, e.g., cancer, TB, autoimmune disease, SARS. Theories of Aging and Impact of Age on Risks of Disease Life span, life expectancy; theories of ageing, e.g., mitochondrial, membrane, genetic, free radical, disposable soma, wear and tear, rate of living, biological clock; age-related changes in cells, tissues and organs; changes in physiological/homeostatic system; signs and symptoms of age; age-related mortality, all causes and specific causes; description of age-related diseases e.g., cancer, cataract, coronary heart disease, dementia, diabetes mellitus, osteoporosis. Role of Nutrition and Lifestyle in Lowering Risks of Chronic Age-related and Degenerative Diseases Diet and antioxidant defence; antioxidant micronutrients; overnutrition, with particular reference to calorie intake, saturated fat and trace metals; undernutrition, general and specific marco- and micro- nutrient deficiencies, e.g. of protein, folate, iron, iodine, antioxidant vitamins; effects of smoking, exercise. Concepts of Pharmacokinetics, Therapeutic Drug monitoring and Iatrogenic Disease Absorption and distribution of drugs; dosage calculation and monitoring; half-life and elimination; side-effects and adverse reactions; drug-related iatrogenic diseases; selective toxicity of antibiotics. Teaching / Learning Approach Lectures, seminars and tutorials emphasize the concepts and principles of pathological changes and drug therapy. Tutorials and case studies are designed to supplement the theoretical content and to further develop students abilities in integrating theory into application. 312

321 Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, which may include case studies, presentations, exercises, tests or an examination designed to develop and assess students knowledge and application of pathophysiology and pharmacology, as well as, to evaluate students level of understanding regarding the various causative factors and the pharmaceutical approaches to diseases. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook McCance, K.L. and Huether, S.E. Pathophysiology: The biologic basis for disease in adults and children (3 rd ed.) St. Louis: Mosby. (1998). References Carlson, J.H., Haymaker, S.R. and Hensinger, M.A. Pathophysiolgy (2 nd Lippincott. (1999). ed.) Philadelphia: Conor, M. and Ferguson-Smith, M. Essential Medical Genetics. London: Blackwell Science. (1997). Guyton, A.C. and Hall J.E. Textbook of Medical Physiology (9 th ed.) Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders. (1996). Harman, D., Holliday, R. and Meydani, M. (Eds) Towards Prolongation of the Health Life Span. New York: New York Academy of Sciences. (1998). Kee, J.L. and Hayes, E.R. Pharmacology. A Nursing Process Approach. (2 nd ed.). Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders. (1997). Mera, S.L. Understanding Disease; Pathology and Prevention. Cheltenham: Stanley Thornes Publishers Ltd. (1997). Mitchell, M.K. Nutrition across the Lifespan. Philadelphia: Saunders. (1998). Mulvihill, M.L. Human Diseases. A systemic approach (4 th ed.) Stamford: Appleton & Lange. (1995). Nicholls, J.M. et al. Pathology of fatal sever acute respiratory syndrome, The Lancet (2003). Philp, R.P. Environmental Hazards and Human Health. New York: Lewis Publishers. (1995). Porth, C. M. Pathophysiology. Concepts of Altered Health States (5 th ed.) Philadelphia: Lippincott. (1998). Robbins, S. and Kumar, V. Basic Pathophysiology (4 th ed.) Philadelphia: Saunders. (1997). Robbins, S.L., Cotran, R.S. and Kumar, V. Pocket Companion to Robbins Pathologic Basis of Disease. Montreal: W.B. Saunders. (1995). 313

322 Sadler, M., Strain, B. and Cabellero, B. (Eds) The Encyclopedia of Nutrition. London: Academic Press. (1995). Skidmore-Roth, L. Mosby s nursing drug reference. St. Louis: Mosby. (1998). Tortora, G.J. and Grabowski, S.R. Principles of Anatomy and Physiology (8 th ed.) New York: Harper Collins College. (1996). Journals Journal of Applied Physiology Journal of Anatomy Journal of Immunology Journal of Pathology Journal of Physiology Lancet Useful Websites Pathophysiolgy & Digestive system: it consists of information and self-evaluation guideline Radiological Appearances of Recent Cases of Atypical Pneumonia in Hong Kong: Sciencexpress: The Lancet: World Health Organization: Useful Websites for Pharmacology Drug finder: DrugNetHK - A local Chinese drug net that provides drug-related information to the public: Pharmacology and legal drugs in about about.com: 314

323 Medline plus drug information: Medscape nursing - Powerful search engines enable you to search journals, drugs, definitions: Rxlist -. A website for searching drugs: South African Electronic package inserts - A powerful drug search engine. You can find drugs by trade name, generic name or classification: - Yahoo health - AV Materials Asia Television LTD. (2003, March 30.). Newsline; Discussing the Atypical Pneumonia Outbreak with Yeok Eng-Kiong. Hong Kong. (Video recording) Call number: VCD 315

324 CC3492 Chinese Government and Politics Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Non-Science Medium of Instruction Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese), supplemented by English Teaching Pattern 28 hours Lecture 14 hours Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject equips students with the knowledge about the nature and characteristics of political institutions of China after 1949, including the State Council, the National People s Congress, and the Chinese People s Political Consultative Congress. It also helps students acquire a basic understanding of politics involved in the reform process, such as the politics of enterprise reform and of rural reform. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognise and identify the dynamics and tensions of China s domestic politics. develop competence in analyzing the Chinese government and politics by relating social science theories to the study of contemporary China. identify the issues involved in understanding the current situation about Chinese politics and government. effectively communicate information, arguments and analysis in a variety of forms. Indicative Contents Political Institutions of the Party State State Council; National People s Congress; Chinese People s Political Consultative Congress; Hierarchy of political administration. Chinese Communist Ideology Marxism; Maoism; The thought of Deng Xiaoping; Nationalism. Dynamics and tensions of China s domestic politics Elites and the cadre system; Provincial and local politics. Case studies Reform and corruption; Peasants burden and fee-for-tax reform; Village self-government and the prospect of democracy. 316

325 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction of major studies in Chinese politics, and the explanation of key concepts, with specific reference to specific case studies and current issues wherever appropriate. Occasional group discussions might be arranged. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of specific issues. The activities in tutorials normally include student presentations of specific cases and discussions of related problems. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and examination, all designed to develop and assess students critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Wang, James C.F., Contemporary Chinese Politics: An Introduction, Prentice Hall (latest ed.). References Jia, Hao, and Lin, Zhimin, Changing Central-Local Relations in China: Reform and State Capacity, Westview Press (latest ed.). Lampton, David, Policy implementation in post-mao China, University of California Press (latest ed.). Perry, Elizabeth, and Selden, Mark, Chinese Society: Change, Conflict and Resistance, Routledge (latest ed.). 317

326 CC3728 Analytical Chemistry Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 8 hours of Tutorial 6 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites CC2439 General Chemistry Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject widens students horizon in chemical analysis with more specific, powerful and novel methods of analysis. Students will be equipped with a broad theoretical knowledge of analytical science and technology. Emphasis will be put on problem solving skills for approaching analytical instrumentation. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: select suitable statistical methods for chemical analysis carry out accurate measurement with the analytical instrument describe the underlying principles of and distinguish various analytical instruments integrate analytical principles to laboratory applications of instrument identify the advantages of instrumental analysis Indicative Contents Statistical analysis Statistical treatment of data; Normal distribution; Standard deviation and standard error of mean; Experimental errors; Accuracy and precision. Basic chemical analysis Volumetric analysis; Methods of sampling and sample preparation; Ionic equilibrium. Instrumentation UV-visible and IR spectroscopy; Beers law; Electrophoretic techniques; Atomic emission and absorption spectrophotometry; Magnetic Resonance Spectrometry; Inductively-coupled plasma (ICP) atomic emission spectroscopy; Principles and applications of chromatographic techniques such as gas chromatography; High-performance liquid chromatography. 318

327 Teaching/Learning Approach The course is composed of three parts: lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions. Lectures provide theory-based teaching. Examples and references will be given to students wherever appropriate. Tutorials provide students with opportunities to broaden, enlighten and reinforce the general knowledge obtained in the lectures. Students will be involved in problem based activities, classroom feedback, case studies, presentations, and discussions in the tutorial. Laboratory sessions allow students to understand, verify, and apply knowledge developed from lectures. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools including presentations, classroom feedback, laboratory reports, group discussion, tests and an examination will be used to assess the process of learning as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Skoog, D.A., Holler, J.F. and Nieman, T.A. Principles of instrumental analysis. Philadelphia: Saunders College Pub.; Orlando, Fla.: Harcourt Brace College Publishers. (5 th ed). References Christian, G. D. Analytical chemistry. New York: Wiley & Sons. (5 th ed.). Dead. J.R. Atomic absorption and plasma spectroscopy. Chichester: New York. (2 nd ed). Dean, J.R. Practical inductively coupled plasma spectroscopy. Chichester, England, Hoboken, N.J. Wiley. Fowlis, I.A. Gas chromatography: analytical chemistry. New York: Wiley & Sons. (2 nd ed). Lambert, J.B. Nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy: an introduction to principles, applications, and experimental methods. Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Pearson Education. Lindsay, S. High performance liquid chromatography. New York: Wiley. (2 nd ed). Thomas M.J.K. Ultraviolet and visible spectroscopy. New York: John Wiley. (2 nd ed). 319

328 CC3729 Computer Game Programming Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites CC2005 Applied Computing & CC2201 Principles of Programming Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject aims to equip students with the fundamental concepts and algorithms for the design and development of computer game programs. Students will be provided with hands-on practice in using tools for designing and developing computer game programs. Through applying computer programming languages, multimedia application programming interfaces (APIs) and development framework in the computer game design and programming, students critical and creative thinking can be attained. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the essential concepts and algorithms for the design and development of computer games apply critical and creative thinking to analyze and design computer games make use of the various features and capabilities of programming languages, multimedia APIs and development framework to design and develop computer games recognize the effectiveness and opportunities of the computer game industry collaborate, organize and communicate effectively as part of team efforts in the design and development of computer games Indicative Contents Computer Game Overview Background and history of computer game industry; Issues on computer game industry; Computer game genres; Game production process; Technological, social, cultural, legal and ethical aspects; Future trend of computer games. Game Design Integration of multimedia elements; Arts and animation; Sound and music; Lighting and shading; User-interface design; Storyline and design documentation. 320

329 Game Platforms Game platforms PC-based, console-based, web-based, handheld, mobile and wireless game platforms. Programming Languages, Multimedia and Game Development Tools Java; J2ME; C#, C/C++; Flash; DirectX and OpenGL; Game engine and other authoring tools for computer game development. Game Programming Techniques Algorithms in game rotation, interpolation; level of details; acceleration, motion analysis, game physics, collision detection; Multi-threading and multi-player games. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts and algorithms for computer game development, with specific reference to related hardware and software technologies. Under the supervision and guidance of the lecturer, students will have hands-on practice in using various tools in tutorials for computer game programming assignments and projects, thus building up their technical competence in applying game development applications. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools including computer game design and programming assignments, group projects, tests and an examination are designed to assess students understanding of the fundamental computer game design and development concepts, applicability of computer game development tools individually and in a team work, critical and creative thinking, analytical skills as well as communication skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Rabin, S. Introduction to Game Development. Charles River Media. (latest ed.). References Astle, D. Beginning OpenGL game programming. Thomson. (latest ed.). Dalman, D. Core Techniques and Algorithms in Game Programming. New Riders Publishing. (latest ed.). Deitel and Deitel. Java How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Deitel, Deitel and Goldberg. Internet & World Wide Web How to Program. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Lewinski, J. S. Developer s Guide to Computer Game Design. WordWare Publishing. (latest ed.). 321

330 Martz, P. OpenGL distilled. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.). Miller, T. Managed DirectX 9 Kick Start: Graphics and Game Programming, Sams. (latest ed.). Seddon, C. OpenGL game development. WordWare Publishing. (latest ed.). Walnum, C. Game programming with DirectX in 21 days. Sams. (latest ed.). Wells, M. J. J2ME Game Programming. Thomson. (latest ed.). 322

331 CC3730 Dynamics and Control Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 10 hours of Tutorial 4 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites CC2302 Engineering Mathematics Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject provides students with the fundamental concepts and solution strategies of planar motion of particles, rigid bodies, and mechanical vibration problems. It provides the essential knowledge of dynamic responses of first-order and second-order systems, and time-domain specifications. It also introduces feedback control and its application to improve the overall system behaviour. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the planar motion of particles and rigid bodies apply classic kinetic theories and use of free body diagrams to derive the equations of motion for particles and rigid bodies in planar motion describe the free and forced vibration responses of a single-degree-of-freedom system analyse the dynamic responses of first-order and second-order systems due to different inputs design simple controllers to improve the dynamic performance of a system according to timedomain specifications Indicative Contents Dynamics Kinematics and kinetics of particles: Rectilinear motion; Plane curvilinear motion; Relative motion; Equation of motion; Work and energy; Impulse and momentum. Plane kinematics of rigid bodies: Rotation; Absolute motion; Relative velocity; Instantaneous centre of zero velocity; Relative acceleration; Motion relative to rotating axes. Plane kinetics of rigid bodies: Force, mass and acceleration; General equation of motion; Work and energy; Impulse; Momentum; Impulsemomentum equations; Impact and applications; Balancing of rotating masses. 323

332 Vibration of a Single-degree-of-freedom System Free vibration of particles; Equation of motion; Damping effects; Forced vibration of particles; Vibration of rigid bodes; Energy methods; Free and forced vibration responses of a singledegree-of-freedom system. Dynamic Response of First-Order and Second-Order Systems Mathematical modeling of system; Parameters of first-order and second-order systems; System response analysis with step, ramp and impulse inputs using Laplace transform. Introduction to Feedback Control Analysis of open-loop and closed-loop systems; Transfer functions and block diagrams; Timedomain specification; System stability analysis; Time-domain analysis of control systems. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of the essential knowledge in planar motion of particles and rigid bodies, mechanical vibration systems and feedback control systems. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures. Laboratory sessions introduce to students the commonly used software in assisting the modeling, analysis and design of dynamic and control systems. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, tests and examination designed to develop and assess student s achievement of the subject expected learning outcomes. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Meriam, J. L. and Kraige, L. G. Engineering Mechanics. John Wiley. (latest ed.). Nise, N. S. Control System Engineering. John Wiley. (latest ed.). References Beer, F. P. and Johnson, E. R. Vector Mechanics for Engineers: Statics and Dynamics. McGraw- Hill. (latest ed.). Thomson, W. T. Theory of Vibration with Applications. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Steidel, R. F. Jr. An Introduction to Mechanical Vibration. John Wiley. (latest ed.). Ogata, K. Modern Control Engineering. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Phillips, C. L. and Harbor, R. D. Feedback Control Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). 324

333 CC3731 Electrical Engineering Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 10 hours of Tutorial 4 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites CC2305 Basic Electricity and Electronics Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This subject provides students with the basic concepts and techniques for the modeling and performance analysis of electrical equipment in buildings. It enables them to develop system models, and the realization of system parameters from appropriate tests and specification data. It also provides students with the fundamental knowledge of the main performance characteristics, limitations and applications of electrical equipment in buildings. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the operations of different electro-mechanical equipment in buildings develop equivalent circuits to model transformers, induction and synchronous machines identify appropriate tests to obtain the parameters of equivalent circuits for different electric machines analyse the performance of electric machines using appropriate equivalent circuit models enhance problem-solving abilities by applying electrical engineering principles develop interpersonal skills in teamwork and leadership Indicative Contents Fundamental Concepts Overview of electricity supply, distribution and utilisation in buildings; Magnetic circuits; Hysteresis; Eddy currents; Energy conversion. Transformers Construction; Self and mutual inductance; Equivalent circuits and per unit system; Losses; Shotcircuit and open-circuit tests; Efficiency and voltage regulation; Auto-transformers and instrument transformers; Three-phase Transformers: Connections; Performance analysis. 325

334 Induction Machines Classification and construction; Equivalent circuit parameters and testing; Performance characteristics; Analysis of starting and speed control methods. Synchronous Machines Construction; Applications; Equivalent circuit parameters and testing; Performance characteristics; Voltage and frequency control. D.C. Motors Construction; Performance characteristics; Speed Control. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of the major theorems and mathematical techniques used in the modeling and performance analysis of electrical equipment in buildings. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to reinforce their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures through the electro-mechanical problems. Laboratory sessions will be used to illustrate and assimilate some principles of electrical engineering and provide students with the opportunity to use software tools in assisting modeling and performance analysis of electrical equipment. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, tests and examination designed to develop and assess student s achievement of the subject expected learning outcomes. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Cathey, J. J. Electric Machines: Analysis and Design Applying MATLAB. McGraw Hill. (latest ed.). References Sen, P. C. Principles of Electric Machines and Power Electronics. John Wiley & Sons. (latest ed.). Theodore, W. Electrical Machines, Drives, and Power Systems. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Rigby, B. Design of Electrical Services for Buildings. Spon Press. (latest ed.). Lyshevski, S. E. Electromechanical Systems, Electric Machines, and Applied Mechatronics. CRC Press. (latest ed.). Boylestad, R. L. and Nashelsky, L. Introduction to Electricity, Electronics, and Electromagnetics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). 326

335 CC3732 Engineering Graphics and Computing Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 14 hours of Lecture 4 hours of Tutorial 24 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% Coursework Aims This subject provides students with an opportunity to learn and practice the essential knowledge and basic skills in using some common engineering-specific software, including the computer-aided design/drafting(cad) and computer simulation software. It also equips students with the concepts and techniques in engineering graphics and drafting so as to enable their abilities in engineering communication. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: apply the engineering graphics and simulation tools effectively to everyday engineering communications identify and evaluate the solutions for solving engineering problems using simulation software present simple engineering components and schematics graphically using hand sketching and CAD tools apply background knowledge or newly obtained information to review and investigate possible outcomes for engineering problems Indicative Contents Engineering Drafting Engineering graphics as a communication medium; geometrical sketching; problems and visualization; Orthographic Projection Systems; Sectioning; Auxiliary Projections; Axonometric projections and standard practices; Dimension and tolerance; Limit and fits; Surface texture; Welding symbol. Computer Drafting Introduction to CAD/CAM system and basic computer drawing techniques; Construction of 2D objects; Concepts of blocks and external referencing; Introduction to 3D solid modeling and construction of 3D solid objects; Construction of complex 3D solid objects; Engineering documentation of 2D objects and 3D solid objects; Annotation, dimensioning and plotting; Screw fasteners; Creation of a solid model; Design table; Assembly basics. 327

336 Electronic Design Automation (EDA) Electronic circuit schematics and logic diagrams; EDA software; Placement of components; Capturing; Annotation; Labelling; Net list generation; Electronic parts library; Symbols; Physical packages; Discrete components; Integrated circuits; Logic and analogue circuits; Gate and pin definition; Swappability; Device symbols and layout; System block diagrams and representation; Architectural wiring diagram; Wiring table and diagrams for electronic and electrical installations. Basic Scientific Computing Scientific computing development environment; Mathematical Operations; Matrices; Linear algebra; Polynomials and interpolation; Data analysis and statistics; Function functions; differential equations; Programming; Application examples; flow control statements; Graphical user interface; Data structures; Input/output; Object-oriented capabilities; Graphics; Data plotting; Formatting; Basic printing and exporting interfaces; Pie chart; Bar chart; Area chart; Linear and log plots; 3D-View plot; Experiment with fitting curves to data. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on introducing the essential knowledge and concepts on using the computer software and the basic techniques on engineering drafting. In addition, the modeling techniques of the engineering problems are introduced. Tutorials and laboratory sessions provide students with the opportunity to practice and apply their knowledge gained from lectures with the hand-on experiences on using the software and the engineering drafting. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, assignments, group projects, presentations, and tests to develop and assess the students understanding on the principles and problem solving techniques in using the computer software and the engineering drafting. Indicative Readings References Grabowski, R. Using AutoCAD 2006, Advanced. Thomson Delmar Learning. (latest ed.). Grabowski, R. Using AutoCAD 2006, Basics. Thomson Delmar Learning. (latest ed.). Cheng, R. Maximizing Autodesk Mechanical Desktop Delmar Learning, N.Y. (latest ed.). Lee, K. Principles of CAD/CAM/CAE systems Reading. Mass. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.). Tickoo S. AutoCAD 2006: A Problem Solving Approach. Thomson Course Technology (latest ed.). SolidWorks Essentials: parts and assemblies Vol.1 & 2. Concord, Mass, SolidWorks Corp. (latest ed.). 328

337 Howard, W. E. Introduction to solid modeling using Solidworks. New York: McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Murray, D. Inside SolidWorks. Clifton Park, NY: Thomson Delmar Learning. (latest ed.). Bertline, G. R. et al. Engineering Graphic Communication. Irwin. (latest ed.). Giesecke F. E. et al. Engineering Graphics. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Giesecke, F. E., et al. Modern Graphics Communication. Prentice-Hall, N.J. (latest ed.). Edward, A. L. Complete Guide to Understanding Electronics Diagrams. Prentice-Hall, N.J. (latest ed.). Raskhodoff, N. M. Electronic Drafting and Design. Prentice-Hall, N.J. (latest ed.). Code of Practice for the Electricity (wiring) Regulations, EMSD, The Government of the HKSAR. Goody, R. W. MicroSim PSpice for Windows. Upper Saddle River, N. J., Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Edward W. K. and Bonnie H. Fundamentals of Signals and Systems Using the Web and Matlab. Prentice-Hall. (latest ed.). Roberts M.J. Signals and Systems: Analysis Using Transform Methods and MATLAB. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). Biran A. and Breiner M. Matlab for Engineers. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). 329

338 CC3733 Further Calculus Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites CC2406 Calculus Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims To provide an introduction to several-variable calculus and its applications to solving problems in business, statistics, sciences and engineering. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: develop understanding of partial derivative of a function of several variables and its geometric meaning apply various rules of differentiation to compute partial derivatives develop the concept of multiple integrals of a function of several variables over a plane or space domain use various methods to evaluate multiple integrals apply multivariable calculus to problems in geometry, engineering, statistics and physics think analytically and logically Indicative Contents Functions of several variables Concept of functions of several variables, limits and continuity in high dimensions. Partial Differentiation Partial derivatives, gradients and directional derivatives, total differential, chain rule, Taylor s Formula, relative extrema, Lagrange multipliers and constrained optimization. Double Integrals Double integrals over rectangle, iterative integrals, change of variables, Jacobians, double integrals in polar form. Triple Integrals Triple integrals, triple integrals in cylindrical and spherical coordinates. 330

339 Applications of Multiple Integrals Areas and volumes by double integration, surface areas, geometric, statistical and physical applications such as center of mass, centroids, averages, etc. Teaching/Learning Approach The lectures aim to enforce students understanding and skills in calculus. The emphasis will be on the differential and integral calculus for functions of several variables. Applications in geometry, statistics, sciences and engineering will also be addressed. Assessment Approach The continuous assessment is comprised of homework assignments, in-class quizzes and tests. The assignments are used to assist the students to reflect on and review their progress. The end-ofsemester examination is used to assess the knowledge acquired by the students and their ability to apply and extend such knowledge. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks Finney, R. L. Thomas' Calculus. Addison-Wesley. (latest ed.). Reference Stein, S. K. Calculus and Analytic Geometry. McGraw Hill. (latest edition). Salas, H. and Anderson. Calculus. Wiley. (latest ed.). Stewart, J. Multivariable Calculus. Brook/Cole. (latest ed.). 331

340 CC3734 General Biochemistry Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 8 hours of Tutorial 6 hours of Laboratory Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% Coursework 50% Examination Aims This subject introduces to students the importance of macromolecules and the basic biochemical reactions in living organisms. This subject serves as a framework of fundamental information for the students who wish to pursue further study in the biological field at college level. The design of the subject is to introduce to students the construction of these relatively simple organic blocks into the complicate biological macromolecules of life, the metabolic pathways and the interactions of the macromolecules as in energy transduction and enzymic actions of the life-form. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the structure and the properties of carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids and nucleic acid bases; and to appreciate how these building blocks are made into the important biological macromolecules relate the structure with the function of some important biomolecules understand the mechanism of the transduction of energy by the transformation of macromolecules appreciate the flow, control points and interplay of the metabolism of major fuel molecules explain the essential principles of enzymology appreciate the applications of biochemical techniques in some biotechnological fields related to our daily lives Indicative Contents Properties of carbohydrate Structure and function of carbohydrate molecule in life Biochemical Pathway of Carbohydrate Glycolysis, pentose phosphate shunt, gluconeogenesis and TCA cycle; electron transport & oxidative phosphorylation, light reactions to photosynthesis Properties of Lipid Structure and function of lipid molecule in life 332

341 Biochemical Pathway of Lipid Metabolism of lipid, beta-oxidation Properties of Protein Amino acids covalently linked as constituents of protein, giving the three dimensional structure and hence function of protein molecules in life; protein folding & dynamics Biochemical Pathway of Protein Overview of nitrogen metabolism of lipid, nitrogen fixation, urea cycle Enzymology Enzyme kinetics and mechanisms Introduction to Biotechnology Application of biochemical technology, for example, in food production, fermentation, pharmaceutics and environmental protection. Teaching/Learning Approach There are three parts in this subject: lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions. Lectures are designed to provide with the basic theories. Examples and references will be given to students whenever appropriate. Tutorials are conducted to reinforce the general knowledge obtained in the lectures, and to broaden the scope of lectures, for example, into the application in the field of biotechnology. Students will be involved in problem-based activities, classroom feedback and discussions in the tutorials. Laboratory sessions are used to illustrate the theoretical knowledge and demonstrate to students the standard biochemical assay and techniques in an interactive and practical manner. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools including essays, laboratory reports, group discussion as well as participation, tests and an examination will be used to assess the process of learning as well as analytical and communication skills. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Berg, J.M., Tymoczko, J.L. and Stryer, L. Biochemistry. New York: Freeman. (6 th ed). References Champe, P.C. Biochemistry. London: Baltimore: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. (3 rd ed). Metzler, D.E. Biochemistry: the chemical reactions of living cells. London: Academic Press. (2 nd ed). Nelson, D.L. and Cox, M.M. Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry. NY: Freeman. (4 th ed). 333

342 CC3735 Intermediate Environmental Science Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 26 hours of Lecture 8 hours of Tutorial 8 hours of Laboratory and Field work Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject introduces the fundamental and useful concepts in the study of the environment. The theoretical basis of environmental science will be introduced from an interdisciplinary perspective. Students will be introduced to the key environmental problems, the ways how natural balances are maintained within limits, and how human beings apply the knowledge to preserve and manage the environment. The goal is to create a general understanding of the environmental issues and to show the techniques to measure and describe the environmental parameters using a set of scientific standards. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognize the inter-relation among organisms, and between organisms and the environment understand environmental pollution and its causes and impacts to the nature and mankind understand how nature restores from pollution with limitations and once deviated outside the limits, the preventive and remedial measures that humans can help apply their knowledge of general environmental science to protect the environment and improve the quality of life as a member of a society as well as a citizen in the global village Indicative Contents Environment Concerns and Balance Environment of Earth and areas of concerns; restoration of the natural environment from deviated and limitations of nature Inter-relation of Organisms in Ecosystem Ecosystems and ecological communities, biological diversity and their inter-relation, niche and food chain, biological productivity and conservation; impact of human population on environment 334

343 Biogeochemical Cycles Cycles and flow of carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus and sulphur Environmental Geology & Geospheric Pollution Control Land pollution, effect on food chain, ways of control and clean up Energy Human energy consumption, resources, limitation and the pollution associated with energy consumption, particularly over-exploitation of the fossil fuel in industry and transport; renewable and sustainable energy sources Air Environment The atmosphere, atmospheric chemistry, climate, global warming, air pollution, photochemical smog, suspended particles, acid rain, thermopollution, ozone depletion Water Environment Water quality, supply and distribution of drinking water, management of clean water resources, water pollution and treatment Waste Management Generation, classification, handling and transportation of waste; 3R (Reduction, Recycling and Reuse) concept in waste management, treatment and disposal of different types of municipal wastes Environment Control & Management Preservation of environment, local laws and reinforcement agent of environmental protection, environmental audit and impact assessment. Teaching/Learning Approach The subject comprises of four parts: lectures, tutorials, field work and laboratory classes. Lectures are designed to provide students with the basic theories. Tutorials are conducted to reinforce the general knowledge obtained in the lectures, to clarify queries and to broaden the scope of topics covered in lectures. Students will be involved in problem-based activities, classroom feedback and discussions in the tutorials. Field trips show students the ways of collecting ecological samples for laboratory measurements. Laboratory sessions illustrate the theoretical knowledge and demonstrate to students the techniques of some standard measurements of the ecological samples. Students are required to report on the ecological findings using a scientific format. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools including tutorial discussion, field trip participation, laboratory reports, tests and an examination will be used to assess the process of learning. Students are expected to apply theoretical information during the field trip and practice the techniques in subsequent laboratory classes. Last but not least, students are expected to develop an inquiry and analytical mind, and to report on and communicate the ecological findings scientifically. 335

344 Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Botkin, D.B. and Keller, E.A. Environmental Science: Earth as a Living Planet. NY: Wiley. (5 th ed). References Manahan, S.E. Environmental Science and Technology. Boca Ranton: Lewis Publishers. (7 th ed). Skinner, B.J., Porter, S.C. and Botkin, D.B. The Blue Planet: an introduction to Earth System Science. New York: Wiley. (2 nd ed). Spiro, T.G. and Stigliani, W.M. Chemistry of the Environment. N.J.: Prentice Hall. (2 nd ed). 336

345 CC3736 Mutlimedia and User Interface Design Level 3 Credits 3 Nature Science Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of Lecture 14 hours of Tutorial Prerequisites Nil Exclusion CC3211 Human Factors and User Interfaces Assessment 40% Coursework 60% Examination Aims This course provides students with a broad view of both the theoretical and practical issues in human factors in the design of human-computer interfaces (HCI). After studying this course, students will know how to design an information system well using the HCI principles, and have a chance to apply multimedia and hypermedia technology in HCI design and development. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognize the importance of HCI foundations, such as human, computer and the interface architecture identify issues of HCI design, such as usability, the design process, models of the user, dialogue notations, implementation support, and evaluation techniques apply multimedia and hypermedia technology in HCI design and development show enhanced analytical and critical thinking skills Indicative Contents Foundation of Human Computer Interaction What is HCI; Importance of HCI; History of HCI; Roles of various disciplines played within HCI. Human Characteristics Perception and representation; Models and limits of human memory; Mental models; Use of metaphors; Support user aspects of language; Social and organizational aspects. Usability and Evaluation Usability engineering; Cognitive models for the HCI users; Evaluation techniques; Experiments and benchmarking. 337

346 HCI Design Process and Dialogue Notations Task analysis and predictive modeling; Dialogue interaction: types and techniques, multimedia and non-graphical dialogues; Response time; Statistical models for describing interaction processes. Multimedia Tools Sound editor; Video editor; Computer graphics; Computer animation. HCI Application Multimedia programming; Web programming; High-level tools. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will emphasize the concepts and applications of the HCI principles using an interactive approach such as case analysis and discussion, classroom hands-on HCI design practice, etc. Tutorials will be conducted in the laboratory to explore issues arising from the lectures by means of exercises on hypermedia technology. Students will also be asked to analyze selected works of the others and critically evaluate them. Assessment Approach Case studies, hand-on practices in computer laboratory, design homework, tests and examinations will be used to assess students mastery of this subject. All of them help evaluate their understanding and appreciation of human-computer interaction. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbook McCracken, D. D. and Wolfe, R. J. User-Centered Website Development: A Human-Computer Interaction Approach. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). References Dix, A. J., Finlay, J. E., Abowd, G. D. and Beale, R. Human-Computer Interaction. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Gosselin, D. XHTML Comprehensive. Prentice Hall. (latest ed.). Shuman, J. Multimedia Concepts - Illustrated introductory, Thomson Course Technology. (latest ed.). Vaughan, T. Multimedia Making It Works. McGraw-Hill. (latest ed.). 338